InteliLite

AMF20
Controller for single gen-set
applications

SW version 1.9.0
1 Document information 6
2 System overview 11
3 Applications overview 19
4 Installation and wiring 21
5 Controller setup 59
6 Communication 138
7 Technical data 164
8 Appendix 165

Copyright © 2018 ComAp a.s.

Written by Michal Slavata
Prague, Czech Republic
ComAp a.s., U Uranie 1612/14a,
170 00 Prague 7, Czech Republic
Tel: +420 246 012 111
E-mail: info@comap-control.com, www.comap-control.com Global Guide
Table of contents
1 Document information 6
1.1 Clarification of notation 6
1.2 About this Global Guide 6
1.3 Legal notice 6
1.4 General warnings 8
1.4.1 Remote control and programing 8
1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility 8
1.4.3 Dangerous voltage 8
1.4.4 Adjust the setpoints 8
1.5 Certifications and standards 9
1.6 Document history 9
1.7 Symbols in this manual 10

2 System overview 11
2.1 General description 11
2.1.1 The key features of InteliLite 11
2.2 True RMS measurement 11
2.3 Configurability and monitoring 11
2.3.1 Supported configuration and monitoring tools 11
2.3.2 Configuration parts 12
2.4 PC Tools 13
2.4.1 InteliConfig 13
2.4.2 WinScope 13
2.5 Plug-in Modules 14
2.5.1 CM-Ethernet 14
2.5.2 CM-4G-GPS 14
2.5.3 CM-GPRS 14
2.5.4 CM-RS232-485 15
2.5.5 EM-BIO8-EFCP 15
2.6 CAN modules 16
2.6.1 Inteli IO8/8 16
2.6.2 Inteli AIN8 16
2.6.3 Inteli AIN8TC 17
2.6.4 Inteli AIO9/1 17
2.6.5 IGS-PTM 18
2.6.6 IGL-RA15 18

InteliLite Global Guide 2

3 Applications overview 19
3.1 AMF - Automatic Mains Failure Start 19
3.2 MRS - Manual Remote Start 19

4 Installation and wiring 21

4.1 Package content 21
4.2 Controller installation 21
4.2.1 Dimensions 21
4.2.2 Mounting 22
4.3 Terminal Diagram 23
4.4 Recommended wiring 24
4.4.1 General 25
4.4.2 Grounding 25
4.4.3 Power supply 25
4.4.4 Measurement wiring 27
4.4.5 Magnetic pick-up 44
4.4.6 Binary inputs 45
4.4.7 Binary Outputs 46
4.4.8 Emergency stop 47
4.4.9 Analog inputs 47
4.4.10 CAN bus and RS485 wiring 51
4.4.11 USB 54
4.4.12 Example of AMF Wiring 54
4.4.13 Example of MRS Wiring 55
4.4.14 Analog as binary or tristate inputs 56
4.5 Plug-in module installation 56
4.5.1 Installation 56
4.6 Maintenance 58
4.6.1 Backup battery replacement 58

5 Controller setup 59
5.1 Default configuration 59
5.1.1 Binary inputs 59
5.1.2 Binary outputs 59
5.1.3 Analog inputs 59
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools connection 60
5.2.1 USB 60
5.2.2 RS232/RS485 61
5.2.3 Ethernet 62
5.3 Operator Guide 64

InteliLite Global Guide 3

 5.3.1 Front panel elements 65
5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure 67
5.3.3 Browsing alarms 79
5.3.4 Password 80
5.3.5 Information screen 86
5.3.6 Language selection 87
5.3.7 Display contrast adjustment 88
5.4 Remote Display 88
5.4.1 General description 89
5.4.2 IL3-RD Firmware installation 89
5.4.3 Wiring 89
5.4.4 Interconnection variants 90
5.4.5 Connection process 91
5.4.6 Connection troubleshooting 91
5.4.7 Function description 92
5.4.8 Firmware compatibility 92
5.5 Functions 93
5.5.1 Start-stop sequence 93
5.5.2 AMF sequence 95
5.5.3 Operating Modes 96
5.5.4 Engine start 97
5.5.5 Stabilization 99
5.5.6 Connecting to load 99
5.5.7 MRS operation 99
5.5.8 AMF operation 99
5.5.9 Engine cool down and stop 100
5.5.10 Alarm management 101
5.5.11 History log 107
5.5.12 Breaker control 108
5.5.13 Exercise timer 111
5.5.14 Service timers 117
5.5.15 Additional running engine indications 118
5.5.16 Voltage phase sequence detection 118
5.5.17 Gen-set operation states 119
5.5.18 Sensor curves 121
5.5.19 PLC 122
5.5.20 Tier 4 Final 129
5.5.21 Alternate configuration 132
5.5.22 ECU Frequency selection 133

InteliLite Global Guide 4

 5.5.23 Cybernetic security 133

6 Communication 138
6.1 PC 138
6.1.1 Direct communication 138
6.1.2 Remote communication 140
6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems 151
6.2.1 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP 151

7 Technical data 164

8 Appendix 165
8.1 Controller objects 166
8.1.1 Setpoints 167
8.1.2 Values 364
8.1.3 Logical binary inputs 402
8.1.4 Logical binary outputs 444
8.1.5 Logical analog inputs 489
8.1.6 PLC 514
8.2 Alarms 524
8.2.1 Alarms level 1 524
8.2.2 Alarms level 2 539
8.2.3 Fail sensor and other types 554
8.3 Modules 556
8.3.1 Plug-In modules 557
8.3.2 CAN modules 569

InteliLite Global Guide 5

1 Document information
1.1 Clarification of notation 6
1.2 About this Global Guide 6
1.3 Legal notice 6
1.4 General warnings 8
1.5 Certifications and standards 9
1.6 Document history 9
1.7 Symbols in this manual 10

6 back to Table of contents

1.1 Clarification of notation

Note: This type of paragraph calls readers attention to a notice or related theme.

IMPORTANT: This type of paragraph highlights a procedure, adjustment etc., which can cause a
damage or unproper function of the equipment if not performed correctly and may not be clear at
first sight.

Example: This type of paragraph contains information that is used to illustrate how a specific function
works.

1.2 About this Global Guide

This manual contains important instructions for InteliLite controllers family that shall be followed during
installation and maintenance of the controllers.
This manual provides general information how to install and operate InteliLite controllers.
This manual is dedicated for:
Operators of gen-sets
Gen-set control panel builders
For everybody who is concerned with installation, operation and maintenance of the gen-set

1.3 Legal notice

This End User's Guide /Manual as part of the Documentation is an inseparable part of ComAp’s Product and
may be used exclusively according to the conditions defined in the “USER or Distributor LICENSE
AGREEMENT CONDITIONS– COMAP CONTROL SYSTEMS SOFTWARE” (License Agreement) and in the
“ComAp a.s. Standard Terms for sale of Products and provision of Services” (Standard Terms)
ComAp’s License Agreement is governed by the Czech Authorship Act 121/2000 Col., by international treaties
and by other relevant legal documents regulating protection of the intellectual properties (TRIPS).
The End User and/or ComAp’s Distributor shall only be permitted to use this End User's Guide /Manual with
ComAp Control System Registered Products. The Documentation is not intended and applicable for any other
purpose.

InteliLite Global Guide 6

 ComAp reserves the right to update this End User's Guide /Manual at any time. ComAp does not assume any
responsibility for its use outside of the scope of the Standard Terms and the License Agreement.
Licensed End User is entitled to make only necessary number of copies of the End User's Guide /Manual. Any
translation of this End User's Guide /Manual without the prior written consent of ComAp is expressly prohibited!
Even if the prior written consent from ComAp is acquired, ComAp does not take any responsibility for the
content and quality of any such translation. ComAp will deem a translation equal to this End User's
Guide/Manual only if it agrees to verify such a translation. The terms and conditions of such verification must be
included in the written consent.
For more details relating to the Ownership, Extent of Permitted Reproductions Term of Use of the
Documentation and to the Confidentiality rules please review and comply with the ComAp’s END
USER or Distributor LICENSE AGREEMENT CONDITIONS– COMAP CONTROL SYSTEMS
SOFTWARE and STANDARD TERMS FOR SALE OF PRODUCTS AND PROVISION OF SERVICES
available on the www.comap-control.com.
Security Risk Disclaimer
Pay attention to the following recommendations and measures to increase the level of security of ComAp
products and services.
Please note that possible cyber-attacks cannot be fully avoided by the below mentioned recommendations and
set of measures already performed by ComAp, but by following them the cyber-attacks can be considerably
reduced and thereby to reduce the risk of damage. ComAp does not take any responsibility for the actions of
persons responsible for cyber-attacks, nor for any damage caused by the cyber-attack. However, ComAp is
prepared to provide technical support to resolve problems arising from such actions, including but not limited to
restoring settings prior to the cyber-attacks, backing up data, recommending other preventive measures against
any further attacks.
Warning: Some forms of technical support may be provided against payment. There is no legal or factual
entitlement for technical services provided in connection to resolving problems arising from cyber-attack or
other unauthorized accesses to ComAp's Products or Services.
General security recommendations and set of measures
1. AccessCode
• Change the AccessCode BEFORE the device is connected to a network.
• Use a secure AccessCode – ideally a random string of 8 characters containing lowercase, uppercase letters
and digits.
• For each device use a different AccessCode.
2. Password
• Change the password BEFORE the device enters a regular operation.
• Do not leave displays or PC tools unattended if an user, especially administrator, is logged in.
3. Controller Web interface
• The controller web interface at port TCP/80 is based on http, not https, and thus it is intended to be used only
in closed private network infrastructures.
• Avoid exposing the port TCP/80 to the public Internet.
4. MODBUS/TCP
• The MODBUS/TCP protocol (port TCP/502) is an instrumentation protocol designed to exchange data
between locally connected devices like sensors, I/O modules, controllers etc. From it’s nature it does not
contain any kind of security – neither encryption nor authentication. Thus it is intended to be used only in closed
private network infrastructures.

InteliLite Global Guide 7

 • Avoid exposing the port TCP/502 to the public Internet.
5. SNMP
• The SNMP protocol (port UDP/161) version 1,2 is not encrypted. Thus it is intended to be used only in closed
private network infrastructures.
• Avoid exposing the port UDP/161 to the public Internet.
Used Open Source Software: mBed-TLS
https://www.mbed.com/en/development/software/mbed-tls/
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Used Font: zpix-pixel-font
WEBLINK to the license conditions: https://github.com/SolidZORO/zpix-pixel-font
Copyright (c) [2019] [Jason Fung]

1.4 General warnings

1.4.1 Remote control and programing
Controller can be remotely controlled. In the event that maintenance of gen-set has to be done, or controller has
to be programmed, check the following points to ensure that the engine cannot be started or any other parts of
the system cannot be effected.
To be sure:
Disconnect remote control
Disconnect binary outputs

1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility

Be aware to use proper combination of SW and HW versions.

1.4.3 Dangerous voltage

In no case touch the terminals for voltage and current measurement!
Always connect grounding terminals!
In any case do not disconnect controller CT terminals!

1.4.4 Adjust the setpoints

All parameters are adjusted to their typical values. However the setpoints has to be checked and adjusted to
their real values before the first starting of the gen-set.
IMPORTANT: Wrong adjustment of setpoints can destroy the gen-set.

Note: The controller contains a large number of configurable setpoints, because of this it is impossible to
describe all of its functions. Some functions can be changed or have different behavior in different SW versions.
Always check the Global guide and New feature list for SW version which is used in controller. This manual
only describes the product and is not guaranteed to be set for your application.

InteliLite Global Guide 8

 IMPORTANT: Be aware that the binary outputs can change state during and after software
reprogramming (before the controller is used again ensure that the proper configuration and
setpoint settings are set in the controller).

The following instructions are for qualified personnel only. To avoid personal injury do not perform any action not
specified in related guides for product.

1.5 Certifications and standards

EN 61000-6-2
EN 61000-6-4
EN 61010-1
EN 60068-2-1 (-20 °C/16 h for std version)
EN 60068-2-2 (70 °C/16 h)
EN 60068-2-6 (2÷25 Hz / ±1,6 mm; 25÷100 Hz / 4,0 g)
EN 60068-2-27 (a=500 m/s2; T=6 ms)
EN 60068-2-30:2005 25/55°C, RH 95%, 48hours
EN 60529 (front panel IP65, back side IP20)

1.6 Document history

Revision number Related sw. version Date Author
11 1.9.0 23.9.2019 Michal Slavata
10 1.8.0 21.5.2019 Michal Slavata
9 1.7.0 22.8.2018 Michal Slavata
8 1.7.0 4.7.2018 Michal Slavata
7 1.6.0 28.2.2018 Michal Slavata
6 1.5.0 9.10.2017 Michal Slavata
5 1.3.2 24.5.2017 Michal Slavata
4 1.2.1 5.12.2016 Michal Slavata
3 1.1.0 23.5.2016 Michal Slavata
2 1.1.0 6.3.2016 Michal Slavata
1 1.0.0 15.7.2016 Michal Slavata

InteliLite Global Guide 9

1.7 Symbols in this manual

Connector - Resistor
3 x Phases Grounding
male adjustable

Active Resistive
current Contact GSM sensor
sensor RPTC
GSM RS 232
Contactor
AirGate modem male

Controller RS 232
IG-AVRi
Alternating simplified female
current
Module IG-AVRi
Starter
Analog simplified TRANS
modem
Switch -
Current
Jumper manually
measuring
Battery operated

Current
Load Transformer
Binary measuring
output
USB type B
Diode Mains male
Breaker
contact
Ethernet USB type B
Mains female
Breaker male
contact
Voltage
Ethernet Mobile
measuring
female provider
Breaker
Passive Wifi / WAN /
Fuel
current LAN
solenoid
Breaker sensor
6 back to Document
information
Fuse Pick - up
Breaker

Fuse switch Relay coil

Capacitor
Relay coil of
Generator slow-
Coil
operating
Generator
Connector - schematic Resistor
female

InteliLite Global Guide 10

2 System overview
2.1 General description 11
2.2 True RMS measurement 11
2.3 Configurability and monitoring 11
2.4 PC Tools 13
2.5 Plug-in Modules 14
2.6 CAN modules 16

6 back to Table of contents

2.1 General description

InteliLite Family controllers are comprehensive gen-set controllers for single gen-sets operating in stand-by
(MRS) or back-up (AMF) applications. A modular construction allows upgrades to different levels of complexity
in order to provide the best solution for various customer applications. The controllers are equipped with a
powerful graphic display showing icons, symbols and bar graphs for intuitive operation, which, together with its
high level of functionality, sets new standards in Gen-set controls.

2.1.1 The key features of InteliLite

Easy-to-use operation and installation. The factory default configuration covers most applications
Various customizations are possible thanks to its configurability
Excellent remote communication capabilities
High level of support for EFI engines (most world producers)
High reliability

2.2 True RMS measurement

This controller measures AC values based on True RMS principle. This principle corresponds exactly to the
physical definition of alternating voltage effective values. Under normal circumstances the mains voltage
should have a pure sinusoidal waveform. However some nonlinear elements connected to the mains produce
harmonic waveforms with frequencies of multiplies of the basic mains frequency and this may result in
deformation of the voltage waveforms. The True RMS measurement gives accurate readings of effective values
not only for pure sinusoidal waveforms, but also for deformed waveforms.

2.3 Configurability and monitoring

One of the key features of the controller is the system’s high level of adaptability to the needs of each individual
application and wide possibilities for monitoring. This can be achieved by configuring and using the powerful
PC/mobile tools.

2.3.1 Supported configuration and monitoring tools

InteliConfig - complete configuration and single gen-set monitoring
WinScope - special graphical monitoring software

InteliLite Global Guide 11

 Note: Use the InteliConfig PC software to read, view and modify configuration from the controller or disk and
write the new configuration to the controller or disk.

The firmware of controller contains a large number of binary inputs and outputs needed for all necessary
functions available. However, not all functions are required at the same time on the same gen-set and also the
controller hardware does not have so many input and output terminals. One of the main tasks of the
configuration is mapping of “logical” firmware inputs and outputs to the “physical” hardware inputs and outputs.

2.3.2 Configuration parts

Mapping of logical binary inputs (functions) or assigning alarms to physical binary input terminals
Mapping of logical binary outputs (functions) to physical binary output terminals
Assigning sensor characteristics (curves) and alarms to analog inputs
Selection of peripheral modules, which are connected to the controller, and doing the same (as mentioned
above) for them
Selection of ECU type, if an ECU is connected
Changing the language of the controller interface

Image 2.1 Principle of binary inputs and outputs configuration

The controller is shipped with a default configuration, which should be suitable for most standard applications.
This default configuration can be changed only by using a PC with the InteliConfig software. See InteliConfig
documentation for details.
Once the configuration is modified, it can be saved to a file for later usage with another controller or for backup
purposes. The file is called archive and has the file extension .ail3. An archive contains a full image of the
controller at the time of saving (if the controller is online for the PC) except the firmware. Besides configuration it
also contains current adjustment of all setpoints, all measured values, a copy of the history log and a copy of the
alarm list.

InteliLite Global Guide 12

 The archive can be simply used for cloning controllers, i.e. preparing controllers with identical configuration and
settings.

2.4 PC Tools
2.4.1 InteliConfig
Configuration and monitoring tool for InteliLite controllers. See more in InteliConfig Reference Guide.

This tool provides the following functions:

Direct or internet communication with the
controller
Offline or online controller configuration
Controller firmware upgrade
Reading/writing/adjustment of setpoints
Reading of measured values
Browsing of controller history records
Exporting data into a XLS file
Controller language translation

2.4.2 WinScope
Special graphical controller monitoring software used mainly for commissioning and gen-set troubleshooting.
See more in the WinScope Reference guide.

This tool provides the following functions:

Monitoring and archiving of ComAp controller’s
parameters and values
View of actual / historical trends in controller
On-line change of controllers’ parameters for
easy regulator setup

InteliLite Global Guide 13

2.5 Plug-in Modules
2.5.1 CM-Ethernet
Internet/Ethernet module including web server.
10/100 Mbit ethernet interface in RJ45 socket
Web interface for monitoring and adjustment of
the controller
Direct IP connection for remote access from
InteliConfig
MODBUS/TCP and SNMP protocols for
integration of the controller into building
management systems or other remote
monitoring purposes
Sending of active emails

2.5.2 CM-4G-GPS
GSM/4G module
Wireless integrated solution
Quick and easy installation
Instant alarm SMS notification
System control over SMS
Quad Band GPRS/EDGE modem,
850/900/1800/1900 MHz, FDD LTE: Band 1,
Band 2, Band 3, Band 4, Band 5, Band 7, Band
8, Band 20, all bands with diversity,
WCDMA/HSDPA/HSUPA/HSPA+: Band 1,
Band 2, Band 5, Band 8, all bands with diversity
GPRS multi-slot class 10

2.5.3 CM-GPRS
GSM/GPRS module

Wireless integrated solution

Quick and easy installation
Instant alarm SMS notification
System control over SMS
Quad Band GPRS/EDGE modem,
850/900/1800/1900 MHz
GPRS multi-slot class 10

InteliLite Global Guide 14

2.5.4 CM-RS232-485
Communication module with two communication ports.
RS232 and RS485 interface
MODBUS
Serial connection to InteliConfig

2.5.5 EM-BIO8-EFCP
Hybrid current input and binary input/output extension module.
Up to 8 additional configurable binary inputs or
outputs

InteliLite Global Guide 15

2.6 CAN modules
2.6.1 Inteli IO8/8
The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, and 2 analog
outputs, or 16 binary inputs, 0 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs via switches inside the controller.

Configuration 8/8
8 Binary inputs (options: pull up or pull down
logic)
8 Binary outputs (options: Low side switch (LSS)
or High side switch (HSS))
2 Analog outputs (options: voltage (0-10V),
current (0-20mA) and PWM (5V, adjustable
frequency 200Hz-2,4kHz))
Configuration 16/0
16 Binary inputs (options: pull up or pull down
logic)
0 Binary outputs
2 Analog outputs (options: voltage (0-10V),
current (0-20mA) and PWM (5V, adjustable
frequency 200Hz-2,4kHz))

2.6.2 Inteli AIN8

The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 analog inputs.

Supported sensors:
Resistor 3-wire input
Common resistor: 0-250Ω, 0-2400Ω, 0-10kΩ
Temperature sensor: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100,
Ni1000
Current (active or passive sensors)
±20mA , 0-20mA, 4-20mA
Voltage
±1V, 0-2,4V, 0-5V, 0-10V
Lambda probes
Thermocouples are not supported (the
measuring loop was designed for lambda
probes, what caused non-support of
thermocouples)

InteliLite Global Guide 16

2.6.3 Inteli AIN8TC
8 Analog Channels Module
8 analog input channels for measuring
temperature by thermocouples

2.6.4 Inteli AIO9/1

9 Analog Inputs and 1 Analog Output Module
4× differential voltage inputs for measurement in
range of 0 - 65 V or -65 V – 0 V
4× shielded, galvanically separated ±75 mV
inputs
Resistance analog input 0 – 2500 ohm
One analog output

InteliLite Global Guide 17

2.6.5 IGS-PTM
The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, 4 analog
inputs and 1 analog outputs.
Configurable 8 binary and 4 analog inputs
Configurable 8 binary and 1 analog output
LEDs indicate the state of binary inputs/outputs
Measures values from Pt100 and Ni100 sensors
Analog inputs (resistance range 0-250 Ohms,
voltage range 0-100mV, current range 0-20mA -
selectable via jumper)
UL certified

2.6.6 IGL-RA15
Remote annunciator.
15 programmable LEDs with configurable colors
red-green-yellow
Lamp test function with status LED
Customizable labels
Local horn output
Maximal distance 200 m from the controller
Up to 4 units can be connected to the controller
UL certified

6 back to System overview

InteliLite Global Guide 18

3 Applications overview
3.1 AMF - Automatic Mains Failure Start 19
3.2 MRS - Manual Remote Start 19

6 back to Table of contents

3.1 AMF - Automatic Mains Failure Start

The typical scheme of Automatic Mains Failure Start application is shown below. The controller controls two
breakers – a mains breaker and a generator breaker. Feedback from both breakers isn’t necessary. InteliLite
controllers can also work without breaker feedbacks.

Image 3.1 AMF application overview

3.2 MRS - Manual Remote Start

The typical scheme of Manual Remote Start application is shown below. The controller controls one breaker – a
generator breaker. Feedback from breaker isn’t necessary. InteliLite controllers can also work without breaker
feedback.

InteliLite Global Guide 19

 Image 3.2 MRS application overview

6 back to Applications overview

InteliLite Global Guide 20

4 Installation and wiring
4.1 Package content 21
4.2 Controller installation 21
4.3 Terminal Diagram 23
4.4 Recommended wiring 24
4.5 Plug-in module installation 56
4.6 Maintenance 58

6 back to Table of contents

4.1 Package content

The package contains:
Controller
Mounting holders
Terminal blocks

Note: The package does not contain a communication or extension modules. The required modules should be
ordered separately.

4.2 Controller installation

4.2.1 Dimensions

① Plug-in module

InteliLite Global Guide 21

 Note: Dimension x depends on plug-in module

Note: Dimensions are in millimeters and are the same for all versions of InteliLite.

4.2.2 Mounting
The controller is to be mounted onto the switchboard door. Requested cutout size is 187 x 132 mm. Use the
screw holders delivered with the controller to fix the controller into the door as described on pictures
below.Recommended torque for holders is 0.15 N·m.

Panel door mounting

Note: Enclosure Type rating with mounting instruction - For use on a Flat surface of a type 1 enclosure.

InteliLite Global Guide 22

4.3 Terminal Diagram
① GENERATOR ② GENERATOR ③ MAINS VOLTAGE ④ BINARY INPUTS
CURRENT VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT
MEASUREMENT MEASUREMENT
T28 COM T35 N T39 N T43 BIN1
T29 L1 T36 L1 T40 L1 T44 BIN2
T30 L2 T37 L2 T41 L2 T45 BIN3
T31 L3 T38 L3 T42 L3 T46 BIN4
T47 BIN5
T48 BIN6
T49 BIN7

Image 4.1 Terminal diagram for InteliLite AMF20

⑤ CAN1 ⑥ ANALOG INPUTS ⑦ BINARY OUTPUTS ⑧ POWER SUPPLY,

D+
T25 L T15 RPM GND T04 BOUT1 T01 BATT -
T26 COM T16 RPM IN T05 BOUT2 T02 D+
T27 H T17 A COM T06 BOUT3 T03 BATT +
T18 A01 T07 BOUT4
T19 A02 T08 BOUT5
T20 A03 T09 BOUT6
T10 BOUT7

InteliLite Global Guide 23

4.4 Recommended wiring

Current inputs 28 - 31 Current measurement wiring (page 28)

Voltage measurement AMF wiring (page 30)

Generator voltage inputs 35 - 38
Voltage measurement MRS wiring (page 37)

Mains voltage inputs 39 - 42 Voltage measurement AMF wiring (page 30)

Binary inputs 43 - 49 Binary inputs (page 45)

CAN bus and RS485 H, COM, L CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 51)

Analog inputs 15 - 20 Analog inputs (page 47)

Binary outputs 04 - 10 Binary Outputs (page 46)

Power supply "+", D, "-" Power supply (page 25)

USB USB (page 54)

Note: Wiring terminal markings to included tightening torque: 0,5 N-m (4,5 lb-in)., and wire size: 2 mm2 (12-
26AWG).

InteliLite Global Guide 24

4.4.1 General
To ensure proper function:
Use grounding terminals.
Wiring for binary inputs and analog inputs must not be run with power cables.
Analog and binary inputs should use shielded cables, especially when the length is more than 3 m.

Tightening torque, allowable wire size and type, for the Field-Wiring Terminals:
For Mains(Bus) Voltage, Generator Voltage and Current terminals

Specified tightening torque is 0,56 Nm (5,0 In-lbs)

use only diameter 2,0 - 0,5 mm (12 - 26 AWG) conductor,

rated for 90°C minimum.

For other controller field wiring terminals

Specified tightening torque 0,79 nm (7,0 In-lb)

Use only diameter 2,0 - 0,5 mm (12 - 26 AWG) conductor,

rated for 75°C minimum.

use copper conductors only

4.4.2 Grounding
The shortest possible length of wire should be used for controller grounding. Use cable min 2.5 mm2.
The negative " - " battery terminal must be properly grounded.
Switchboard and engine must be grounded at common point. Use as short cable as possible to the grounding
point.

4.4.3 Power supply

To ensure proper function:
Use power supply cable min. 1.5 mm2

Maximum continuous DC power supply voltage is 36 V DC. The controller’s power supply terminals are
protected against large pulse power disturbances. When there is a potential risk of the controller being subjected
to conditions outside its capabilities, an outside protection device should be used.

InteliLite Global Guide 25

 It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between generator current COM terminal and battery “ - ”
terminal is maximally ± 2 V. Therefore is strongly recommended to interconnect these two terminals together.
Note: The controller should be grounded properly in order to protect against lighting strikes. The maximum
allowable current through the controller’s negative terminal is 4 A (this is dependent on binary output load).

For the connections with 12 V DC power supply, the controller includes internal capacitors that allow the
controller to continue in operation during cranking if the batter voltage dip occurs. If the voltage dip goes during
cranking to 0 V and after 50 ms it recovers to 4 V, the controller continues operating. This cycle can repeat
several times. During this voltage dip the controller screen backlight can turn off.

Note: Recommended fusing is 3 A fuse.

Note: In case of the dip to 0 V the high-side binary outputs will be temporarily switched off and after recovering
to 4 V back on.

IMPORTANT: When the controller is power up only by USB and the USB is disconnected then the
actual statistics can be lost.

Note: Suitable conductor protection shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 240.

Note: Low voltage circuits (35 volts or less) shall be supplied from the engine starting battery or an isolated
secondary circuit.

Note: It is also possible to further support the controller by connecting the external capacitor and separating
diode. The capacitor size depends on required time. It shall be approximately thousands of μF. The capacitor
size should be 5 000 μF to withstand 150 ms voltage dip under following conditions: Voltage before dip is 12 V,
after 150 ms the voltage recovers to min. allowed voltage, i.e. 8 V.

Power supply fusing

A 3 A fuse should be connected in-line with the battery positive terminal to the controller and modules. These
items should never be connected directly to the starting battery. Fuse value and type depends on number of
connected devices and wire length. Recommended fuse (not fast) type - T3 A. Not fast due to internal
capacitors charging during power up.

InteliLite Global Guide 26

 Note: Recommended fusing is 3 A fuse.

IMPORTANT: 3 A fuse is calculated without BOUT consumption nor extension modules. Real value
of fuse depends on consumption of binary outputs and modules.

Example: Maximal consumption of binary outputs can be 22 A

2 x 10 A on high current outputs (for 10 seconds)
2 A on all others binary outputs

4.4.4 Measurement wiring

Use 1.5 mm2 cables for voltage connection and 2.5 mm2 for current transformers connection. Adjust
Connection type (page 175), Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 177), Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 177),
Nominal Current (page 173), PT Ratio (page 177), Vm PT Ratio (page 178) and CT Ratio (page 174) by
appropriate setpoints in the Basic Settings group.
IMPORTANT: Risk of personal injury due to electric shock when manipulating voltage terminals
under voltage. Be sure the terminals are not under voltage before touching them.
Do not open the secondary circuit of current transformers when the primary circuit is closed. Open
the primary circuit first.

CT Location

Image 4.2 CT Location

There are two options of CT location.

a) Load

InteliLite Global Guide 27

 b) Gen-Set
Note: The current measurement protections are active only when the Gen-set is running.
If the CT Location is set to Load the Short Circuit BOC (page 217) protection is enabled only when GCB is
closed.

Current measurement wiring

The number of CT’s is automatically selected based on selected value of setpoint Connection type (page 175)
[3Ph4Wire / High Leg D / 3Ph3Wire / Split Ph / Mono Ph].
Generator currents and power measurement is suppressed if current level is bellow <1 % of CT range.
To ensure proper function:
Use cables of 2.5 mm2
Use transformers to 5 A
Connect CT according to following drawings:

3 phase application:

Image 4.3 3 phase application

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal and
power supply “-” terminal is maximally ± 2 V. There are 2 options how to ensure this:
"Red" option - properly ground both terminals
"Blue" option - interconnect these two terminals
Always apply only one option. Never realize both options on one installation.

InteliLite Global Guide 28

 Split phase application:

Image 4.4 Split phase application

IMPORTANT: The second phase of split phase connection is connected to the terminal, where is
normally connected the third phase.

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal and
power supply “-” terminal is maximally ± 2 V. There are 2 options how to ensure this:
"Red" option - properly ground both terminals
"Blue" option - interconnect these two terminals
Always apply only one option. Never realize both options on one installation.

InteliLite Global Guide 29

 Mono phase application:
Connect CT according to following drawings. Terminals phase 2 and phase 3 are opened.

Image 4.5 Mono phase application

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal and
power supply “-” terminal is maximally ± 2 V. There are 2 options how to ensure this:
"Red" option - properly ground both terminals
"Blue" option - interconnect these two terminals
Always apply only one option. Never realize both options on one installation.

Voltage measurement AMF wiring

There are 4 voltage measurement Connection Type (setpoint Connection type (page 175) [3Ph4Wire
/3Ph3Wire / Split Ph / Mono Ph]) options, every type matches to corresponding generator connection type.
Note: For fusing of voltage measurement input use T1A or T2A fuse.

The generator protections are evaluated from different voltages based on Connection type (page 175) setting:
3Ph 4W – Ph-Ph voltage, Ph-N voltage
3Ph 3W – Ph-Ph voltage
SplPhL1L2 – Ph-N voltage
SplPhL1L3 – Ph-N voltage
Mono Ph – Ph-N voltage

InteliLite Global Guide 30

 ConnectionType: 3 Phase 4 Wires

Image 4.6 3 phase application with neutral

Image 4.7 Typical 3 Phase 4 Wires generator wiring

InteliLite Global Guide 31

 ConnectionType: High Leg D

Image 4.8 High Leg Delta application

Table 4.1 Typical High Leg D generator wiring

InteliLite Global Guide 32

 ConnectionType: 3 Phase 3 Wires

Image 4.9 3 phase application without neutral

Image 4.10 Typical 3 Phase 3 Wires generator wiring

InteliLite Global Guide 33

 ConnectionType: SplPhL1L2

Image 4.11 Split phase L1L2 application

InteliLite Global Guide 34

 Image 4.12 Typical Split Phase generator wiring

ConnectionType: SplPhL1L3

Image 4.13 Split phase L1L3 application

IMPORTANT: The second phase of split phase connection is connected to the terminal, where is
usually connected the third phase.

InteliLite Global Guide 35

 Image 4.14 Typical Split Phase generator wiring

InteliLite Global Guide 36

 ConnectionType: Mono Phase

Image 4.15 Mono phase application

Image 4.16 Typical Mono Phase generator wiring

Voltage measurement MRS wiring

There are 4 voltage measurement Connection Type (setpoint Connection type (page 175) [3Ph4Wire
/3Ph3Wire / Split Ph / Mono Ph]) options, every type matches to corresponding generator connection type.
Note: For fusing of voltage measurement input use T1A or T2A fuse.

The generator protections are evaluated from different voltages based on Connection type (page 175) setting:
3Ph 4W – Ph-Ph voltage, Ph-N voltage
3Ph 3W – Ph-Ph voltage
SplPhL1L2 – Ph-N voltage
SplPhL1L3 – Ph-N voltage
Mono Ph – Ph-N voltage

InteliLite Global Guide 37

 ConnectionType: 3 Phase 4 Wires

Image 4.17 3 phase application with neutral

Image 4.18 Typical 3 Phase 4 Wires generator wiring

InteliLite Global Guide 38

 ConnectionType: High Leg D

Image 4.19 High Leg Delta application

Image 4.20 Typical High Leg D generator wiring

InteliLite Global Guide 39

 ConnectionType: 3 Phase 3 Wires

Image 4.21 3 phase application without neutral

Image 4.22 Typical 3 Phase 3 Wires generator wiring

InteliLite Global Guide 40

 ConnectionType: SplPhL1L2

Image 4.23 Split phase L1L2 application

InteliLite Global Guide 41

 Image 4.24 Typical Split Phase generator wiring

ConnectionType: SplPhL1L3

Image 4.25 Split phase L1L3 application

IMPORTANT: The second phase of split phase connection is connected to the terminal, where is
usually connected the third phase.

InteliLite Global Guide 42

 Image 4.26 Typical Split Phase generator wiring

InteliLite Global Guide 43

 ConnectionType: Mono Phase

Image 4.27 Mono phase application

Image 4.28 Typical Mono Phase generator wiring

4.4.5 Magnetic pick-up

A magnetic speed sensor (pickup) is the most common method of engine speed measurement. To use this
method, mount the pickup opposite to the engine flywheel, connect the cable to the controller as shown on the
picture below and adjust the setpoint Gear Teeth (page 179) according to the number of teeth on the flywheel.
For the details about the pick-up input parameters see Technical data on page 164
IMPORTANT: To ensure proper function use a shielded cable.

InteliLite Global Guide 44

 If engine will not start:
Check ground connection from pick-up to controllers, eventually disconnect ground connection to one of
them.
Note: In some cases the controller will measure a RPM value even though the gen-set is not running: RPM is
measured from the generator voltage (Gear Teeth = 0). Controller is measuring some voltage value on input
terminals due to open fusing. If RPM > 0 the controller will be put into a Not ready state and the engine will not
be allowed to start.

4.4.6 Binary inputs

Use minimally 1 mm2 cables for wiring of Binary inputs.

Image 4.29 Wiring binary inputs

Note: The name and function or alarm type for each binary input have to be assigned during the configuration.

InteliLite Global Guide 45

4.4.7 Binary Outputs
Use min. 1 mm2 cables for wiring of binary outputs. Use external relays as indicated on the schematic below for
all outputs except those where low-current loads are connected (signalization etc...).
IMPORTANT: Use suppression diodes on all relays and other inductive loads!

Note: Every single low current binary output can provide up to 0,5 A of steady current.

Note: Binary output 1 (terminal 4) and binary output 2 (terminal 5) are high current outputs (5 A for long term).

IMPORTANT: When operating temperature is higher than 60 °C it is strongly recommended to limit

output current of high current binary outputs (terminal 4 and terminal 5) to 4 A (each).

InteliLite Global Guide 46

4.4.8 Emergency stop
The Emergency Stop function can be made in two ways:
Connecting a normally closed “mushroom-type” button to the binary input . This is a purely software solution.
A hard-wired solution, where the button also disconnects the power supply from the controller outputs.

Image 4.30 Hard-wired emergency stop

IMPORTANT: Suppression diodes are not indicated, but required.

4.4.9 Analog inputs

The analog inputs are designed for resistive automotive type sensors like VDO or DATCON. The sensors are
connected either by one wire (the second pole is the sensor body) or by two wires.
In the case of grounded sensors, connect the AI COM terminal to the engine body as near to the sensors as
possible.
In the case of isolated sensors, connect the AI COM terminal to the negative power supply terminal of the
controller as well as one pole of each sensor.

InteliLite Global Guide 47

 Analog inputs are typically used for: Oil Pressure, Coolant Temperature and Fuel Level. All of these parameters
are connected with relevant protections.

Image 4.31 Grounded sensors Image 4.32 Isolated sensors

Note: Schemes show only analog input connection overview, not actual wiring.

Note: The name, sensor characteristic and alarm types for each analog input have to be assigned during
configuration.

Analog inputs with voltage & current sensors

On each analog input, there is a possibility to connect voltage or current output sensor instead of resistive one.
Recommended wiring connection for these measurements and recommended curves are bellow.

Voltage sensors

Sensor’s output
R1 (Ω) R2 (Ω)
range (V)
0 - 10 390 100
0 - 30 1500 100
0 - 70 3300 100

InteliLite Global Guide 48

 Image 4.33 Wiring of analog input with voltage sensor

Tables for HW versions 1.1 and lower.

0 - 10 V
V 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ω 81 145 219 306 409 539 685 887 1125 1458 1933

0 - 30 V
V 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Ω 95 134 177 223 274 330 395 465
V 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
Ω 543 633 735 853 993 1154 1350 1589

0 - 70 V
V 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
Ω 99 117 137 155 175 196 219 242 266 291 318 346
V 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46
Ω 375 406 439 473 510 549 589 633 679 729 781 838
V 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70
Ω 873 963 1033 1110 1193 1283 1383 1492 1612 1748 1896 2065

Tables for HW versions 1.2 and higher.

0 - 10 V
V 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ω 80 98 119 143 172 208 251 306 378 474 611

InteliLite Global Guide 49

 0 - 30 V
V 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Ω 94 105 118 131 147 163 182 202
V 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
Ω 226 252 282 317 358 405 463 533

0 - 70 V
V 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
Ω 97 102 108 114 120 126 133 140 147 154 162 170
V 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46
Ω 179 188 198 208 219 231 243 256 269 284 300 316
V 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70
Ω 334 354 375 398 422 449 479 511 547 587 631 681

Note: This is a conversion of voltage from voltage sensor to appropriate resistance value. Use resistance
values in InteliConfig to create your specific curve. These values should be used in "Ohm" column.

Current sensors

Sensor’s output
R (Ω)
range (mA)
0-20 100

Image 4.34 Wiring of analog input with current sensor

InteliLite Global Guide 50

 Table for HW versions 1.1 and lower.

0 - 22 mA
mA 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Ω 100 131 164 200 238 280 325 374 427 485 550 621
mA 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Ω 700 788 887 1000 1128 1276 1450 1654 1900 2200 2575

Table for HW versions 1.2 and higher.

0 - 22 mA
mA 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Ω 100 110 120 130 141 154 168 182 198 216 235 256
mA 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Ω 280 306 336 370 409 453 505 566 640 730 842

Note: This is a conversion of current from current sensor to appropriate resistance value. Use resistance
values in InteliConfig to create your specific curve. These values should be used in "Ohm" column.

4.4.10 CAN bus and RS485 wiring

CAN bus wiring
The wiring of the CAN bus should be provided in such a way that the following rules are observed:
The maximum length of the CAN bus depends on the communication speed. For a speed of 250 kbps, which
is used on the CAN1 bus (extension modules, ECU), the maximum length is 200 m.
The bus must be wired in linear form with termination resistors at both ends. No nodes are allowed except on
the controller terminals.
Shielded cable1 has to be used, shielding has to be connected to the terminal T01 (Grounding).
External units can be connected on the CAN bus line in any order, but keeping line arrangement (no tails, no
star) is necessary.
The CAN bus has to be terminated by 120 Ohm resistors at both ends use a cable with following
parameters:

Cable type Shielded twisted pair

Impedance 120 Ω
Propagation velocity ≥ 75% (delay ≤ 4,4 ns/m)
Wire crosscut ≥ 0,25 mm2
Attenuation (@1MHz) ≤ 2 dB/100 m

Note: Communication circuits shall be connected to communication circuits of Listed equipment.

1Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com) - for shorter distances: 3105A Paired - EIA
Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors); for longer distances: 3106A Paired - EIA Industrial RS-485
PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)

InteliLite Global Guide 51

 Note: A termination resistor at the CAN (120 Ω) is already implemented on the PCB. For connecting, close the
jumper near the appropriate CAN terminal.

Image 4.35 CAN bus topology

For shorter distances (connection within one building)

Image 4.36 CAN bus wiring for shorter distances

Note: Shielding shall be grounded at one end only. Shielding shall not be connected to CAN COM terminal

For longer distances or in case of surge hazard (connection out of building, in case of storm etc.)

Image 4.37 CAN bus wiring for longer distances

① Recommended PT5-HF-12DC-ST1

1Protections recommended: Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-12DC-ST with PT2x2-

BE (base element) or Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-012/2 R DJ

InteliLite Global Guide 52

 RS485 wiring
The wiring of the RS485 communication should be provided in such a way that the following rules are observed:
Note: A termination resistor at the RS485 (120Ω) is already implemented on the PCB. For connecting, close
the jumper near the appropriate RS485 terminal.

Standard maximum bus length is 1000 m.

Shielded cable1 has to be used, shielding has to be connected to the terminal T01 (Grounding).
External units can be connected on the RS485 line in any order, but keeping line arrangement (no tails, no
star) is necessary.
The line has to be terminated by 120 Ohm resistors at both ends.
For shorter distances (connection within one building)

Image 4.38 RS485 wiring for shorter distances

For longer distances or in case of surge hazard (connection out of building, in case of storm etc.)

Image 4.39 RS485 wiring for longer distances

① Recommended PT5HF-5DC-ST2
Note: Communication circuits shall be connected to communication circuits of Listed equipment.

1Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com) - for shorter distances: 3105A Paired - EIA
Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors); for longer distances: 3106A Paired - EIA Industrial RS-485
PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)
2Recommended protections: Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-5DC-ST with PT2x2-
BE (base element)(or MT-RS485-TTL) or Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-006/2 R DJ

InteliLite Global Guide 53

4.4.11 USB
This is required for computer connection. Use the shielded USB A-B cable.

Image 4.40 USB connection

Controller can by also power by USB (only for service purpose like a uploading firmware, change of
configuration etc.).
IMPORTANT: Power supply by USB is only for service purpose. Binary inputs and outputs are in
logical 0. Also plug-in modules are not working.

4.4.12 Example of AMF Wiring

InteliLite Global Guide 54

4.4.13 Example of MRS Wiring

InteliLite Global Guide 55

4.4.14 Analog as binary or tristate inputs
Analog inputs can be used also as binary or tri-state, i.e. for contact sensors without or with circuit check. The
threshold level is 750 Ω. In the case of tri-state, values lower than 10 Ω and values over 2400 Ω are evaluated as
sensor failure (short or open circuit).

Image 4.41 Analog inputs as tristate Image 4.42 Analog inputs as binary

Note: The name, sensor characteristic and alarm types for each analog input have to be assigned during
configuration.

Note: Tristate and binary sensors are not suitable for Analog Switch functions.

4.5 Plug-in module installation

4.5.1 Installation
Remove the back cover. To do this, press four holders which are located in corners.

InteliLite Global Guide 56

 After removing back cover insert the plug-in module. Plug-in module has to be inserted under holders. Start with
holders marked by symbol 1. On the controller are also arrows for better navigation. After inserting plug-in
module under holders 1 press it down to holders marked by symbol 2 which locks the module.

Insert the plug-in module under holders marked by symbol 1.

After locking the plug-in module into holders, place back the back cover (small cover for connectors has to be
removed from back cover). Finally insert the small cover for connectors. Small covers are unique for each plug-
in module.

InteliLite Global Guide 57

4.6 Maintenance
4.6.1 Backup battery replacement
The internal backup battery lifetime is approx. 6 years. If replacement of backup batter is needed, follow these
instructions:
Connect the controller to a PC and save an archive for backup purposes (not necessary but recommended).
Disconnect all terminals from the controller and remove the controller from the switchboard.
Remove the back cover and all plug-in modules.
Release the rear cover using a flat screwdriver or another suitable tool.

The battery is located in a holder on the circuit board. Remove the old battery with a small sharp screwdriver
and push with a finger the new battery into the holder.

Put the rear cover back. Use slight pressure to lock the snaps into the housing. Pay attention that the cover
is in correct position and not upside down!
Put back the plugin modules and back cover.
Power the controller on, adjust date and time and check all setpoints.

6 back to Installation and wiring

InteliLite Global Guide 58

5 Controller setup
5.1 Default configuration 59
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools connection 60
5.3 Operator Guide 64
5.4 Remote Display 88
5.5 Functions 93

6 back to Table of contents

5.1 Default configuration

5.1.1 Binary inputs
Number Description Configured function
BIN1 Generator circuit breaker feedback GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 434)
BIN2 Mains circuit breaker feedback MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 438)
BIN3 Emergency stop button EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 432)
BIN4 Access lock keyswitch NOT USED (PAGE 439)
BIN5 Switch controller to OFF mode REMOTE OFF (PAGE 441)
BIN6 Switch controller to TEST mode REMOTE TEST (PAGE 443)
BIN7 Suppression of alarms SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 443)

5.1.2 Binary outputs

Number Description Function
BOUT1 Starter motor control STARTER (PAGE 484)
BOUT2 Fuel solenoid valve FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 464)
BOUT3 Indication of breaker state GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 465)
BOUT4 Indication of breaker state MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 474)
BOUT5 Activation of any devices before start PRESTART (PAGE 481)
BOUT6 Gen-set can be connected to load READY TO LOAD (PAGE 482)
BOUT7 Indication of unconfirmed alarm ALARM (PAGE 455)

5.1.3 Analog inputs

Number Configured sensor Function
AIN1 VDO 10 Bar OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 514)
AIN2 VDO40-120°C COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 511)
AIN3 VDOLevel % FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 512)

InteliLite Global Guide 59

5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools
connection
5.2.1 USB 60
5.2.2 RS232/RS485 61
5.2.3 Ethernet 62

6 back to Controller setup

This chapter contains brief introduction into the specifics of firmware and archive upload and connection of
various PC tools to the controller. If you require detailed information on each PC tool please use the included
Help in those PC tools or download their Reference Guides.

5.2.1 USB
You may connect to the controller using the USB port. In this case standard USB A to B cable should be used.

Connection using InteliConfig

Image 5.1 First screen of InteliConfig - select connect to controller

Image 5.2 Second screen of InteliConfig - select detected controllers

InteliLite Global Guide 60

 Connection using WinScope

Image 5.3 WinScope screen - select direct connection

5.2.2 RS232/RS485
It is possible to connect to the controller using RS232 or RS485 direct connection (serial port or USB to
RS232/RS485 converter may be used). The following settings need to be checked in the controller:
COM1 Mode (page 282) = Direct
has to be set to the same value as in the PC tool

Connection using InteliConfig

Image 5.4 First screen of InteliConfig - select connect to controller

InteliLite Global Guide 61

 Image 5.5 Second screen of InteliConfig - select Serial link

Connection using WinScope

Image 5.6 WinScope screen - select direct connection

Note: Winscope supports only 19200, 38400, 57600 speeds.

5.2.3 Ethernet
It is possible to connect to the controller using ethernet port.

Direct connection
When you use direct connection the controller needs to be reachable directly from the PC you use (i.e. one LAN
or WAN without any firewalls and other points that may not allow the connection). The following settings need to
be checked in the controller:

InteliLite Global Guide 62

 Controller Address (page 181) has to be set to the same value as in the PC tool
IP Address Mode (page 296) can be set to AUTOMATIC when there is DHCP service is available.
Otherwise it needs to be set to FIXED
IP Address (page 296) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested value
Subnet Mask (page 297) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested
Gateway IP (page 297) can be set here when it is used

Connection using InteliConfig

Image 5.7 First screen of InteliConfig - select connect to controller

InteliLite Global Guide 63

 Image 5.8 Second screen of InteliConfig - select Internet/Ethernet

Connection using WinScope

Image 5.9 WinScope screen

5.3 Operator Guide

5.3.1 Front panel elements 65
5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure 67
5.3.3 Browsing alarms 79
5.3.4 Password 80

InteliLite Global Guide 64

5.3.5 Information screen 86
5.3.6 Language selection 87
5.3.7 Display contrast adjustment 88

5.3.1 Front panel elements

Image 5.10 Operator interface of AMF20

Control buttons
Position Picture Description
LEFT button. Use this button to move left or to change the mode. The button can
change the mode only if the main screen with the indicator of currently selected
mode is displayed.
Note: This button will not change the mode if the controller mode is forced by
one of binary inputs listed in the Reference Guide – “Operating modes” chapter.
RIGHT button. Use this button to move right or to change the mode. The button
can change the mode only if the main screen with the indicator of currently
selected mode is displayed.
Note: This button will not change the mode if the controller mode is forced by
one of binary inputs listed in the Reference Guide – “Operating modes” chapter.

HORN RESET button. Use this button to deactivate the horn output without
acknowledging the alarms.

InteliLite Global Guide 65

 FAULT RESET button. Use this button to acknowledge alarms and deactivate
the horn output. Inactive alarms will disappear immediately and status of active
alarms will be changed to "confirmed" so they will disappear as soon as their
reasons dismiss.

UP button. Use this button to move up or increase value.

PAGE button. Use this button to switch over display pages.

DOWN button. Use this button to move down or decrease value.

ENTER button. Use this button to finish editing a setpoint or moving right in the
history page.

START button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to initiate the start
sequence of the engine.

STOP button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to initiate the stop
sequence of the gen-set. Repeated pressing of button will cancel current phase
of stop sequence (like cooling) and next phase will continue.

GCB button. Works in MAN and TEST modes only. Press this button to open or
close the GCB.

MCB button. Works in MAN and TEST modes only. Press this button to open or
close the MCB.

Indicators and others

Position Description
GENERATOR status indicator. There are two states - Gen-set OK (indicator is green) and
Gen-set failure (indicator is red). Green LED is on if the generator voltage is present and
within limits. Red LED starts flashing when gen-set failure occurs. After FAULT RESET
button is pressed, goes to steady light (if an alarm is still active) or is off (if no alarm is active).
GCB ON. Green LED is on if GCB is closed. It is driven by GCB CLOSE/OPEN output or by
GCB feedback signal.
LOAD. Green LED is ON if load is supplied by mains or by generator. It means, that Gen-set
or mains is OK and proper circuit breaker is closed.

Graphic B/W display, 132x64 pixels.

MAINS status indicator. There are two states - Mains OK (indicator is green) and Mains
failure (indicator is red). Green LED is on, if mains is present and within limits. Red LED
starts blinking when the mains failure is detected and after the gen-set has started and
connected to the load it lights permanently until the mains failure disappears.
MCB ON. Green LED is on if MCB is closed. It is driven by MCB CLOSE/OPEN output or by
MCB feedback signal.

InteliLite Global Guide 66

5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure
The displayed information is structured into "pages" and "screens". Use PAGE button to switch over the pages.
The page Measurement consists of screens which display measured values like voltages, current, oil
pressure etc., computed values like i.e. gen-set power, statistic data and the alarm list on the last screen.
The page Setpoints contains all setpoints organized to groups and also a special group for entering
password.
The page History log shows the history log in the order that the last record is displayed first.

Main Screen

Symbols
Padlock - active when LBI ACCESS LOCK is active
R - active when there is active remote connection to controller
Exclamation mark - active when there is any alarm in alarmlist

Measurement Screens

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

InteliLite Global Guide 67

 Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

InteliLite Global Guide 68

 Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

InteliLite Global Guide 69

 Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

InteliLite Global Guide 70

 Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

InteliLite Global Guide 71

 Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

InteliLite Global Guide 72

 Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

InteliLite Global Guide 73

 Note: From all of these pages it is possible to switch seamlessly to the setpoint group page by pressing Page
button.

Note: There can be some additional screens and also some screens can be hidden. Screen’s visibility
depends on actual configuration (usage of extension or communication modules, ECU, etc.).

Setpoint Screens

Note: From all measurement pages we can fluently go to the setpoint group page by pressing Page button.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
setpoint group.

Note: Use Enter button to enter selected setpoint group.

Note: Use Left and Right button to select required setpoint.

Note: Use Enter button to enter selected setpoint.

InteliLite Global Guide 74

 Note: Use Up and
Down button to set
required value of
selected setpoint.

Note: Use Enter button to confirm adjusted value of setpoint.

Note: Use Page button to discard changes, to set setpoint to previous value and to return to the list of
setpoints of selected group.

IMPORTANT: Cannot change setpoint? Setpoints marked with an padlock are password protected.
Enter password as described in the chapter Password (page 80).

History Log

Note: From all measurement pages we can fluently go to the setpoint group page by pressing Page button.

Note: From setpoint group page we can fluently go to the history log pages by pressing Page button.

InteliLite Global Guide 75

 Note: Use Up and
Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Enter button to move to the next page of history log.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Enter button to move to the next page of history log.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Enter button to move to the next page of history log.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Enter button to move to the next page of history log.

InteliLite Global Guide 76

 Note: Use Up and
Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Enter button to move to the next page of history log.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Enter button to move to the next page of history log.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Enter button to move to the next page of history log.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Enter button to move to the next page of history log.

InteliLite Global Guide 77

 Note: Use Up and
Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Enter button to move to the next page of history log.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Enter button to move to the next page of history log.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Enter button to move to the next page of history log.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Enter button to move to the next page of history log.

InteliLite Global Guide 78

 Note: Use Up and
Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Enter button to move to the next page of history log.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Enter button to move to the first page of history log.

IMPORTANT: The records are numbered in reverse order, i.e. the latest (newest) record is "0" and
older records have "-1", "-2" etc.

Note: This is only basic history record. There can be some additional screens in case that in controller is
extension module or ECU is configured. Also it depends on connection type.

5.3.3 Browsing alarms

Note: Use Up button to move to alarmlist from main measurement screen.

InteliLite Global Guide 79

 Active alarms are displayed as white text on black background. It means the alarm is still active, i.e. the
appropriate alarm conditions are still present.
Inactive alarms are displayed as black text on white background. It means the alarm is no more active, i.e.
the appropriate alarm conditions are gone.
Not confirmed alarms are displayed with an asterisk. It means the alarm is still not acknowledged
(confirmed).
ECU alarms: SPN/FMI/OC/SC
SPN - Suspect parameter number
FMI - type of protection
OC - number of errors
SC - source of error

5.3.4 Password
Enter password

Note: From all measurement pages we can fluently go to the setpoint group page by pressing Page button.

InteliLite Global Guide 80

 Note: Use Up and
Down button to
select setpoint
group Password.

Note: Use Enter button to enter setpoint group Password.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select Enter
Password.

Note: Use Enter button to enter selected setpoint.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to set
required value of
selected setpoint.

Note: Use Left and Right button to move between digits.

Note: Use Enter button to confirm the password or Page button to cancel entering the password.

InteliLite Global Guide 81

 Note: In case that invalid password is entered, the controller shows Invalid password screen. Use Page
button to go back to menu.

Change password

Note: From all measurement pages we can fluently go to the setpoint group page by pressing Page button.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select setpoint group
Password.

Note: Use Enter button to enter setpoint group Password.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select Change
Password.

Note: Use Enter button to enter selected setpoint.

InteliLite Global Guide 82

 Note: Use Up and
Down button to
select required level
of password.

Note: Use Enter button to enter selected setpoint.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to set
required value of
password.

Note: Use Left and Right button to move between digits.

Note: After setting new password use Enter button to confirm adjusted password.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to set
required value of
password again.

Note: Use Left and Right button to move between digits.

Note: After setting new password again use Enter button to confirm adjusted password or Page button to
discard changes and to cancel changing password.

InteliLite Global Guide 83

 Note: Before changing the password controller has to be unlocked. In case that controller is locked, the
controller shows Password required screen. In that case the password has to be entered before changing the
password.

Log out from controller

Note: From all measurement pages we can fluently go to the setpoint group page by pressing Page button.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select setpoint
group Password.

Note: Use Enter button to enter setpoint group Password.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select Enter
Password.

Note: Use Enter button to enter selected setpoint.

InteliLite Global Guide 84

 Note: Use Up and
Down button to set
required value of
selected setpoint.

Note: Use Left and Right button to move between digits.

Note: Enter invalid password to log out from controller.

Note: In case that invalid password is entered, the controller shows Invalid password screen. Use Page
button to go back to menu.

Lost Password
IMPORTANT: Display the information screen containing the serial number and password decode
number as described in the chapter Information screen (page 86) and send them to your local
distributor.

Password break protection

The controller password is protected against breaking by brute force. The protection works at every controller
interface separately.
1. When an invalid password is entered 5 times after each other, independently on the time period elapsed
between the attempts, the controller will be blocked after the 5th unsuccessful attempt for 1 minute at the
particular interface.
2. While the controller is blocked it refuses any further attempts to enter password.
3. When unblocked again the controller accepts one attempt to enter password. If the password is incorrect
again the controller will be blocked for 2 minutes.
4. Each further attempt to enter invalid password will double the blocking time, but maximum blocking time is
20 minutes.
5. When incorrect password is entered 100-times after each other the controller is blocked forever and the
password reset procedure is required to unblock it.

InteliLite Global Guide 85

5.3.5 Information screen

+
Note: On Main measurement screen press Enter and Page button together. Enter button has to be pressed
first.

Note: Use Page button to move to the next page.

Note: Use Page button to move to the next page.

Note: Use Up button to move back to main measurement screen.

InteliLite Global Guide 86

5.3.6 Language selection

+
Note: On Main measurement screen press Enter and Page button together. Enter button has to be pressed
first.

Note: Use Page button to move to the next page.

Note: Use Page button to move to the next page.

Note: Use Page button to move to the next page.

InteliLite Global Guide 87

 Note: Use Up and
down button to
select required
language.

Note: Use Enter button to confirm selected language.

5.3.7 Display contrast adjustment

+ +
Note: On any measurement screen press Enter and Note: On any measurement screen press Enter and
Down button together for lower contrast. Up button together for higher contrast.

Note: After setting a contrast, no another action is needed.

6 back to Controller setup

5.4 Remote Display

This chapter describes Remote display firmware IL3-RD, which is designed as a remote signaling and control
software for InteliLite family controllers. It is the optional software which is possible to upload into controller
instead of standard controller’s firmware.

InteliLite Global Guide 88

5.4.1 General description
Remote display software works as “remote display and control” for the Master InteliLite family controller. Gen-
set can be controlled using Remote display and Master controller simultaneously and independently. All
Remote display screens (Measurement screens, Setpoint screens and History Log) displays the same data as
Master controller. Front panel buttons on both controllers work the same way. All remote display LEDs shows
the same state as corresponding LEDs on Master controller.

5.4.2 IL3-RD Firmware installation

The IL3-RD Remote display firmware is installed in the same way as any other InteliLite firmware using
InteliConfig PC tool. Reverting Remote display controller back to regular gen-set controller is carried out the
same way.
Note: InteliConfig shows the most compatible and the most recent firmware as default option. Thus, it is
necessary use “More options” (…) button to pick IL3-RD firmware for uploading to controller. (See details on
picture below.)

Note: IL3-RD consists firmware only, there is no archive included.

Note: When IL3-RD firmware is uploaded to controller there is only possible connect InteliConfig using USB
connection. InteliConfig serves only for firmware update when connected to Remote display. There is no
Master controller SCADA displayed, no possibility to adjust Setpoints, display Values etc.

Note: Please refer to InteliConfig Global Guide for details about firmware uploading to controller.

5.4.3 Wiring
IL3-RD can be connected to InteliLite family controller via external RS232 or RS485 communication line on CM-
232-485 communication module. It is possible to connect only up to two Remote displays to one Master
controller, if they are using different communication COMs. To connect two or more remote displays to one
communication line (e.g. RS485) is not possible. Using one Remote display it is possible to monitor only one
Master controller at the time.

InteliLite Global Guide 89

5.4.4 Interconnection variants
RS232

It is necessary to use CM-RS232-485 communication module on both Master controller and Remote display.
COM 1 communication channel is used with these settings:
COM 1 Mode: Direct
COM 1 Communication Speed: 57600 or 115200 bps
Controller Address: 1 – 32
The maximal distance between Master controller and Remote display is 10 m for RS-232 connection. It is
recommended to use standard Null modem cable (crossover cable), although three wires (TxD, RxD, GND)
RS-232 connection is enough for communication.

RS485

It is necessary to use CM-RS232-485 communication module on both Master controller and Remote display.
COM 2 communication channel is used with these settings:
COM 2 Mode: Direct
COM 2 Communication Speed: 57600 or 115200 bps
Controller Address: 1 – 32
The maximal distance between Master controller and Remote display is 1200 m for RS-485 connection. It is
recommended to use shielded twisted-pair cables that comply with the EIA RS-485 standard to reduce
interference and to achieve maximal distance.

InteliLite Global Guide 90

 RS232 + RS485
It is possible to combine two previous ways of interconnection and connect two Remote display to one Master
controller concurrently. All the parameters and settings are the same as mentioned above.

5.4.5 Connection process

Remote display after power on automatically tries connect to last known Master (if such configuration exist in
Remote display). Otherwise Remote display starts to search for any Master controller connected. It starts to
search on COM 2 (RS-485) using Master controller address 1 – 32 and continues with COM 1 (RS-232).
Remote display tries two communication speeds 57600 bps and 115200 bps.
During this autodetection process the message “Trying to connect” is displayed on screen. This process takes
approx. one minute.
When incompatible configuration type is found in detected controller, the message “Unknown cfg format COM x
Addr yy” is displayed on screen for 5 seconds and detecting continues with next address in the range.
When detecting finishes with no compatible Master controller found, the message “No connection” is displayed
on screen for 5 seconds and detecting process starts from the beginning and continues until compatible master
controller is found.
Not supported types of controllers or controllers that are not properly communicating are skipped during the
search.

5.4.6 Connection troubleshooting

There are few reasons why Remote display cannot connect to Master controller:
Not supported type of Master controller is connected.
Not supported firmware in Master controller.
Configuration table error in Master controller.
Wrong settings of setpoint COM x Mode in master controller.
Wrong settings of setpoint COM x Communication Speed in master controller.
Wrong connection, wiring, communication fail.

InteliLite Global Guide 91

5.4.7 Function description
Remote display software works as “remote display and control” for the Master InteliLite family controller. Gen-
set can be controlled using Remote display and Master controller simultaneously and independently. All
Remote display screens (Information screens, Measurement screens, Setpoint screens and History Log)
displays the same data as Master controller. Front panel buttons on both controllers work the same way. All
remote display LEDs shows the same state as corresponding LEDs on Master controller. User can switch
screens, enter or set password, adjust setpoints, change language, change Configuration Level, change display
contrast and view history records.
Note: It is recommended to use the same type and model of controller for Master and for Remote display. Only
in such case is assured the proper function of all buttons, LED diodes and display.

Example: When AMF controller HW type is used as a Master controller and MRS controller HW type is
used for Remote display there is no possibility to control MCB in MAN mode as there is no MCB button on
MRS controller. However, in general all this not recommended combinations works with similar to above
mentioned limitation considered.

Master device is always able to work without connected Remote display. Disconnecting of the serial line
between Master controller and Remote display has no effect to the Master controller.
When the serial line between Master controller and Remote display is disconnected, or communication cannot
be established, Remote display shows it’s own Init screen and message “Trying to connect” and all LEDs are
off.
Once remote display finds compatible master it shows message “Cfg processing” and downloads configuration
table from master controller. After the configuration from Master controller is downloaded Remote display is
reinitiated, jump to master controllers Main measurement screen and regular operation is started.
It is possible to switch to Remote display’s own Init screen to check IL3-RD FW version and serial number of
used controller and communication status by press and hold Page button for more than 3 seconds.

5.4.8 Firmware compatibility

Remote Display
Remote Display FW is possible to upload into following controllers:
InteliLite AMF25
InteliLite AMF20
InteliLite MRS16
InteliLite MRS11
InteliLite 9

Remote Display vs. Master controller

Remote Display Master controller

RD FW ver. InteliLite (all versions) InteliLite 9 InteliGen 200
FW ver. 1.5.x FW ver. 1.1.x FW ver. 1.1.x
FW ver. 1.6.x FW ver. 1.2.x
1.0.0
FW ver. 1.7.x FW ver. 1.3.x
FW ver. 1.8.x

InteliLite Global Guide 92

5.5 Functions
5.5.1 Start-stop sequence 93
5.5.2 AMF sequence 95
5.5.3 Operating Modes 96
5.5.4 Engine start 97
5.5.5 Stabilization 99
5.5.6 Connecting to load 99
5.5.7 MRS operation 99
5.5.8 AMF operation 99
5.5.9 Engine cool down and stop 100
5.5.10 Alarm management 101
5.5.11 History log 107
5.5.12 Breaker control 108
5.5.13 Exercise timer 111
5.5.14 Service timers 117
5.5.15 Additional running engine indications 118
5.5.16 Voltage phase sequence detection 118
5.5.17 Gen-set operation states 119
5.5.18 Sensor curves 121
5.5.19 PLC 122
5.5.20 Tier 4 Final 129
5.5.21 Alternate configuration 132
5.5.22 ECU Frequency selection 133
5.5.23 Cybernetic security 133

6 back to Controller setup

5.5.1 Start-stop sequence

State Condition of the transition Action Next state
Ready Start request PRESTART (PAGE 481) on Prestart Prestart
Time (page 188) counter started
RPM > 2 or Oil pressure > Starting Stop (Stop
Oil Pressure (page 189) or fail)
Generator voltage > 10V or D+
voltage is higher than D+ Treshold
(page 202)
OFF Mode selected or Shutdown Not Ready
alarm active
Not Ready RPM < 2, Oil pressure not detected, Ready
Generator voltage < 10V, D+ not
Active no shutdown alarm active,
other than OFF Mode selected

InteliLite Global Guide 93

 Prestart Prestart time elapsed FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 464) on, Cranking
STARTER (PAGE 484) on, Maximum
Cranking Time (page 187) counter
started
Cranking RPM > Starting RPM STARTER (PAGE 484) off, PRESTART Starting
(PAGE 481) off
D+ input activated or oil pressure STARTER (PAGE 484) off, PRESTART Cranking
detected or Generator voltage > (PAGE 481) off
25% Nominal voltage
Maximum Cranking Time (page STARTER (PAGE 484) off, FUEL Crank
187), 1st attempt SOLENOID (PAGE 464) off, STOP pause
SOLENOID (PAGE 485) on, Cranking
Fail Pause (page 187) timer started
Maximum Cranking Time (page STARTER (PAGE 484) off, PRESTART Shutdown
187) elapsed, last attempt (PAGE 481) off (Start fail)
Crank pause Cranking Fail Pause (page 187) STARTER (PAGE 484) on, FUEL Cranking
elapsed SOLENOID (PAGE 464) on, STOP
SOLENOID (PAGE 485) off, Maximum
Cranking Time (page 187) counter
started
Starting Idle Time (page 195) elapsed Minimal Stabilization Time (page Running
197) and Maximal Stabilization
Time (page 198) counter started
any shutdown condition FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 464) off, Shutdown
STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 485) on
all cranking attempts elapsed FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 464) off, Shutdown
STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 485) on (Start fail)
Running Stop request READY TO LOAD (PAGE 482) Cooling
off,Cooling Time (page 199)
counter started
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown READY TO LOAD (PAGE 482) off, Shutdown
condition FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 464) off
GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 465) Loaded
closed
Loaded GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 465) Running
opened
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 464) off, Shutdown
condition STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 485) on,
READY TO LOAD (PAGE 482) off,
Cooling Cooling Time (page 199) elapsed FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 464) off, Stop
STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 485) on
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 464) off, Shutdown
condition STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 485) on

InteliLite Global Guide 94

 Start request READY TO LOAD (PAGE 482) on Running
Stop RPM = 0, Oil pressure not detected, Ready
Generator voltage < 10V, D+ not
active
If at least one of engine running Stop (Stop
indication is detected when Stop fail)
Time (page 199) elapsed.

Note: If all generator parameters are OK and Minimal Stabilization Time (page 197) elapsed, indicates that
GCB is possible to close. In AUTO Mode GCB is closed in this moment automatically.

Note: The start-up sequence can be interrupted in any time by stop request

5.5.2 AMF sequence

State Condition of the transition Action Next state
Mains Mains failed or MCB FEEDBACK MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 474)off, Mains
operation (PAGE 438) dropout, MCB Emergency Start Delay (page 222) timer failure
Opens On (page 229) = Mains started
Fail
Mains failed or MCB FEEDBACK Emergency Start Delay (page 222) timer Mains
(PAGE 438) dropout, MCB started failure
Opens On (page 229) = Gen
Run
Mains Mains voltage and frequency OK, After elapsing MCB Close Delay (page Mains
failure MCB Opens On (page 229) = 224) MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 474) on operation
Mains Fail
Mains voltage and frequency OK, None Mains
MCB Opens On (page 229) = operation
Gen Run
Emergency Start Delay (page Engine start sequence performed, then Island
222) elapsed, MCB Opens On GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 465) on operation
(page 229) = Mains Fail
Emergency Start Delay (page Engine start sequence performed, then Island
222) elapsed, MCB Opens On MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 474) off, time operation
(page 229) = Gen Run delay Transfer Delay (page 223)
performed and GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE
465) on
Island Mains voltage and frequency OK Mains Return Delay (page 222) timer Mains return
operation started
Mains return Mains failed Island
operation
Mains Return Delay (page 222) GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 465) off, then Mains
elapsed after Transfer Delay (page 223) MCB operation
CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 474) on and then
engine stop sequence performed

InteliLite Global Guide 95

 Note: Mains failed means mains over/under -voltage, over/under -frequency, voltage asymmetry (preset delay
must elapse)

Note: If during start-up sequence mains returns, then MCB is reclosed with delay MCB Close Delay (page
224)(if opened, depending on MCB Opens On (page 229) setpoint) and start-up sequence is interrupted.

Note: If mains fails during stop procedure (cooling) again, stop sequence is interrupted, MCB opened and GCB
re-closed with Transfer Delay (page 223).

5.5.3 Operating Modes

Selecting the operating mode is done through Left and Right buttons on the front panel or by changing the
Controller mode (page 180) setpoint (from the front panel or remotely).
Note: If this setpoint is configured as password-protected, the correct password must be entered prior to
attempting to change the mode.

Note: The mode cannot be changed if Access Lock input is active.

The following binary inputs can be used to force one respective operating mode independent of the mode
setpoint selection:
Remote OFF (page 441)
Remote TEST (page 443)
Remote MAN (page 441)
Remote AUTO (page 440)
If the respective input is active the controller will change the mode to the respective position according to the
active input. If multiple inputs are active, the mode will be changed according to priorities of the inputs. The
priorities match the order in the list above. If all inputs are deactivated, the mode will return to the original
position given by the setpoint.

OFF
No start of the gen-set is possible .Controller stays in Not ready status and cannot be started any way. The
MCB is closed permanently (MCB Opens On (page 229) = GENRUN) or is open or closed according to
whether the mains is present or not (MCB Opens On (page 229) = MAINSFAIL). No AMF function will be
performed. The buttons MCB , GCB , Start and Stop including the appropriate binary inputs for
external buttons are not active.
IMPORTANT: When engine is running, it is not possible to switch gen-set to OFF mode.

MAN
The engine can be started and stopped manually using the Start and Stop buttons (or external buttons
wired to the appropriate binary inputs) in MAN mode. When the engine is running, GCB can be closed. Also
MCB can be closed and opened manually using the MCB button, regardless of whether the mains are present or
not. No auto start is performed.
Note: The controller provides interlock between GCB and MCB, it means it is never possible to close both CB
together.

InteliLite Global Guide 96

 AUTO
The controller does not respond to buttons Start , Stop , MCB ON/OFF and GCB ON/OFF . Engine
start/stop request is evaluated form Mains failure/return.
Note: When the AMF function will start the engine than the engine will be running at least for the time which is
defined in Mains Return Delay (page 222) setpoint, even if the mains would return in the meantime.

TEST
The gen-set will be started when the controller is put to TEST mode and will remain running unloaded. If a mains
failure occurs, the MCB will be opened and after Transfer Delay (page 223) the GCB will be closed and the
gen-set will supply the load. After the mains have recovered, the delay Mains Return Delay (page 222)l will
count down and if it elapses and the mains is still ok, the controller will transfer the load back to the mains after
Transfer Delay (page 223) and the gen-set will remain running unloaded again until the mode is changed.

Remote test on load

When binary input is closed, the controller automatically transfers load from the mains to the gen-set. See LBI
REM TEST ON LOAD (PAGE 442).

5.5.4 Engine start

Diesel engine
After the command for start is issued (pressing Start button in MAN mode, auto start condition is fulfilled in
AUTO mode or controller is switched to TEST mode), outputs PRESTART (PAGE 481) and GLOW PLUGS
(PAGE 470) are energized for time period given by the setpoints Prestart Time (page 188) and Glow Plugs
Time (page 189).
After Prestart Time (page 188) and Glow Plugs Time (page 189), the output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 464)
is energized and after Fuel Solenoid Lead (page 195) the starter of motor is activated by energizing the
output STARTER (PAGE 484).
When one or more of following conditions are met, the starter output is de-energized:
The engine speed exceeds the value of Starting RPM (page 188), or
One of Additional running engine indications (page 118) signals becomes active.
The controller remains in the Starting phase until the engine speed exceeds the value of Starting RPM
(page 188), after that it is considered as started and the Idle period will follow.
The maximum duration that the output STARTER (PAGE 484) is energized is determined by the setpoint
Maximum Cranking Time (page 187). If the engine does not start within this period, the output STARTER
(PAGE 484) is de-energized and a pause with length determined by Cranking Fail Pause (page 187) will
follow. PRESTART (PAGE 481) and GLOW PLUGS (PAGE 470) outputs are active during the pause. After the
pause has elapsed, the next start attempt is executed. The number of start attempts is given by the setpoint
Cranking Attempts (page 186).
Once the engine is started, the Idle period follows. The binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 473) remains
inactive (as it was during the start). The idle period duration is adjusted by the setpoint Idle Time (page
195). When controller is in the MAN mode, it is possible to finish the Idle Time (page 195) count down by
pushing the Start button.
After the idle period has finished, the output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 473) is activated and the start-up
sequence is finished. The Stabilization (page 99) phase follows.

InteliLite Global Guide 97

 Image 5.11 Flowchart of start of diesel engine

InteliLite Global Guide 98

5.5.5 Stabilization
When the Engine start (page 97) sequence is finished, the gen-set goes into the stabilization phase. There are
two timers (setpoints) in this phase:
Minimal Stabilization Time (page 197) starts to count down just after the idle period has finished.
Generator voltage and frequency are not checked (respective protections are not evaluated) and the GCB
cannot be closed even if the generator voltage and frequency are within limits.
Maximal Stabilization Time (page 198) starts to count down just after the idle period has finished.
Generator voltage and frequency are not checked (respective protections are not evaluated) but, opposite to
the previous timer, the GCB can be closed if generator voltage and frequency are within limits.
In situations where the GCB is closed automatically (AUTO, TEST modes), the closing of GCB will occur in the
first moment when the generator voltage and frequency will get into limits and the Minimal Stabilization Time
(page 197) has already elapsed.
In the event that the generator voltage or frequency are not within limits within the Maximal Stabilization Time
(page 198) period, the appropriate protection(s) will be activated and the gen-set will be cooled down and
stopped.
Note: The limits for the generator voltage and frequency are given by setpoints in the Group: Generator
settings (page 216).

Note: The value of the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 197) setpoint has to be lower than the value of
Maximal Stabilization Time (page 198) setpoint.

5.5.6 Connecting to load

When the Stabilization (page 99) phase is finished, the gen-set can be connected to the load.
The command for connecting the gen-set to the load is issued either automatically (AUTO, TEST modes) or
manually by pressing the GCB button. The following conditions must be valid:
The gen-set is running and the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 197) timer has elapsed.
The gen-set voltage and frequency are within limits.

5.5.7 MRS operation

The "MRS function" represents manual or remote start of gen-set. It is ideal for prime power applications.

The MRS procedure

When the start command is detected, the following steps are performed:
The gen-set is started.
GCB is closed and the gen-set begins to supply the load (in AUTO mode, otherwise GCB button has to be
pressed)
When the stop command is detected, the following steps are performed:
GCB is opened and the gen-set stops supply the load.
After GCB is opened, the gen-set cools down and a stop.

5.5.8 AMF operation

The “AMF function” represents the automatic start in the event that the mains have failed and stop after the
mains have been restored. The automatic start can be enabled or disabled by binary inputs AMF START BLOCK

InteliLite Global Guide 99

 (PAGE 404) or MAINS FAIL BLOCK (PAGE 437).
Note: The AMF function works only in AUTO mode.

Mains failure detection

The mains are considered as faulty when one or more of the following conditions are valid:
The mains voltage is out of the limits given by the setpoints Mains Undervoltage (page 225) and Mains
Overvoltage (page 224) for a time period longer than Mains < > Voltage Delay (page 225).
The mains frequency is out of the limits given by the setpoints Mains Underfrequency (page 226) and
Mains Overfrequency (page 225) for a time period longer than Mains < > Frequency Delay (page 226).
The MCB close command was not successful and the alarm Wrn MCB Fail (page 534) was not reset.
Phase rotation is incorrect.

Healthy mains detection

The mains are considered to be healthy when all of following conditions are valid:
The mains voltage is within the limits given by the setpoints Mains Undervoltage (page 225) and Mains
Overvoltage (page 224).
The mains frequency is within the limits given by the setpoints Mains Underfrequency (page 226) and
Mains Overfrequency (page 225).
The alarm Wrn MCB Fail (page 534) is not active (if MCB feedback is active). This condition is not required
if MCB is open (MCB feedback is inactive).
Phase rotation is correct.

The AMF procedure

When the mains failure is detected, the following steps are performed:
If the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 229) is set to Mains Fail, the MCB is opened
The timer for automatic start of the gen-set Emergency Start Delay (page 222) begins to count down.
After the timer has elapsed, the gen-set is started.

Note: The automatic start of the gen-set due to AMF function can be disabled by the binary inputs AMF START
BLOCK (PAGE 404) or MAINS FAIL BLOCK (PAGE 437).

If the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 229) is set to Gen Run, the MCB is opened once the generator
voltage is within limits (after Minimal Stabilization Time (page 197) elapses).
Note: If the mains are restored to health and the gen-set is still not connected to the load, the controller
interrupts the startup process and closes back the MCB.

After Transfer Delay (page 223) elapses, the GCB is closed and the gen-set begins to supply the load.
After the mains restored to normal, the timer Mains Return Delay (page 222) begins to count down.
Maximum time between closing of MCB and opening GCB is given by the setpoint Transfer Delay (page
223). After GCB is opened, the gen-set cools down and a stop.
IMPORTANT: Controller has this behavior only in AUTO mode!

5.5.9 Engine cool down and stop

The cool down phase follows after the stop command has been issued and the GCB has been opened.

InteliLite Global Guide 100

 Duration of the cool down phase is determined by the setpoint Cooling Time (page 199).
Cooling is performed either at nominal speed (generator voltage and frequency protections are evaluated) or
at idle speed (generator voltage and frequency protections are not evaluated). Selection of the speed is done
by the setpoint Cooling Speed (page 199).
The cool down can be finished manually in MAN mode by pressing the STOP button.
If a new start request comes, the cool down will be interrupted and the gen-set will go back to the
stabilization phase. If the cooling was at nominal speed, the stabilization timers will not count down again so
the GCB is ready to be closed (after 2 seconds delay).
When the cool down is finished, the output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 464) is de-energized and STOP SOLENOID
(PAGE 485) is energized. The engine will stop within the time period determined by the setpoint Stop Time
(page 199). If the engine does not stop within this time, the alarm Wrn Stop Fail (page 536) will be issued.
The output STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 485) is energized until the engine is stopped, but at least for the duration of
Stop Time (page 199). If the Stop Time (page 199) has elapsed and the engine has still not stopped, the STOP
SOLENOID (PAGE 485) is de-energized for 5 s and then energized again for Stop Time (page 199) and this
repeats until the engine is stopped.

Stopped gen-set evaluation

The gen-set is considered as stopped when all of following conditions are valid:
The engine speed is lower than 2 RPM.
The generator voltage in all phases is lower than 10 V.
None of Additional running engine indications (page 118) signals is active.

5.5.10 Alarm management

The controller evaluates two levels of alarms. Level 1 – yellow alarm – is a pre-critical alarm that is only
informative and does not take any action regarding gen-set control. Level 2 – red alarm – represents a critical
situation, where an action must be taken to prevent damage of the gen-set or technology.
One alarm of any type can be assigned to each binary input.
Two alarms (one yellow and one red type) can be assigned to each analog input.
There are also Built-in alarms (page 105) with fixed alarm types.
Each alarm is written to the Alarmlist (page 105).
Each alarm causes a record to be written into the history log.
Each alarm activates the Alarm and Horn output.
Each alarm can cause sending of a SMS message or an email.

InteliLite Global Guide 101

 Image 5.12 Analog input alarm evaluation principle

Alarm handling
There are three different alarm categories regarding the period when the alarms are evaluated. The category is
selectable for alarms assigned to binary/analog inputs and fixed for built-in alarms. The categories are the
following:
The alarm is evaluated all the time when the controller is switched on.
The alarm is evaluated only when the engine is running. This type should be used for e.g. oil pressure. These
alarms begin to be evaluated after the engine has been started with the delay given by the setpoint
Protection Hold Off (page 198).
The alarm is evaluated only when the generator is excited. These alarms begin to be evaluated after the
engine has been started and Maximal Stabilization Time (page 198) has elapsed or the GCB has been
closed. They remain evaluated until cooling has finished. Only Generator under/overvoltage and Generator
under/overfrequency belong to this category. This category is not configurable to binary and analog input
alarms.
If an alarm is being evaluated and the appropriate alarm condition is fulfilled, the delay of evaluation will start to
run. The delay is adjustable by a setpoint (in the case of built-in alarms, analog input alarms) or is adjusted via
configuration window in InteliConfig (in the case of binary input alarms). If the conditions persist, the alarm will
activate. The alarm will not activate if the condition is dismissed while the delay is still running.
After pressing the Fault reset button or activating the binary input FAULT RESET BUTTON (PAGE 432), all active
alarms change to confirmed state. Confirmed alarms will disappear from the Alarmlist as soon as the respective
condition dismisses. If the condition is dismissed before acknowledging the alarm, the alarm will remain in the
Alarmlist as Inactive.
Note: The input SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 443) can be used for temporary disabling of red alarms to shutdown the
engine. This input may be used in situations where providing the power is extremely important – e.g. if the gen-
set drives pumps for fire extinguishers (sprinklers).

InteliLite Global Guide 102

 Alarm states
An alarm can have following states:
Active alarm: the alarm condition persists, alarm delay has elapsed.
Inactive alarm: the alarm condition has disappeared, but the alarm has not been confirmed.
Confirmed alarm: the alarm condition persists, but the alarm has already been confirmed.

Image 5.13 Alarm List

Alarm types - Level 1

The level 1 alarm indicates that a value or parameter is out of normal limits, but has still not reached critical
level. This alarm does not cause any actions regarding the gen-set control.

Warning (Wrn)
The alarm appears in the Alarmlist and is recorded into the history log. Activates the output AL COMMON W RN
(PAGE 449) as well as the standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 472) and ALARM (PAGE 455)).

Alarm indication only

The alarm indication only alarm does not perform any actions regarding gen-set control. Alarm is only displayed
in alarmlist.

History record only (HistRecOnl)

The event is recorded into the history. Standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 472) and ALARM (PAGE 455)) are
not activated.

Alarm types - Level 2

The level 2 level alarm indicates that a critical level of the respective value or parameter has been reached.
Note: It is not possible to start the engine if any red level protection is active or not confirmed.

IMPORTANT: The gen-set can start by itself after acknowledging the alarms if there is no longer an
active red alarm and the controller is in AUTO or TEST mode!

Shutdown (Sd)
The alarm appears in the alarmlist and is recorded into the history log. It causes immediate stop of the Gen-set
without cooling phase. Also GCB breaker is open. The gen-set cannot be started again while there is a

InteliLite Global Guide 103

 shutdown alarm in the alarmlist. Activates the output AL COMMON SD (PAGE 449) as well as the standard alarm
outputs (HORN (PAGE 472) and ALARM (PAGE 455)).

Breaker open and cool down (BOC)

The event appears in the alarmlist and is recorded into the history log. It causes immediate opening of the GCB
and then the standard stop sequence with cooling follows. The gen-set cannot be started again while there is a
BOC alarm in the alarmlist. Activates the output AL COMMON BOC (PAGE 448) as well as the standard alarm
outputs (HORN (PAGE 472) and ALARM (PAGE 455)).

Sensor fail detection (FLS)

If the measured resistance on an analog input exceeds the valid range, a sensor fail will be detected and a
sensor fail message will appear in the Alarmlist (page 105). The valid range is defined by the most-left (RL)
and most-right (RH) points of the sensor characteristic ±12.5% from RH-RL.
Note: Sometimes there can be problem with lower limit of valid range which can be counted as negative
number. In this case the lower limit is set as one half of the RL point of the sensor curve characteristic.

Image 5.14 Sensor fail detection principle

Remote alarm messaging

If communication plug-in module is connected to the controller, the controller can send SMS messages and
emails at the moment when a new alarm appears in the Alarmlist (page 105) or new event is written in History
log (page 107). The message will contain a copy of the Alarmlist (page 105) or reasons from History log
(page 107). To enable this function, adjust setpoints Event Message (page 293), Wrn Message (page 293),
BOC Message (page 293) and Sd Messages (page 294) to ON. Also enter a valid GSM phone number or
email address to the setpoints Telephone Number 1 (page 291), Email Address 1 (page 291) .
The list of all supported terminals shows the table below:

InteliLite Global Guide 104

 Event Warning BOC Shutdown Event Warning BOC Shutdown
Terminal
SMS SMS SMS SMS email email email email
CM-RS232-485 no no no no no no no no
CM-Ethernet no no no no yes yes yes yes
CM-GPRS yes yes yes yes no no no no
CM-4G-GPS yes yes yes yes no no no no

Alarmlist
Alarmlist is a container of active and inactive alarms. It will appear automatically on the controller display, if a
new alarm occurs, or can be displayed manually from the display menu.
Active alarms are shown as inverted, not yet confirmed alarms are marked with asterisk before them.
Alarmlist contains three types of alarms:
Controller built-in alarms
User configured alarms on binary or analog inputs
ECU alarms

Controller built-in alarms

An alarm message in the alarmlist begins with a prefix, which represents the alarm type (e.g. Wrn, Sd, BOC,
MP, MPR). Then the alarm name follows. In some cases the prefix can be omitted.

User configured alarms

An alarm message in the alarmlist begins with a prefix, which represents the alarm type (e.g. Wrn, Sd, BOC).
Alarm type is selected by user during the configuration of binary or analog input as alarm. Then the alarm name
follows. Name is adjusted by user during the configuration of binary or analog input as alarm.

ECU alarms
The ECU alarms are received from the ECU. The alarms are represented by the Diagnostic Trouble Code,
which contains information about the subsystem where the alarm occurred, the alarm type and the alarm
occurrence counter.
The most common fault codes are translated into text form. Other fault codes are displayed as a numeric code
and the engine fault codes list must be used to determine the reason.

Built-in alarms

Events Protection
Description
specification type
Value measured on analog input 1 is </> than Analog Protection 1
Analog Input 1 Wrn WRN
Wrn (page 229) setpoint.
Value measured on analog input 1 is </> than Analog Protection 1
Analog Input 1 Sd SD
Sd (page 230) setpoint.
Value measured on analog input 2 is </> than Analog Protection 2
Analog Input 2 Wrn WRN
Wrn (page 231) setpoint.
Value measured on analog input 2 is </> than Analog Protection 2
Analog Input 2 Sd SD
Sd (page 231) setpoint.

InteliLite Global Guide 105

 Events Protection
Description
specification type
Value measured on analog input 3 is </> than Analog Protection 3
Analog Input 3 Wrn WRN
Wrn (page 232) setpoint.
Value measured on analog input 3 is </> than Analog Protection 3
Analog Input 3 Sd SD
Sd (page 233) setpoint.
Battery voltage is out of limits given by Battery Undervoltage (page
Wrn Battery Voltage WRN
212) and Battery Overvoltage (page 213) setpoints.
Binary input Configurable Warning/BOC/Shutdown alarms on the binary inputs.
If the controller switches off during starting sequence (STARTER
Sd Battery Flat SD (PAGE 484) output is active) it doesn’t try to start again and activates
this protection (controller assumes bad battery condition).
Sd Start Fail SD Gen-set start failed. All crank attempts were tried without success.
Wrong check-sum of parameters. Happens typically after
downloading new firmware or changing of the parameter. The
Parameters Fail NONE
controller stays in INIT mode. Check all parameters, change value of
at least one parameter.
Sd Gen Lx >V
SD The generator voltage is out of limits given by Gen <V BOC and Gen
BOC Gen Lx <V
BOC >V Sd setpoints.
(where x=1,2,3)
The generator frequency is out of limits given by Generator
BOC Gen >,
BOC Overfrequency BOC (page 219) and Generator Underfrequency
<Frequency
BOC (page 220) setpoints.
The load is greater than the value given by Overload BOC (page
BOC Overload BOC
216) setpoint.
The protection comes active if the speed is greater than Overspeed
Sd Overspeed SD
Sd (page 203) setpoint.
During starting of the engine when the RPM reach the value of
Starting RPM (page 188) setpoint the starter is switched off and the
Sd Underspeed SD speed of the engine can drop under Starting RPM (page 188) again.
Then the Underspeed protection becomes active. Protection
evaluation starts 5 seconds after reaching Starting RPM (page 188).
If the input Emergency Stop is opened shutdown is immediately
Emergency Stop SD
activated.
GCB Fail SD Failure of generator circuit breaker.
MCB Fail WRN Failure of mains circuit breaker.
Failure of magnetic pick-up sensor for speed measurement. This
alarm appears, if starter was disengaged for other reason than
Sd RPM
SD overcrossing Starting RPM (page 188) (like oil pressure or D+) and
Measurement Fail
at the end of timer Maximum Cranking Time (page 187) there are
no RPMs > Starting RPM (page 188) detected.
Gen-set stop failed. See description at Gen-set Operation States
Wrn Stop Fail WRN
chapter.

InteliLite Global Guide 106

 Events Protection
Description
specification type
The period for servicing is set by the Maintenance Timer 1 (page
Wrn Maintenance 1 WRN
211) setpoint. The protection comes if counter reaches zero.
The period for servicing is set by the Maintenance Timer 2 (page
Wrn Maintenance 2 WRN
212) setpoint. The protection comes if counter reaches zero.
The period for servicing is set by the Maintenance Timer 3 (page
Wrn Maintenance 3 WRN
212) setpoint. The protection comes if counter reaches zero.
Charge Alternator
WRN Failure of alternator for charging the battery.
Fail
Sd Override WRN The protection is active if the output Sd Override is closed.
Mains voltage phases are not wired correctly. MCB closing is
Mains CCW Rot WRN
prohibited by chontroller.
Genset voltage phases are not wired correctly. GCB closing is
Generator CCW Rot WRN
prohibited by chontroller.

Note: This table does not contain all alarms in controller. It is only list of the most common alarms.

5.5.11 History log

The history log is an area in the controller’s non-volatile memory that records “snapshots” of the system at
moments when important events occur. The history log is important especially for diagnostics of failures and
problems. When the history file is full, the oldest records are removed.
Each record has the same structure and contains:
• The event which caused the record (e.g. “Overspeed alarm” or “GCB closed”)
• The date and time when it was recorded
• All important data values like RPM, kW, voltages, etc. from the moment that the event occurred.

Record structure

Name Abbreviation Description

Row number (0 corresponds to the last record, -1 to the previous
Number No.
one, etc.)
Reason Reason Reason for history record (any event or alarm related to the gen-set
Time Time Time
Date Date Date
RPM RPM Engine rotations per minute
Power Pwr Generator active power
Reactive power Q Generator reactive power
Power Factor PF Generator power factor
Load Character LChr Generator load character
Generator
Gfrq Generator Frequency
Frequency

InteliLite Global Guide 107

 Generator Voltage Vg1 Generator voltage Ph1
Generator Voltage Vg2 Generator voltage Ph2
Generator Voltage Vg3 Generator voltage Ph3
Generator Voltage Vg12 Generator voltage Ph12
Generator Voltage Vg23 Generator voltage Ph23
Generator Voltage Vg31 Generator voltage Ph31
Generator Current Ig1 Generator current Ph1
Generator Current Ig2 Generator current Ph2
Generator Current Ig3 Generator current Ph3
Mains Voltage Vm1 Mains voltage Ph1
Mains Voltage Vm2 Mains voltage Ph2
Mains Voltage Vm3 Mains voltage Ph3
Mains Voltage Vm12 Mains voltage Ph12
Mains Voltage Vm23 Mains voltage Ph23
Mains Voltage Vm31 Mains voltage Ph31
Mains Frequency Mfrq Mains Frequency
Voltage Battery VBat Voltage of battery
Analog Input 1 Ain1 Analog input 1
Analog Input 2 Ain2 Analog input 2
Analog Input 3 Ain3 Analog input 3
Analog Input 4 Ain4 Analog input 4
Binary Inputs BIN Controller binary inputs
Binary Outputs BOUT Controller binary outputs
Controller Mode Mode Controller mode

Note: When some setpoint is changed, in history log is written its number of communication object.

5.5.12 Breaker control

The following power switches are controlled by the controller:
The generator circuit breaker or contactor – GCB
The Mains circuit breaker or contactor – MCB
It is possible to use either a motorized circuit breaker or contactor. Below is a list of available control outputs
that should fit all types of contactors or breakers. The following rules must be kept to when designing the wiring
of power switches:
The control outputs must be configured and wiring of the power switches must be provided in such a way,
that the controller has full control over the breakers – i.e. the controller can open and close the breaker at any
time.
The breaker must respond within max. 5 seconds to a close and open command. Special attention should be
paid to opening of motorized circuit breakers, as it could take more than 5 seconds on some types. In such
cases it is necessary to use an undervoltage coil for fast opening.

InteliLite Global Guide 108

 After opening the breaker, there is internal delay for another closing of breaker. Delay is 6 seconds - 5
seconds for OFF coil and 1 second for UV coil. After these 6 seconds, breaker can be closed again. For
opening of breaker there is no delay.

Breaker control outputs

An output for control of a contactor. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
Close/Open controller. The breaker must react within 2 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise
an alarm is issued.
An output giving a 2 second pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed. The output is
ON coil
intended for control of close coils of circuit breakers.
An output giving a pulse in the moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until
OFF coil the feedback deactivates, but at least for 2 seconds. The output is intended for control of
open coils of circuit breakers.
The GCB UV coil output is active the whole time the gen-set is running (not in idle or cooling).
The MCB UV coil output is active when the controller is switched on. The output is
UV coil
deactivated for at least 2 seconds in the moment the breaker has to be switched off. The
output is intended for control of undervoltage coils of circuit breakers.

Image 5.15 Breaker control outputs

MCB special requirements

If a contactor is used on the MCB position, it is recommended that the wiring be provided in such a way that
the contactor will be normally closed and will open if the logical binary output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 474)
closes. This behavior is called “negative logic” and can be adjusted by the setpoint MCB Logic (page 227).
The negative logic will prevent accidental opening of the MCB when the controller is switched off.
If a contactor is used on the MCB position, it will open itself immediately after the mains have failed,
because it will lose power for the coil. That is why the following adjustment is necessary to prevent triggering

InteliLite Global Guide 109

 the Wrn MCB Fail (page 534) alarm: MCB Opens On (page 229) = Mains Fail, Mains < > Voltage Delay
(page 225) ≤ 1.
If a 230 V motor driven circuit breaker is used on the MCB position and an undervoltage coil is not fitted, it is
not possible to open the breaker after the mains have failed, because there is no power for the motor drive
until the gen-set is started and providing voltage. Adjusting the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 229) = Gen
Run will prevent triggering the Wrn MCB Fail (page 534) alarm.

Breaker fail detection

Breaker fail detection is based on binary output breaker close/open comparing with binary input breaker
feedback.
IMPORTANT: It is necessary to configure breaker feedback to use this function.

IMPORTANT: Also it is possible to use breakers without feedbacks. In this case there is no check
of breaker real state.

There are three different time delays for breaker fail detection – see following diagrams.
When binary output breaker close/open is in steady state and breaker feedback is changed the breaker fail is
detected immediately (no delay).

Image 5.16 Breaker fail - breaker close/open in steady position - open

Image 5.17 Breaker fail - breaker close/open in steady position - close

When binary output breaker close/open opens there is 2 sec delay for breaker fail detection.

InteliLite Global Guide 110

 Image 5.18 Breaker fail - breaker close/open opens

When binary output breaker close/open closes there is 2 sec delay for breaker fail detection.

Image 5.19 Breaker fail - breaker close/open closes

5.5.13 Exercise timer

The exercise (general-purpose) timer in controller is intended for scheduling of any operations such as e.g.
periodic tests of the gen-set, scheduled transfer of the load to the gen-set prior to an expected disconnection of
the mains etc.
Related setpoints for timer 1 are:
Timer 1 Function (page 261) Timer 1 Day (page 266)
Timer 1 Repetition (page 262) Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week (page 267)
Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 263) Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 267)
Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 263) Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month (page 268)
Timer 1 Duration (page 263) Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 265)
Timer 1 Repeated (page 264) Timer 1 Weekends (page 266)
Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 267)

InteliLite Global Guide 111

 Available modes of timer:
This is a single shot mode. The timer will be activated only once at preset date/time for preset
Once
duration.
The timer is activated every "x-th" day. The day period "x" is adjustable. Weekends can be
Daily
excluded. E.g. the timer can be adjusted to every 2nd day excluding Saturdays and Sundays.
The timer is activated every "x-th" week on selected weekdays. The week period "x" is
Weekly
adjustable. E.g. the timer can be adjusted to every 2nd week on Monday and Friday.
The timer is activated every "x-th" month on the selected day. The requested day can be
Monthly selected either as "y-th" day in the month or as "y-th" weekday in the month. E.g. the timer can
be adjusted to every 1st month on 1st Tuesday.
Short
The timer is repeated with adjusted period (hh:mm). The timer duration is included in the period.
period

Once mode
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1 Setup.
Note: First of all function of timer has to be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 261).

Image 5.20 Once mode - InteliConfig

In timer mode select Once. In timer settings adjust date and time of occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration
of timer.

Set-up via controller interface

In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 261)
setpoint. Than go to Timer 1 Setup and press enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 262) setpoint select

InteliLite Global Guide 112

 Once mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 263), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 263) and
Timer 1 Duration (page 263).
Note: Use left and right buttons to move between timer setpoints.

Daily mode
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1 Setup.
Note: First of all function of timer has to be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 261).

Image 5.21 Daily mode - InteliConfig

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Daily. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the x-th day of repetition
(Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 265)) and behavior of timer on weekends (Timer 1 Weekends (page 266)).
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be again activated every 3rd day at 12:00 for 1 hour including weekends.

Set-up via controller interface

In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 261)
setpoint. Than go to Timer 1 Setup and press enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 262) setpoint select
Repeated mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 263), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 263)
and Timer 1 Duration (page 263). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 264) select Daily and adjust Timer 1
Refresh Period (page 265) (x-th day of repetition) and Timer 1 Weekends (page 266) (behavior of timer on
weekends).
Note: Use left and right buttons to move between timer setpoints.

InteliLite Global Guide 113

 Weekly mode
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1 Setup.
Note: First of all function of timer has to be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 261).

Image 5.22 Weekly mode - InteliConfig

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Weekly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the x-th week of repetition
(Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 265)) and days when timer should be active (Timer 1 Day (page 266)).
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be again activated every 2nd week on Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 12:00 for 1 hour.

Set-up via controller interface

In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 261)
setpoint. Than go to Timer 1 Setup and press enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 262) setpoint select
Repeated mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 263), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 263)
and Timer 1 Duration (page 263). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 264) select Weekly and adjust Timer
1 Day (page 266) (days when timer should be active) and Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 265) (x-th week of
repetition).
Note: Use left and right buttons to move between timer setpoints.

Monthly mode
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1 Setup.

InteliLite Global Guide 114

 Note: First of all function of timer has to be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 261).

There are two types of monthly repetition. First of them is based on repeating one day in month.

Image 5.23 Monthly mode - InteliConfig

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Monthly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the type of monthly
repetition and the x-th day of repetition (Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 267)). Than select the x-th month
of repetition.
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be again activated every 2nd day in 2nd month at 12:00 for 1 hour.

InteliLite Global Guide 115

 Second type of monthly repetition is based on repeating days in week in month.

Image 5.24 Monthly mode - InteliConfig

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Monthly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the type of monthly
repetition, the x-th week of repetition and days in week. Than select the x-th month of repetition.
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be again activated every 2nd week in 2nd month on Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 12:00 for 1 hour.

Set-up via controller interface

There are two types of monthly repetition. First of them is based on repeating one day in month.
In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 261)
setpoint. Than go to Timer 1 Setup and press enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 262) setpoint select
Repeated mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 263), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 263)
and Timer 1 Duration (page 263). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 264) select Monthly and adjust type of
monthly repetition via Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 267), Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 265) (x-th month of
repetition) and Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 267) (concrete day in repeated months).
Second type of monthly repetition is based on repeating days in week in month.
In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 261)
setpoint. Than go to Timer 1 Setup and press enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 262) setpoint select
Repeated mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 263), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 263)
and Timer 1 Duration (page 263). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 264) select Monthly and adjust type of
monthly repetition via Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 267), Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 265) (x-th month of
repetition), Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week (page 267) (days in week when timer is active) and Timer 1
Repeat Week In Month (page 268) (concrete week in repeated months).
Note: Use left and right buttons to move between timer setpoints.

InteliLite Global Guide 116

 Short period mode
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1 Setup.
Note: First of all function of timer has to be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 261).

Image 5.25 Short period mode - InteliConfig

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Short period. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the interval of repetition
(shorter than 1 day).
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be again activated every 4th hour for 1 hour.

Set-up via controller interface

In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 261)
setpoint. Than go to Timer 1 Setup and press enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 262) setpoint select
Repeated mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 263), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 263)
and Timer 1 Duration (page 263). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 264) select Short Period and adjust
Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 265) (interval of repetition).
Note: Use left and right buttons to move between timer setpoints.

5.5.14 Service timers

Running hours counters
Service timers are used as maintenance interval counters. Counters can be set by setpoints - Maintenance
Timer 1 (page 211), Maintenance Timer 2 (page 212) and Maintenance Timer 3 (page 212). All of them

InteliLite Global Guide 117

 work the same way - their values are decremented every hour when the gen-set is running.
Actual value of counters is located either as the same setpoints Maintenance Timer 1 (page 211),
Maintenance Timer 2 (page 212) and Maintenance Timer 3 (page 212) or as values Maintenance 1 (page
383), Maintenance 2 (page 383) and Maintenance 3 (page 384).
When the value of counter reaches 0, the alarm Wrn Maintenance 1 (page 533) or Wrn Maintenance 2 (page
534) or Wrn Maintenance 3 (page 534) is active until the respective counter is readjusted back to nonzero
value.
Unused counter has to be adjusted to maximal value 10000 (Disabled).

5.5.15 Additional running engine indications

It is helpful to have information other than speed (RPM), whether the engine is rotating or not, especially if RPM
is measured from the generator frequency instead of magnetic pickup. The generator frequency measurement
can be unreliable at very low speeds and/or may have a delayed reaction to sudden and big changes (i.e. in the
moment that the engine has just started…).
The following conditions are evaluated as additional running engine indication:
Voltage on the D+ input is higher than the D+ Treshold (page 202) of battery voltage. Connect this input to
the D+ (L) terminal of the charging alternator and enable the D+ function by the setpoint D+ Function (page
201). If D+ terminal is not available, leave the input unconnected and disable the function.
The pickup is not used and frequency is not detected on the pickup input. Connect the pickup input to the W
terminal of the charging alternator if you do not use pickup and the W terminal is available. If not, leave the
input unconnected.
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 189) setpoint. The oil pressure is evaluated from the analog
input or from the ECU if an ECU is configured.
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 439) is in logical 0.
At least one phase of generator voltage is >25% of nominal voltage.
These signals are used during start for powering down the starter motor even if still no RPM is measured and
also during stop in order to evaluate if the engine is really stopped.

5.5.16 Voltage phase sequence detection

Controller detects phase sequence voltage terminals. This protection is important after controller installation to
avoid wrong voltage phase connection. There is fix defined phase sequence in controller L1, L2, L3. When the
phases are connected in different order (e.g. L1,L3,L2 or L2,L1,L3) following alarms are detected:
Generator CCW Rotation (page 538)
Mains CCW Rotation (page 538)

InteliLite Global Guide 118

5.5.17 Gen-set operation states
Engine state machine

Autotest during controller power on.

Note: Sometimes controller stays in Init mode after FW upgrade. It means that there are
Init
new parameters which should be checked by user. It is possible to disable this control
via InteliConfig.
Gen-set is not ready to start.
Not ready
Example: When shutdown alarm is active or unit is in OFF mode.
Prestart sequence in process, PRESTART (PAGE 481) output is closed.
Prestart
Example: Usually used for preheating or processes executed prior gen-set start.
Cranking Engine is cranking, STARTER (PAGE 484) output is closed
Pause Pause between start attempts.
Starting Starting speed is reached and the Idle timer is running.
Running Gen-set is running at nominal speed.
Loaded Gen-set is running at nominal speed and GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 465) is closed.
Stop.
Stop
Example: Automatic or manual stop command was issued, engine is stopping.
Shutdown Shut-down alarm activated.
Ready Gen-set is ready to run.
Cooling Gen-set is cooling before stop.
EMERGENCY MAN (PAGE 432) gen-set operation.
EmergMan
Example: Used for bypass the controller and engine manual start.

Engine started conditions

Engine speed (RPM) > Starting RPM (page 188) or
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 189) or
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 439) is in logical 0 or
D+ terminal active (reached D+ Treshold (page 202) of supply voltage) for minimum 1 s or
Generator voltage > 25% of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 177) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 177)
(any phase)
Note: Any of these condition will disconnect starter of the engine, however for transition to next state RPM
needs to be higher than Starting RPM (page 188).

Engine running conditions

Engine speed (RPM) > Starting RPM (page 188) or
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 189) or
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 439) is in logical 0 or
Generator voltage > 25% of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 177)

InteliLite Global Guide 119

 Still engine conditions
Engine speed (RPM) < Starting RPM (page 188) or
Oil pressure < Starting Oil Pressure (page 189) or
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 439) is in logical 1 or
Generator voltage < 50 V (any phase)

Note: When the engine was running before and all above conditions are fulfilled, additional 2 s delay is
necessary to confirm “still engine”.

When any engine running conditions are appeared on still engine than the Wrn Stop Fail (page 536) is
activated with following delay:
for generator voltage from 10 V to < 50 % of nominal voltage, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1 s
for generator voltage > 50 % of nominal voltage, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 200 ms
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 189), Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1 s
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 439) is in logical 0, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1 s
for detected RPM, there is no delay.

Stop engine conditions

If no engine running conditions are validated than the controller will wait extra 12 s before leaving the Machine
state Stop and than it will release the STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 485) output.

Image 5.26 Engine stops in Stop Time (page 199)

When the total time of stopping will exceed setpoint Stop Time (page 199) than the Wrn Stop Fail (page 536)
and binary outputs are activated. The controller will continuously try to stop the engine.

InteliLite Global Guide 120

 Image 5.27 Engine stops after first Stop Time (page 199)

Electric state machine

Mains is present and all its values are within limits.

MainsOper
Example: MCB is closed, GCB is opened
MainsFlt Mains fails
Island operation
IslOper
Example: MCB is opened, GCB is closed
MainsRet Mains recover
BrksOff GCB, MCB opened

5.5.18 Sensor curves

Default sensor curves
There are 16 default resistive curves available. The following table provides information on minimum/maximum
values of respective sensors. Actual values especially of temperature curves may differ. Meaning is to prolong
curve to the lower temperature values, so the cold engine will not raise alarm fail sensor.

Curve Min [Ohm] Max [Ohm] Units

VDO 10 Bar 0-2400ohm 0 2400 Bar
VDO40-120°C0-2400ohm 0 2400 °C
VDOLevel%0-2400ohm 0 2400 %
General line 1 0 1000 ohm
General line 2 0 1000 ohm
General line 3 0 1000 ohm
General line 4 0 1000 ohm
General line 5 0 1000 ohm

InteliLite Global Guide 121

 General line 6 0 1000 ohm
General line 7 0 1000 ohm
General line 8 0 1000 ohm
General line 9 0 1000 ohm
General line 10 0 1000 ohm
General line 11 0 1000 ohm
General line 12 0 1000 ohm
General line 13 0 1000 ohm

Note: Curves can be modified via InteliConfig. In InteliConfig are also prepared some standard curves.

IMPORTANT: For right behavior of function, curve for this analog input has to be in percentage.

6 back to Functions

5.5.19 PLC
PLC Editor is powerful tool which helps you to create your own PLC scheme. It has graphical interface to have
user interface easy to use.

Image 5.28 PLC Editor main page

InteliLite Global Guide 122

 List of available PLC blocks

PLC block Number of blocks

OR/AND 4
XOR/RS 0
Comparator with hysteresis (Comp Hyst) 1
Comparator with delay (Comp Time) 1
Timer 1
Delay 1
Force history record (Force Hist) 1
Force protection (Force Prot) 1

Working with the editor

If the currently opened archive does not contain any PLC program, then an empty drawing is created
automatically when you select the PLC Editor. The procedure of creation of a PLC drawing (program) contains
following essential steps:
Adjust the sheet to your needs. See Working with sheets (page 123) for more information.
Add PLC blocks into the sheets. See Adding PLC blocks (page 124) for more information.
Define inputs and outputs of the PLC program. See Define inputs and outputs (page 125) for more
information.
Create connections between inputs, blocks and outputs. See Creating wires (page 127) for more
information.
Adjust properties of the blocks. See List of PLC blocks (page 516) for more information about blocks.

Working with sheets

Drag the sheet edges to re-size the sheet according to your needs.

InteliLite Global Guide 123

 Image 5.29 Adjusting PLC sheet

Adding PLC blocks

Adding PLC block is simple and intuitive. Follow the procedure below to add PLC block.
Select required block from the list of available PLC blocks at the left and drag it into the sheet.
Double-click on the block and adjust properties of the block. See List of PLC blocks (page 516) for more
information about blocks.
Connect the block inputs and outputs by drawing wires in the sheet. See Define inputs and outputs (page
125) for more information. It is also possible to connected inputs and outputs via properties of selected PLC
block.

InteliLite Global Guide 124

 Image 5.30 Adding PLC blocks

Note: To delete PLC block just click on it and press delete button. Also delete selection function can by used.

Note: To see context help for selected PLC block just press F1 button.

Define inputs and outputs

Image 5.31 Blank sheet of PLC editor

Inputs
Sheet inputs are located at the left side of a sheet. Follow the procedure below to add or edit an input.

InteliLite Global Guide 125

 Double-click on a free input position or existing input to add new input or edit the existing one.
Select the source for the input.
If you create a binary input, you can select a source from following categories:
Bin. Values - this category contains all binary values available in the controller as binary inputs,
logical binary outputs etc.
PLC Outputs - this category contains all PLC blocks binary outputs available in the controller.
If you create an analog input, you can select a source from following categories:
Ana. Values - this category contains all analog values available in the controller as analog inputs,
electrical values, values from ECU etc.
All Setpoints - this category contains all setpoints of the controller except the dedicated PLC
setpoints. Names, resolutions and dimensions of these setpoints can not be modified.
PLC Setpoints - this category contains a group of setpoints which are dedicated for using in the PLC
program. PLC setpoints can be renamed, their dimension, resolution and limits can be modified
according to need of PLC blocks where they are used.

Image 5.32 PLC inputs

InteliLite Global Guide 126

 Outputs
Sheet outputs are located at the right side of a sheet. Follow the procedure below to add or edit an input.
Doubleclick on a free output position to add new sheet output.
Doubleclick on an already created output to configure the output onto a controller output terminal or a logical
binary input (first of all some PLC block output has to be connected to this output to enable configuration of
output).

Image 5.33 PLC outputs

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to click on Connect button after selecting the output. Otherwise PLC
output is not connected to output.

Creating wires
Wires can be create between PLC inputs and PLC blocks and between PLC blocks and PLC outputs.
IMPORTANT: Keep the order of starting and finishing connection points. Wires between inputs and
blocks have to start from inputs. Wires between blocks and outputs have to start from blocks.

Follow the procedure below to create wire.

InteliLite Global Guide 127

 Locate the mouse pointer over the starting point of the wire. If the area under the mouse pointer is a
connection point, the pointer will change the color (fill of pointer will be white).
Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the wire to the destination of required connection point. If you
point over a valid connection point, the connection point will be marked with a red circle.
Release the left mouse button to create a wire between the two points. The wire is routed automatically.

Note: It is possible to make connection only between the outputs and inputs with the same type of value (binary
or analog). Binary values are marker by black pointer, analog values are marked with green pointer.

Note: To delete wire just click on it and press delete button. Also delete selection function can by used.

PLC logic execution rules

The PLC program is executed every 100 ms. The blocks are executed in order according to block numbers (item
numbers), which are indicated in each block. The block numbers are assigned automatically according to
position on sheet.

Image 5.34 PLC execution logic

IMPORTANT: Please always check that the blocks are ordered correctly, especially if you use direct
feedbacks from outputs to inputs within one sheet. Wrong order may lead to incorrect results!!!

InteliLite Global Guide 128

 Other functions
Consistency check
Use this function to check if all inputs and outputs of PLC block are connected.

Delete whole content of sheet

Use this function to delete the whole content of sheet (including blocks, wires, inputs, outputs, etc...).

Hints
Use this function to enable or disable quick hints for blocks (controller help is not affected by this function).

PLC monitor
PLC monitor is a powerful tool for monitoring your PLC. Just click on PLC monitor button on main InteliConfig
page to see you PLC. Active inputs and outputs have blue color. Also wires with active signals have blue color.
IMPORTANT: It is not possible to edit PLC in PLC monitor tool.

5.5.20 Tier 4 Final

Tier 4 Final support generally provides monitoring and control of after-treatment system installed on generators
engine. The requirements are defined as:
Providing After-Treatment status information by
displaying universal lamps (icons)
displaying analog and binary values
Control of After-Treatment regeneration function by
transmitting commands to the ECU

Providing Aftertreatment status information

After-Treatment screen
This screen is shown with configured ECU which supports Tier 4 Final. After-Treatment screen is automatically
shown, once any of selected lamps gets active or change status. Deactivating of the lamp will not trigger
showing the screen. The screen is then shown until operator switch it to another one. Alarmlist screen has lower

InteliLite Global Guide 129

 priority so even new alarm appears, After-treatment screen is still displayed. To avoid displaying blank screen,
inactive lamps are represented by "dotted" icons. For no active lamp the screen shows all dotted icons. Please
see examples below:

Image 5.35 Example of active Tier 4 Final screen

Image 5.36 Example of inactive Tier 4 Final screen

Universal lamps (icons)

Universal lamp icons are shown on the After-Treatment screen. Based on specific value read in specific frame
with specific SPN is every lamp icon either:
shown
hidden
blinking slow (1 Hz)
blinking fast (2 Hz)

Note: Lamp icon blinking is defined as displaying active lamp icon and inverse colored active lamp icon in
required frequency.

InteliLite Global Guide 130

 Lamp name Active icon Inactive icon Notes

Note: This value can light

Amber warning lamp
or blink on both frequencies.

Note: This value can light

Red stop lamp
or blink on both frequencies.

Engine wait to start lamp

Note: DPF = Diesel

Particulate Filter; SCR =
Selective Catalytic
DPF/SCR lamp command
Reduction. This lamp also
activates alarm After-
Treatment (page 536).

Note: This lamp also

Exhaust system high temperature
activates alarm After-
lamp command
Treatment (page 536).

Note: This value can light

or blink on both frequencies.
Malfunction indicator lamp This lamp also activates
alarm After-Treatment
(page 536).

Note: This lamp also

Fluid tank low level indicator activates alarm After-
Treatment (page 536).

Note: Indicates the state of

diesel particulate filter
active regeneration
DPF regeneration inhibited
inhibition. This lamp also
activates alarm After-
Treatment (page 536).

Analog values
Supported analog values:

InteliLite Global Guide 131

 DPFAshLoad (page 367)
DPFSootLoad (page 367)
DEF Level (page 367)

Control of After-Treatment regeneration function

User can force or inhibit regeneration process by activating appropriate binary inputs of the controller. Please
see the list of binary inputs below:
FORCE REGENERATION (PAGE 433)
REGENERATION INHIB (PAGE 440)

5.5.21 Alternate configuration

In controller are 3 sets of configuration.

Configuration set 1 Configuration set 2 Configuration set 3

Nominal Power Split Phase 1 Nominal Power Split Phase 2 Nominal Power Split Phase 3
(page 272) (page 276) (page 280)
Nominal Power 1 (page 272) Nominal Power 2 (page 276) Nominal Power 3 (page 280)
Nominal RPM 1 (page 271) Nominal RPM 2 (page 275) Nominal RPM 3 (page 279)
Nominal Frequency 1 (page 270) Nominal Frequency 2 (page 274) Nominal Frequency 3 (page 278)
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 (page
271) 275) 279)
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 (page
271) 275) 279)
Nominal Current 1 (page 270) Nominal Current 2 (page 274) Nominal Current 3 (page 278)
Connection Type 1 (page 268) Connection type 2 (page 272) Connection type 3 (page 276)
ECU Speed Adjustment 1 (page ECU Speed Adjustment 2 (page ECU Speed Adjustment 3 (page
281) 281) 282)

Configuration sets can be changed via logical binary inputs ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 404) and ALTERNATE
CONFIG 3 (PAGE 404). Configuration set 1 is active when there is no input activated. In case that inputs
ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 404) and ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 404) are active at the same time, the
configuration set 3 is took in account.

ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 404) ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 404) Active configuration set
0 0 1
1 0 2
0 1 3
1 1 3

IMPORTANT: If LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 462) is used, change of alternate configuration can
be made only in prestart phase. So prestart has to be set up for enough long time.

InteliLite Global Guide 132

5.5.22 ECU Frequency selection
Setpoint ECU Freq Select is no longer in use. However ECU Frequency Select (page 370) value was kept
and the value can be calculated from Nominal Frequency (page 178) setpoint. Sequence for frequency
change is executed automatically (engine must be in still condition and ECU is powered on – ECU Power Relay
is not configured) in following steps:
1. Starting of the engine is blocked (state: Not Ready)
2. Wait 100 ms
3. ECU Stop Pulse is set for 1000 ms (standard Stop Pulse duration)
4. Wait 3000 ms
5. Frequency selection is changed to a new value
6. Wait 2000 ms
7. ECU Stop Pulse is set for 1000 ms (standard Stop Pulse duration)
8. Wait 2000 ms
9. Come back from start blocking state
This sequence does not control LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 462) anyhow.
Note: If LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 462) is used, this change can be made only in prestart phase. So
prestart has to be set up for enough long time.

5.5.23 Cybernetic security

The cybernetic security is formed by:
Hardening the storage of a credentials
Protection against a brute-force attack to the password
Secure method to reset the password
A new technology of encryption of the remote communication
Web interface can be disabled

IMPORTANT: Due to this, we do not recommend performing a rollback from FW 1.8.0 to FW

version 1.7.2 or older.

Hardening the storage of a credentials

The user credentials (passwords and access code) have been moved to a hardened storage to prevent the
credentials to leak out of the hardware.
IMPORTANT: If a firmware rollback is inevitable, please keep in mind, when the firmware is first
time updated to the new firmware (which uses hardened storage) a seamless transfer of the
credentials into the hardened storage is performed. However, if the rollback to any previous
firmware (which does not use hardened storage) is performed the credentials are NOT transferred
back, so the previous firmware will not “see” any change of the credentials made through the new
firmware. Moreover, as the transfer of the credentials into the hardened storage is performed only
during very first update from an “old” to a “new” firmware, no change of the credentials performed
in the “old” firmware after the rollback will be visible in the “new” firmware after a next update to
the “new” firmware.

InteliLite Global Guide 133

 Protection against the brute force attack
Protection against the brute force will take a place when an invalid password is entered repeatedly.
If the invalid password is entered 5 times, the controller gets blocked for entering password for a while.
Each further entering of the invalid password cause the consequent blocking time is increased.
If the invalid password is entered repeatedly the controller gets blocked for entering the password
permanently and the password must be reset to a default value as described below.
Note: Blocking of the controller for entering the password have no influence to controller/genset operation

Note: Permanent blocking cannot occur accidentally, just by user mistake. It can be practically triggered only
by a focused activity.

Resetting the administrator password

If the administrator password is lost or controller is permanently locked due to brute-force attack
protection, proceed according to a procedure described below:
IMPORTANT: There is a backup e-mail address defined in the controller to which and only which
ComAp will send the “password reset action code”. Please be sure, that you have adjusted this e-
mail address correctly. Use InteliConfig to adjust the backup e-mail address

InteliLite Global Guide 134

 Reset password procedure
1. Connect InteliConfig. You may connect remotely if you know Access Code.
2. Get the password reset request code and send it via e-mail to support@comap-control.com

InteliLite Global Guide 135

 3. Once you receive the reply from ComAp, copy the code from the e-mail (all characters inside the box as
indicated below)

InteliLite Global Guide 136

 4. Paste the code into the password reset window

Encryption of the communication

New technology “CCS v.1” is used for an authentication and an encryption of the ComAp protocol via
Internet/ethernet/AirGate. This technology is based on strong and proven cryptographic algorithms and has
passed successfully penetration tests and cybersecurity audit.

Web interface can be disabled

A setpoint has been added to disable the CM-ETHERNET built-in web interface.
IMPORTANT: As the web interface is using HTTP protocol it is recommended to disable the web
interface unless the controller is connected into a trusted secure network.

InteliLite Global Guide 137

6 Communication
6.1 PC 138
6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems 151

6 back to Table of contents

6.1 PC
6.1.1 Direct communication 138
6.1.2 Remote communication 140

6.1.1 Direct communication

A RS232, USB, RS485 or ethernet interface can be used for direct cable connection to a PC.

Connection via RS232

A plug-in communication module CM-RS232-485 is necessary for communication via RS232 connection.
The module is plugged into the slot located on the rear side of the controller. To find more information about
installation of the modules see Plug-in module installation on page 56.
RS232 interface uses COM1 Mode (page 282) port of the controller. Use a cross-wired serial communication
cable with DB9 female connectors and signals Rx, Tx, GND.
Note: Also USB-RS232 convertor can be used.

Image 6.1 Cross-wired RS232 cable is used

Image 6.2 Cross-wired RS232 cable and USB is used

Connection via RS485

A plug-in communication module CM-RS232-485 is necessary for communication via RS485 connection.

InteliLite Global Guide 138

 The module is plugged into the slot located on the rear side of the controller. To find more information about
installation of the modules see Plug-in module installation on page 56.
RS485 interface uses COM2 Mode (page 284) port of the controller.
Note: Also USB-RS485 convertor can be used.

Image 6.3 Plug-in module CM RS232-485 is used

Connection via Ethernet

A plug-in communication module CM-Ethernet is necessary for ethernet connection.
The module is plugged into the slot located on the rear side of the controller. To find more information about
installation of the modules see Plug-in module installation on page 56.
This connection type is used for communication with the controller from InteliConfig or any other PC tool. . Only
three remote clients can be connected at the same time.
To connect your PC tool to the controller use the INTERNET connection type and just put the CM-Ethernet IP
address into the gen-set address box in the PC tool.

Image 6.4 Ethernet cable is used

Connection via USB

USB interface uses HID profile.

Image 6.5 Shielded USB type A cable is used

6 back to Communication

InteliLite Global Guide 139

6.1.2 Remote communication
A PC can be connected to the controller also remotely via CM-GPRS or CM-Ethernet plug-in module.
IMPORTANT: Factory default password and access code are "0". It is highly recommended to
change these parameters.

Ethernet LAN connection

Direct IP LAN connection is intended to be used if the CM-Ethernet module is reachable from the client
computer by specifying the IP address at which the module can be contacted.
If direct IP connection is to be used within a local network the CM-Ethernet must have static IP address in
the respective local network.

Image 6.6 Ethernet LAN connection

Setting-up static IP address

There are two basic ways to get the static IP address.
First way is to switch theCM-Ethernet to manual IP address mode. Adjust the setpoint IP Address Mode
(page 296) to FIXED. In that case all setpoints of IP settings(IP Address (page 296), Subnet Mask (page
297), Gateway IP (page 297), DNS IP Address 1 (page 298)) have to be adjusted manually. If this method is
used several basic rules should be kept to avoid conflicts with the remaining network infrastructure:
The static IP used in the controller must be selected in accordance with the local network in which CM-
Ethernet is connected.
The static IP used in the controller must be excluded from the pool of addresses which is assigned by
DHCP server, which is in charge of the respective local network.
The local infrastructure must generally allow using devices with manually assigned IP addresses.
There must not be any other device using the same static IP address. This can be tested from a computer
connected to the same network using "ping <required_ip_address>" command issued from the command
line. The IP address is not occupied if there is not any response to the ping command.
Note: The list above contains only basic rules. Other specific restrictions/rules may take place depending on
the local network security policy, technology used, topology etc.

Next way is to switch the CM-Ethernet to automatic IP address mode. Adjust the setpoint IP Address Mode
(page 296) to AUTOMATIC. In that case all IP settings are assigned by DHCP server. Then configure the

InteliLite Global Guide 140

 DHCP server to assign always the same IP address (i.e. static IP address) to the particular CM-Ethernet
according to it's MAC address.

Internet connection
Public static IP
If public static IP connection is to be used from the Internet, the IP address, which is entered into the client
computer, must be static and public in scope of the Internet.
If CM-Ethernet is connected to Internet via a local ethernet network then in most cases port forwarding
must be created from the public IP address of the network gateway to the local IP address of CM-
Ethernet at the port specified for ComAp protocol. Different port numbers can be used to create multiple
port forwarding rules in the same local network.

SMS

Event SMS
The InteliLite controller equipped with the CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS communication module is able to send
Event SMS according to the setting of setpoint:
Event Message (page 293)

Note: Firstly setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 291) has to be adjusted.

InteliLite Global Guide 141

 The following events can be received by mobile phone:
Engine Start/Stop
Manual Start/Stop
Remote Start/Stop
AMF Start/Stop (as Automatic Mains Failure Start/Stop)
Test Start/Stop Gen-set
Mains Fail
Mains Returned
Load on Mains
Load on Gen-set
Test On Load
Message structure:
Genset Name (hh:mm:ss dd.mm.yyyy)
hh:mm:ss Mains Fail
hh:mm:ss AMF Start
hh:mm:ss Load on Genset
hh:mm:ss Mains Returned
hh:mm:ss Load on Mains
hh:mm:ss AMF Stop

Alarm SMS
The InteliLite controller equipped with the CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS communication module is able to send
Alarm SMS according to the setting of setpoints:
Wrn Message (page 293)
Sd Messages (page 294)
BOC Message (page 293)

Note: Firstly setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 291) has to be adjusted.

Message structure:
Gen-set Name
AL=(Alarm 1, Alarm 2, Alarm x)

Note: Asterisk means that alarm is unconfirmed and exclamation mark means that alarm is active.

SMS commands
To control the gen-set equipped with InteliLite controller and CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS communication module
(or modem) via SMS requests, send an SMS in the structure of:
# xxxx, yyyy, zzzz, etc.
SMS send to the telephone number of the SIM card in your CM-GPRS module (or modem). Where the “#” mark
means the controller access code, “xxxx” means the Command 1, “yyyy” is Command 2, “zzzz” is Command 3,
etc.
Note: Access code is set up via InteliConfig.

IMPORTANT: If wrong controller access code is set, then only help command is working.

InteliLite Global Guide 142

 start Start the engine in MAN mode.
stop Stop the engine in MAN mode.
fault reset Acknowledging alarms and deactivating the horn output.
gcb close Closing GCB in MAN and TEST mode.
gcb open Opening GCB in MAN and TEST mode.
mcb close Closing MCB in MAN and TEST mode
mcb open Opening MCB in MAN and TEST mode
off Switching to OFF mode.
man Switching to MAN mode.
auto Switching to AUTO mode.
test Switching to TEST mode.
status Get status information from controller unit.
help Get a list of available SMS requests.

Note: Between commands are internal delays adjusted due to system requirements.

Example: When the controller, in AUTO mode, with a controller name of “InteliLite-Test”, with the CM-
GPRS module and access code “0” receives the SMS:
0 man, start, gcb close, gcb open, stop, auto
Controller mode will be changed to MANUAL mode. The engine will be started and GCB will close. Then
GCB will open, the engine will stop and it will go into AUTO mode again.
The controller will send back the SMS (controller will respond to SMS after every command has been
finished, not sooner.):
#InteliLite-Test: <OK>,<OK>,<OK>, <OK>,<OK>, <OK>
The value <OK> or <ERROR> means if the command has been performed succesfuly or not.

Emails

Event Email
The InteliLite controller equipped with the CM-Ethernet communication module is able to send Event Email
according to the setting of setpoint:
Event Message (page 293)

Note: Firstly setpoints Email Address 1 (page 291) and SMTP Sender Address (page 295) (for CM-
Ethernet) have to be adjusted.

Note: #Summer Time Mode (page 260) and Time Zone (page 292) have to be adjusted for correct time in
emails.

InteliLite Global Guide 143

 Message structure:
Controller
-----------------------------------------------
Name: XXX
Serial number: XXX
SW branch: XXX
SW version: XXX
Application: XXX
Appl. version: XXX
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
Time: hh:mm:ss

Alarm list
-----------------------------------------------
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3

Events
-----------------------------------------------
hh:mm:ss Event 1
hh:mm:ss Event 2
hh:mm:ss Event 3

Alarm Email
The InteliLite controller equipped with the CM-Ethernet communication module is able to send Alarm Emails
according to the setting of setpoints:
Wrn Message (page 293)
Sd Messages (page 294)
BOC Message (page 293)

Note: Firstly setpoints Email Address 1 (page 291) and SMTP Sender Address (page 295) (for CM-
Ethernet) have to be adjusted.

Note: #Summer Time Mode (page 260) and Time Zone (page 292) have to be adjusted for correct time in
emails.

InteliLite Global Guide 144

 Message structure:
Controller
-----------------------------------------------
Name: XXX
Serial number: XXX
SW branch: XXX
SW version: XXX
Application: XXX
Appl. version: XXX
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
Time: hh:mm:ss

Alarm list
-----------------------------------------------
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3

History events
-----------------------------------------------
0 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 1
-1 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 2
-2 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 3
Note: Asterisk means that alarm is unconfirmed and exclamation mark means that alarm is active.

InteliLite Global Guide 145

 Web Server
IMPORTANT: The web interface is based on HTTP protocol and is intended to be used only in
private networks. It is not recommended to expose the web interface to the public Internet.

The Web Server is designed for basic monitoring and adjustment of the controller using a web browser. Just put
the controller IP address into the browser to display the main controller web page like http://192.168.1.254. You
will be asked for the controller access code prior to entering the web pages.
IMPORTANT: Do not use the browser navigation buttons as "Back", "Forward" or "Reload". Use
the links and the reload button located in the toolbar instead.

Note: Only two remote clients can be connected to the Web Server at one moment. If you close your web
browser without disconnecting from the CM-Ethernet ("Exit" button at the web pages), the connection will be
blocked for next 5 minutes.

Image 6.7 Web Server main screen

InteliLite Global Guide 146

 Scada
Click to the SCADA link in the toolbar to display the scada page. The scada page is also the main page which is
displayed by default if you just put the CM-Ethernet address into the browser (after entering the right access
code).

Image 6.8 Web Server - Scada screen

InteliLite Global Guide 147

 Measurement
Click to the MEASUREMENT link in the toolbar to display the measurement page. Then click to the required
group name in the left box to display values of the group in the right box.
Note: The measurement page is automatically refreshed every 60 seconds (this time cannot be changed).

Image 6.9 Web Server - measurement screen

InteliLite Global Guide 148

 Setpoints
Click to the SETPOINTS link in the toolbar to display the setpoints page.
Click to the required group name in the left box to display setpoints of the group in the right box.
Click to the required setpoint name or value to change the value. If the respective setpoint is protected by
password, which is indicated by a lock icon by the setpoint name, you have to click on the "Controller
password" icon located in the toolbar and then enter valid password.

Image 6.10 Web Server - Setpoints screen

InteliLite Global Guide 149

 History
Click to the HISTORY link in the toolbar to display the history page.
Use the control buttons to move within the history file.
Note: The history page is automatically refreshed every 60 seconds. If a new record appears in the controller,
the web page will not show it immediately as e.g. InteliConfig.

Image 6.11 Web Server - History screen

InteliLite Global Guide 150

 Web Server Adjustment
Click to the "Web Server settings" icon in the toolbar to display the settings page.
Select the controller language the web pages will appear in.
Select the rate of automatic refresh of the scada page.

Image 6.12 Web Server - Adjustment screen

6 back to Communication

6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems

6.2.1 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP 151

6 back to Communication

6.2.1 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP

MODBUS protocol is used for integration of the controller into a building management system or for remote
monitoring via 3rd party monitoring tools.
MODBUS-RTU can be used on serial interfaces (CM-RS232-485 module is required). The MODBUS-RTU
server must be activated by switching the setpoint COM1 Mode (page 282) or COM2 Mode (page 284)
into the Modbus position. The serial speed for MODBUS-RTU communication is to be adjusted by the
setpoint COM1 MODBUS Communication Speed (page 283) or COM2 MODBUS Communication
Speed (page 285).

InteliLite Global Guide 151

 MODBUS/TCP can be used on the ethernet interface (CM-Ethernet module is required). Up to 2 clients can
be connected simultaneously. The MODBUS/TCP server must be activated by the setpoint MODBUS
Server (page 299).
MODBUS, MODBUS/TCP protocol can be used simultaneously with Web connection and direct
ethernetconnection.
IMPORTANT: Do not write setpoint repeatedly(e.g. power control form a PLC repeated writing of
baseload setpoint via Modbus). The setpoints are stored in EEPROM memory. which can be
overwritten up to 105 times without risk of damage or data loss, but may become damaged, when
the allowed number of writing cycles is exceeded!

Note: Modbus-RTU serial communication mode is 8-N-1 - startbit 1, 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stopbit.

Address space
The object address space is separated into several areas as described in the table below. The actual mapping of
specific controller data objects to specific MODBUS addresses, which depends on configuration, can be
exported into a text file from the appropriate controller archive using InteliConfig. There are several special
registers with fixed meaning (reserved registers) which are listed in a separate table in this chapter.

MODBUS MODICON object

Meaning Access MODBUS function
address type
0000 .. 0999 Binary objects Read only Discrete Inputs Read: 01, 02
1000 .. 2999 Values Read only Input Registers Read: 03, 04
Read: 03, 04
3000 .. 3999 Setpoints Read/Write Holding Registers
Write: 06, 16
Reserved Read/Write, depends on Input Registers Read: 03, 04
4200 .. 7167
registers each specific register Holding Registers Write: 06, 16

Mapping data types to registers

As there are multiple data types in the controller but only one data type in MODBUS (the register, which is 2
byte long), a mapping table is necessary to compose and decompose the MODBUS messages correctly.

Number of
Data type Meaning Data maping
registers
MSB  = sign extension
Integer8 1-byte signed integer 1
LSB  = value
MSB  = 0
Unsigned8  1-byte unsigned integer 1
LSB  = value
MSB  = value, MSB
Integer16  2-byte signed integer 1
LSB  = value, LSB
MSB  = value, MSB
Unsigned16 2-byte unsigned integer 1
LSB  = value, LSB
MSB1  = value, byte 3 (MSB)
Integer32 4-byte signed integer 2
LSB1  = value, byte 2

InteliLite Global Guide 152

 Number of
Data type Meaning Data maping
registers
MSB2  = value, byte 1
LSB2 = value, byte 0 (LSB)
MSB1  = value, byte 3 (MSB)
LSB1 = value, byte 2
Unsigned32 4-byte unsigned integer 2
MSB2  = value, byte 1
LSB2  = value, byte 0 (LSB)
MSB  = 0
Binary8 8-bit binary value 1
LSB  = value, bits 0-7
MSB  = value, bits 8-15
Binary16  16-bit binary value 1
LSB = value, bits 0-7
MSB1 = value, bits 24-31
LSB1 = value, bits 16-23
Binary32 32-bit binary value 2
MSB2 = value, bits 8-15
LSB2 = value, bits 0-7
MSB = 0
Char 1-byte ASCII character 1
LSB = ASCII value of the character
MSB = 0
StrList Index into a list of strings 1
LSB = index into the list
MSB1 = ASCII value of the 1. character
LSB1 = ASCII value of the 2. character
Zero-terminated string of
ShortStr 8 MSB2 = ASCII value of the 3. character
max 15 ASCII characters.
LSB2 = ASCII value of the 4. character
…
MSB1 = ASCII value of the 1. character
LSB1 = ASCII value of the 2. character
Zero-terminated string of
LongStr 16 MSB2 = ASCII value of the 3. character
max 31 ASCII characters.
LSB2 = ASCII value of the 4. character
…

InteliLite Global Guide 153

 Number of
Data type Meaning Data maping
registers
MSB1 = BCD (dd)
LSB1 = BCD (mm)
Date Date (dd-mm-yy) 2
MSB2 = BCD (yy)
LSB2 = 0
MSB1 = BCD (hh)
LSB1 = BCD (mm)
Time Time (hh-mm-ss) 2
MSB2 = BCD (ss)
LSB2 = 0
MSB1 = reserved for future use
LSB1 = reserved for future use
MSB2 = Alarm level *)
LSB2 = Alarm status **)
Alarm An item of the Alarmlist 27 MSB3 = alarm string ***)
LSB3 = alarm string
MSB4 = alarm string
LSB5 = alarm string
…

*) 1 .. level 1 (yellow), 2 .. level 2 (red), 3 .. sensor fail

**) Bit0 – alarm is active, Bit1 – alarm is confirmed
***) String encoding is UTF-8

Error codes (exception codes)

Exception code is returned by the controller (server) if the query sent from the client could not be completed
successfuly.
The controller responds with the error codes in as follows:
01 – Ilegal function is returned if an incompatible type of operation is applied for a specific object, e.g. if
function 03 is applied to a binary object.
02 – illegal address is returned if the client tries to perform an operation with a object address that is not
related to any existing object or that is located inside an object which is composed by multiple addresses
(registers).
04 – device error is returned in all other errorneous situations. More detailed specification of the problem can
be consequently obtained by reading the registers 4205 – 4206.

Reserved registers
There are several registers with specific meaning. These registers are available in all controllers regardless of
the configuration.

InteliLite Global Guide 154

 Register Number of
Access Data type Meaning
addresses registers
4200 - 4201 2 read/write Time RTC Time in BCD code
4202 - 4203 2 read/write Date RTC Date in BCD code
Index of the language that is used for text
4204 1 read/write Unsigned8 data provided by MODBUS (e.g. alarmlist
messages).
Last application error. To be read after the
4205 - 4206 2 read Unsigned32 device returns the exception code 04. It
contains specific information about the error.
Writing:command argument
4207 - 4208 2 read/write Unsigned32
Reading: command return value
4209 1 write Unsigned16 Command code
4010 1 - - Not implemented
4211 1 write Unsigned16 Password
4212 - 4213 2 read Unsigned32 Communication status
4214 1 read Unsigned8 Number of items in the Alarmlist
4215 - 4241 27 read Alarm 1. record in alarm list
4242 - 4268 27 read Alarm 2. record in alarm list
4269 - 4295 27 read Alarm 3. record in alarm list
4296 - 4322 27 read Alarm 4. record in alarm list
4323 - 4349 27 read Alarm 5. record in alarm list
4350 - 4376 27 read Alarm 6. record in alarm list
4377 - 4403 27 read Alarm 7. record in alarm list
4404 - 4430 27 read Alarm 8. record in alarm list
4431 - 4457 27 read Alarm 9. record in alarm list
4458 - 4484 27 read Alarm 10. record in alarm list
4485 - 4511 27 read Alarm 11. record in alarm list
4512 - 4538 27 read Alarm 12. record in alarm list
4539 - 4565 27 read Alarm 13. record in alarm list
4566 - 4592 27 read Alarm 14. record in alarm list
4593 - 4619 27 read Alarm 15. record in alarm list
4620 - 4646 27 read Alarm 16. record in alarm list

List of commands and arguments

"Commands" are used to invoke a specific action in the controller via the communication channel. The list of
available actions is in the table below. The general procedure of writing a command via MODBUS is as follows:
1. (Optional) Write required level of password into the register 44212 (register address 4211). Use function 6. If
the password is required or not depends on configuration of access rules. It can be adjusted/modified by
InteliConfig.

InteliLite Global Guide 155

 2. Write the command argument into the registers 44208-44209 (register addresses 4207-4208). Use function
16.
3. Write the command code into the register 44210 (register address 4209). Use function 6.
4. (Optional) Read the command return value from the registers 44208-44209 (register addresses 4207-4208).
Use function 3.
5. If the command was executed the return value is as listed in the table. If the command was accepted but
there was an error during execution the return value indicates the reason:
a. 0x00000001 – invalid argument
b. 0x00000002 – command refused (e.g. controller not in MAN, breaker can not be closed in the specific
situation etc.)

Action Command code Argument Return value

Engine start *) 0x01 0x01FE0000 0x000001FF
Engine stop *) 0x01 0x02FD0000 0x000002FE
Fault reset *) 0x01 0x08F70000 0x000008F8
Horn reset *) 0x01 0x04FB0000 0x000004FC
GCB toggle *) 0x02 0x11EE0000 0x000011EF
GCB on 0x02 0x11EF0000 0x000011F0
GCB off 0x02 0x11F00000 0x000011F1
MCB toggle *) 0x02 0x12ED0000 0x000012EE
MCB on 0x02 0x12EE0000 0x000012EF
MCB off 0x02 0x12EF0000 0x000012F0

*) This action is an equivalent of pressing the front panel button

InteliLite Global Guide 156

 MODBUS examples
Modbus RTU examples
Reading of Battery voltage
Export table of values from InteliConfig

Table: Values
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04
Register(s) Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
Controller
01053 8213 BatteryVoltage V Integer 2 1 0 400
I/O

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 04 1D 00 01 15 3C
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
041Dhex = 1053dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 02 00 F0 B8 00
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
02hex = 2 bytes read 00F0hex = 240dec

We read value 240 from register 01053. From table of modbus registers we get dimension of read value and
"Dec". Dec=1 means shift one decimal place to the right. So battery voltage is 24.0 V.
Reading Nominal power
Export table of values from InteliConfig

Table: Values
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04
Register(s) Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
01228 9018 Nominal Power kW Integer 2 0 0 32767 Generator

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 04 CC 00 01 45 05
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
04CChex = 1228dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 02 00 C8 B9 D2
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
02hex = 2 bytes read 00C8hex = 200dec

Read nominal power is 200 kW.

InteliLite Global Guide 157

 Reading all binary inputs as modbus register

Table: Values
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04
Register(s) Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
Binary
01068 8235 Binary#2 2 0 - - Controller I/O
Inputs

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 04 2C 00 01 44 F3
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
042Chex = 1068dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 02 00 12 38 49
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
02hex = 2 bytes read 0012hex = 00010010bin

Binary inputs is 00010010. It means Binary input 2 and binary input 5 are active.
Note: You can use modbus function 4 insted of 3, rest of data remain same (CRC differs).

InteliLite Global Guide 158

 Reading binary inputs as coil status.

Table: Binaries
Allowed MODBUS functions: 01, 02
Addresses Source
C.O.# Name of Value Bit Name
Modbus Addr. = Value Bit # Group
State # Name of State Activated by protection(s):
Prot. Addr. = State
00000 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 1 GCB Feedback Controller I/O
00001 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 2 MCB Feedback Controller I/O
00002 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 3 Emergency Stop Controller I/O

We will read state of MCB Feedback binary input.

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 01 00 01 00 01 AC 0A
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
0001hex = 0001dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 01 01 01 90 48
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
01hex = 1 byte read 01hex = active

The readed data is 01, it means this binary input is active.

Note: You can use modbus function 2 insted of 1, rest of data remains same (CRC differs).

InteliLite Global Guide 159

 Starting the engine
Before starting engine you may need to write password. Depends on your settings in controller.
Table Reserved registers (page 154)

Register addresses Number of registers Access Data type Meaning

Writing:command argument
4207 - 4208 2 read/write Unsigned32
Reading: command return value
4209 1 write Unsigned16 Command code

Table List of commands and arguments (page 155)

Action Command code Argument Return value

Engine start 0x01 0x01FE0000 0x000001FF
Engine stop 0x01 0x02FD0000 0x000002FE

Request 1/2: (Numbers in Hex)

01 10 10 6F 00 03 06
Modbus function Register address
Controller address Number of registers Data length in bytes
10hex = 16dec 106Fhex = 4207dec

Request 2/2: (Numbers in Hex)

01 FE 00 00 00 01 68 0B
Argument Command code CRC

Note: Command and argument may be written as one "packet" (function 16) or you can split it and write
argument (function 16) and after that write command code (function 6).

InteliLite Global Guide 160

 Password
This password is the same as in InteliConfig or directly in controller.
Table Reserved registers (page 154)

Register addresses Number of registers Access Data type Meaning

4211 1 write Unsigned16 Password

Note: Default password is "0".

In this example the password is "1234".

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 06 10 73 04 D2 7C D1
Register address Password
Controller address Modbus function CRC
1073hex = 4211dec 04D2hex = 1234dec

Response for success: (Numbers in Hex)

01 06 10 73 00 00 7C D1
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Allways zero. CRC
1073hex = 4211dec

Response for bad password: (Numbers in Hex)

01 86 04 43 A3
Controller Modbus exception 04 – device error
CRC
address for function 6. see Error codes (exception codes) on page 154

InteliLite Global Guide 161

 Nominal Power – writing

Table: Setpoints
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04, 06, 16
Register(s) Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
Nominal Basic
03008 8276 kW Unsigned 2 0 1 5000
Power Settings

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 06 0B C0 00 64 8A 39
Register address Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
0BC0hex = 3008dec 0064hex = 100dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 06 0B C0 00 00 8B D2
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Allways zero CRC
0BC0hex = 3008dec

Writen setpoint nominal power is 100 kW.

CRC calculation
The check field allows the receiver to check the validity of the message. The check field value is the Cyclical
Redundancy Check (CRC) based on the polynomial x16+x15+x2+1. CRC is counted from all message bytes
preceding the check field.
Online CRC calculator: http://www.lammertbies.nl/comm/info/crc-calculation.html Use CRC-16 (Modbus)
Write LSB first.
For writing nominal power 100 kW the CRC is calculated from this data: 01060BC00064hex

InteliLite Global Guide 162

 Modbus TCP examples
Reading of Battery voltage
Export table of values from InteliConfig

Table: Values
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04
Register(s) Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
Controller
01053 8213 BatteryVoltage V Integer 2 1 0 400
I/O

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

00 00 00 00 00 06 01 03 04 1D 00 01
transaction protocol Length of
Controller Modbus Register address Number of
identifier identifier data bytes
address function 041Dhex = 1053dec registers
(usually 0) (usually 0) following

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

00 00 00 00 00 06 01 03 04 1D 00 01
transaction protocol Length of
Controller Modbus Register address Number of
identifier identifier data bytes
address function 041Dhex = 1053dec registers
(usually 0) (usually 0) following

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

00 00 00 00 00 05 01 03 02 00 F0
transaction protocol Length of Length of data
Controller Modbus Data
identifier identifier data bytes 02hex = 2 bytes
address function 00F0hex = 240dec
(usually 0) (usually 0) following read

We read value 240 from register 01053. From table of modbus registers we get dimension of read value and
"Dec". Dec=1 means shift one decimal place to the right. So battery voltage is 24.0 V.
6 back to Connection to 3rd party systems

InteliLite Global Guide 163

7 Technical data
Power supply Current measurement
Power supply range 8-36 VDC Measurement inputs 3ph Gen current
394 mA / 8 VDC Measurement range 5A
255 mA / 12 VDC Max. allowed
Power consumption 10 A
140 mA / 24 VDC current
97 mA / 36 VDC 1.5 % for full temperature range
Accuracy
Power terminal max. 3 A (1 % from 0 ˚C to 50 ˚C)
Fusing
E-Stop max.12 A Input impedance < 0.1 Ω
Fusing E-Stop 12 A
Binary inputs
Max. Power
3.5 W Number 7, non-isolated
Dissipation
0-2 VDC close contact
Operating conditions Close/Open indication
6-36 VDC open contact
Operating
-20 ˚C to +70 ˚C Binary outputs
temperature
5 low current output, non-
Storage temperature -30 ˚C to +80 ˚C
isolated
Protection degree 0.5 A
IP 65 Low current
(front panel) switching to positive supply
Operating humidity 95 % w/o condensation voltage, BATT+
5-25 Hz, ± 1.6 mm 2 high current output, non-
Vibration
25-100 Hz, a = 4 g isolated

a = 500 m/s2 High current 5 A (60 °C), 4 A (70 °C)

Shocks
switching to positive supply
Surrounding air temperature rating 70°C
voltage, BATT+
Suitable for pollution degree 3
Analog inputs
D+ terminal
Number 3, non-isolated
Max. output current 250 mA / 36 V
Type Resistive
Charging fail
Adjustable Resolution 0.1 Ω
threshold
Range 0-2500 Ω
Voltage measurement Input impedance 170 Ω
Measurement 3ph-n Gen voltage , 3ph-n ±2 % from value in range 0-
inputs Mains Accuracy 2500 Ω
Measurement 277 V / 480 V AC (EU) ±1.5 kΩ in range 2.5-15 kΩ
range 346 V / 600 V AC (US/Canada)
Magnetic pickup
Linear
381 V / 660 V 4 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in
measurement and
range 4 Hz to 1 kHz
protection range
6 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in
Accuracy 1% Voltage input range
range 1 kHz to 5 kHz
Frequency range 40-70 Hz (accuracy 0.1 Hz)
10 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in
Input impedance 0.72 MΩ ph-ph , 0.36 MΩ ph-n range 5 kHz to 10 kHz

Communications Frequency input range 4 Hz to 10 kHz

Frequency
USB port non-isolated
measurement 0.2 % from range 10 kHz
CAN bus, 250 kbps, max 200
tolerance
CAN 1 m, 120 Ω termination option,
non- isolated 6 back to Table of contents

InteliLite Global Guide 164

8 Appendix
8.1 Controller objects 166
8.2 Alarms 524
8.3 Modules 556

6 back to Table of contents

InteliLite Global Guide 165

8.1 Controller objects
8.1.1 Setpoints 167
8.1.2 Values 364
8.1.3 Logical binary inputs 402
8.1.4 Logical binary outputs 444
8.1.5 Logical analog inputs 489
8.1.6 PLC 514

InteliLite Global Guide 166

8.1.1 Setpoints
What setpoints are:
Setpoints are analog, binary or special data objects which are used for adjusting the controller to the specific
environment. Setpoints are organized into groups according to their meaning. Setpoints can be adjusted from
the controller front panel, PC, MODBUS, etc.
All setpoints can be protected by a password against unauthorized changes. Password protection can be
assigned to the setpoints during the configuration procedure. See the chapter Password (page 80) in Operator
guide for instructions on how to enter and modify a password.
IMPORTANT: Do not write setpoints repeatedly (e.g. power control from a PLC by repeated writing
of baseload setpoint via Modbus). The setpoints are stored in EEPROM memory, which can be
overwritten up to 105 times without risk of damage or data loss, but it may become damaged, when
the allowed number of writing cycles is exceeded.

List of setpoint groups

Group: Basic settings 172
Group: Engine settings 186
Group: Generator settings 216
Group: AMF settings 222
Group: General Analog Inputs 229
Group: Scheduler 259
Group: Plug-In Modules 268
Group: Alternate Config 268
Group: CM-RS232-485 282
Group: CM-GPRS 285
Group: CM-4G-GPS 288
Group: CM-Ethernet 291
Group: PLC 300

For full list of setpoints go to the chapter List of setpoints (page 168).

InteliLite Global Guide 167

 List of setpoints

Basic settings Idle RPM 189 ECU Coolant Temperature

Choke Function 190 Sd 208
Gen-Set Name 172
Choke Time 190 ECU Coolant Temperature
Nominal Power Split
Delay 208
Phase 172 Choke Start Temp 191
Coolant Temperature Low
Nominal Power 173 Choke Increment 192
Wrn 209
Nominal Current 173 Choke Voltage 193
Coolant Temperature Low
CT Ratio 174 Choke Lead 194
Delay 209
CT Location 174 Fuel Solenoid Lead 195
Fuel Level Wrn 209
Connection type 175 Idle Time 195
Fuel Level Sd 210
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 177 Minimal Stabilization Time 197
Fuel Level Delay 210
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 177 Maximal Stabilization
ECU Fuel Level Wrn 210
PT Ratio 177 Time 198
ECU Fuel Level Sd 211
Vm PT Ratio 178 Protection Hold Off 198
ECU Fuel Level Delay 211
Nominal Frequency 178 Cooling Speed 199
Maintenance Timer 1 211
Gear Teeth 179 Cooling Time 199
Maintenance Timer 2 212
Nominal RPM 179 Stop Time 199
Maintenance Timer 3 212
Controller mode 180 After Cooling Time 201
Battery Undervoltage 212
Power On Mode 180 D+ Function 201
Battery Overvoltage 213
Operation Mode 181 D+ Treshold 202
Battery <> Voltage Delay 213
Controller Address 181 D+ Delay 203
Battery Charger Fail Delay 213
Reset To Manual 182 D+ Alarm Type 203
Conversion Coefficient
Backlight Timeout 182 Overspeed Sd 203
Pulse 1 214
Horn Timeout 183 Underspeed Sd 204
Conversion Coefficient
Zero Power Mode 183 Overspeed Overshot 204 Pulse 2 214
RunHoursSource 184 Overspeed Overshot Ventilation Pulse Time 215
Period 204
Screen Filter 185 ECU Speed Adjustment 215
Oil Pressure Wrn 205
Main Screen Line 1 186
Oil Pressure Sd 205 Generator settings
Main Screen Line 2 186
Oil Pressure Delay 205 Overload BOC 216
Engine settings ECU Oil Pressure Wrn 206 Overload Wrn 216
ECU Oil Pressure Sd 206 Overload Delay 216
Cranking Attempts 186
ECU Oil Pressure Delay 206 Short Circuit BOC 217
Maximum Cranking Time 187
Coolant Temperature Wrn 207 Short Circuit BOC Delay 217
Cranking Fail Pause 187
Coolant Temperature Sd 207 Generator Overvoltage Sd 217
Prestart Time 188
Coolant Temperature Generator Overvoltage
Starting RPM 188
Delay 207 Wrn 218
Starting Oil Pressure 189
ECU Coolant Temperature Generator Undervoltage
Glow Plugs Time 189
Wrn 208 BOC 218

InteliLite Global Guide 168

 Generator Undervoltage Analog Protection 4 Wrn 234 Analog Protection 15
Wrn 219 Analog Protection 4 Sd 234 Delay 251
Generator <> Voltage Analog Protection 4 Delay 235 Analog Protection 16 Wrn 252
Delay 219 Analog Protection 16 Sd 252
Analog Protection 5 Wrn 235
Generator Overfrequency Analog Protection 16
Analog Protection 5 Sd 236
BOC 219 Delay 253
Analog Protection 5 Delay 236
Generator Overfrequency Analog Protection 17 Wrn 253
Analog Protection 6 Wrn 237
Wrn 220
Analog Protection 17 Sd 254
Analog Protection 6 Sd 237
Generator Underfrequency
Analog Protection 17
BOC 220 Analog Protection 6 Delay 238
Delay 254
Generator Underfrequency Analog Protection 7 Wrn 238
Analog Protection 18 Wrn 255
Wrn 220 Analog Protection 7 Sd 239
Analog Protection 18 Sd 255
Generator <> Frequency Analog Protection 7 Delay 239
Analog Protection 18
Delay 221 Analog Protection 8 Wrn 240
Delay 256
Analog Protection 8 Sd 240
Analog Protection 19 Wrn 256
AMF settings
Analog Protection 8 Delay 241
Analog Protection 19 Sd 257
Emergency Start Delay 222 Analog Protection 9 Wrn 241
Analog Protection 19
Mains Return Delay 222 Analog Protection 9 Sd 242 Delay 257
Transfer Delay 223 Analog Protection 9 Delay 242 Analog Protection 20 Wrn 258
MCB Close Delay 224 Analog Protection 10 Wrn 243 Analog Protection 20 Sd 258
Mains Overvoltage 224 Analog Protection 10 Sd 243 Analog Protection 20
Mains Undervoltage 225 Analog Protection 10 Delay 259
Mains < > Voltage Delay 225 Delay 244
Mains Overfrequency 225 Analog Protection 11 Wrn 244 Scheduler
Mains Underfrequency 226 Analog Protection 11 Sd 245 Time 259
Mains < > Frequency Analog Protection 11 Date 259
Delay 226 Delay 245 Time Stamp Period 260
Return From Island 227 Analog Protection 12 Wrn 246 #Summer Time Mode 260
MCB Logic 227 Analog Protection 12 Sd 246 Timer 1 Function 261
MCB Opens On 229 Analog Protection 12 Timer 1 Setup 262
Delay 247
Timer 1 Repetition 262
General Analog Inputs Analog Protection 13 Wrn 247
Timer 1 First Occur. Date 263
Analog Protection 1 Wrn 229 Analog Protection 13 Sd 248
Timer 1 First Occur. Time 263
Analog Protection 1 Sd 230 Analog Protection 13
Timer 1 Duration 263
Analog Protection 1 Delay 230 Delay 248
Timer 1 Repeated 264
Analog Protection 2 Wrn 231 Analog Protection 14 Wrn 249
Timer 1 Refresh Period 265
Analog Protection 2 Sd 231 Analog Protection 14 Sd 249
Timer 1 Weekends 266
Analog Protection 2 Delay 232 Analog Protection 14
Delay 250 Timer 1 Day 266
Analog Protection 3 Wrn 232
Analog Protection 15 Wrn 250 Timer 1 Repeat Day 267
Analog Protection 3 Sd 233
Analog Protection 15 Sd 251 Timer 1 Repeated Day In
Analog Protection 3 Delay 233 Week 267

InteliLite Global Guide 169

 Timer 1 Repeat Day In Communication Gateway IP 297
Month 267 DNS IP Address 1 298
Modules
Timer 1 Repeat Week In DNS IP Address 2 298
COM1 Mode 282
Month 268
COM1 Communication MODBUS Server 299
Speed 283 Web Interface 299
Plug-In Modules
COM1 MODBUS
Slot A 268 PLC
Communication Speed 283
COM2 Mode 284 PLC Setpoint 1 300
Alternate Config
COM2 Communication PLC Setpoint 2 301
Connection Type 1 268 Speed 284 PLC Setpoint 3 302
Nominal Current 1 270 COM2 MODBUS PLC Setpoint 4 303
Nominal Frequency 1 270 Communication Speed 285
PLC Setpoint 5 304
Nominal RPM 1 271 Message Language 285
PLC Setpoint 6 305
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1 271 Time Zone 286
PLC Setpoint 7 306
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1 271 Event Message 286
PLC Setpoint 8 307
Nominal Power 1 272 Wrn Message 287
PLC Setpoint 9 308
Nominal Power Split BOC Message 287
PLC Setpoint 10 309
Phase 1 272 Sd Messages 287
PLC Setpoint 11 310
Connection type 2 272 Telephone Number 1 288
PLC Setpoint 12 311
Nominal Current 2 274 Message Language 288
PLC Setpoint 13 312
Nominal Frequency 2 274 Time Zone 289
PLC Setpoint 14 313
Nominal RPM 2 275 Event Message 289
PLC Setpoint 15 314
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 275 Wrn Message 290
PLC Setpoint 16 315
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 275 BOC Message 290
PLC Setpoint 17 316
Nominal Power 2 276 Sd Messages 290
PLC Setpoint 18 317
Nominal Power Split Telephone Number 1 291
Phase 2 276 PLC Setpoint 19 318
Email Address 1 291
Connection type 3 276 PLC Setpoint 20 319
Message Language 292
Nominal Current 3 278 PLC Setpoint 21 320
Time Zone 292
Nominal Frequency 3 278 PLC Setpoint 22 321
Event Message 293
Nominal RPM 3 279 PLC Setpoint 23 322
Wrn Message 293
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 279 PLC Setpoint 24 323
BOC Message 293
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 279 PLC Setpoint 25 324
Sd Messages 294
Nominal Power 3 280 PLC Setpoint 26 325
SMTP UserName 294
Nominal Power Split PLC Setpoint 27 326
SMTP User Password 294
Phase 3 280 PLC Setpoint 28 327
SMTP Server Address 295
ECU Speed Adjustment 1 281 PLC Setpoint 29 328
SMTP Sender Address 295
ECU Speed Adjustment 2 281 PLC Setpoint 30 329
IP Address Mode 296
ECU Speed Adjustment 3 282 PLC Setpoint 31 330
IP Address 296
PLC Setpoint 32 331
Subnet Mask 297
PLC Setpoint 33 332

InteliLite Global Guide 170

 PLC Setpoint 34 333
PLC Setpoint 35 334
PLC Setpoint 36 335
PLC Setpoint 37 336
PLC Setpoint 38 337
PLC Setpoint 39 338
PLC Setpoint 40 339
PLC Setpoint 41 340
PLC Setpoint 42 341
PLC Setpoint 43 342
PLC Setpoint 44 343
PLC Setpoint 45 344
PLC Setpoint 46 345
PLC Setpoint 47 346
PLC Setpoint 48 347
PLC Setpoint 49 348
PLC Setpoint 50 349
PLC Setpoint 51 350
PLC Setpoint 52 351
PLC Setpoint 53 352
PLC Setpoint 54 353
PLC Setpoint 55 354
PLC Setpoint 56 355
PLC Setpoint 57 356
PLC Setpoint 58 357
PLC Setpoint 59 358
PLC Setpoint 60 359
PLC Setpoint 61 360
PLC Setpoint 62 361
PLC Setpoint 63 362
PLC Setpoint 64 363

InteliLite Global Guide 171

 Group: Basic settings
Subgroup: Name

Gen-Set Name
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 15 characters [-]
Default value InteliLite Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8637 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User defined name, used for the controller identification at remote phone or mobile connection. Gen-Set
Name is maximally 15 characters long and can be entered using InteliConfig or from controller’s
configuration menu.
Note: If the Gen-Set Name is "TurboRunHours", the running hours will be counted faster - 1 minute in
real will represent 1 hour.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Power settings

Nominal Power Split Phase

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config Yes
Step 1 kW
Comm object 9977 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 175)
Description
Nominal power of the gen-set for detected split-phase or mono phase connection. Generator Overload BOC
(page 216) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 175) is adjusted to Autodetect and
Autodetect detects connection type as Monophase or SplitPhase.

Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Power Split Phase
1 (page 272), Nominal Power Split Phase 2 (page 276) and Nominal Power Split Phase 3 (page
280).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 172

 Nominal Power
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config Yes
Step 1 kW
Comm object 8276 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal power of the gen-set. Generator Overload BOC (page 216) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 175) is adjusted to 3Ph3Wire or High
Leg D or 3Ph4Wire or when Autodetect detects connection type as 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or
3Ph4Wire.

Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Power 1 (page 272),
Nominal Power 2 (page 276) and Nominal Power 3 (page 280).

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Current settings

Nominal Current
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Comm object 8275 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 175).
Description
It is current limit for mains current protections and means maximal continuous mains current. Nominal
Current can be different from mains rated current value.
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Current 1 (page
270), Nominal Current 2 (page 274) and Nominal Current 3 (page 278).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 173

 CT Ratio
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [A/5A]
Default value 2 000 A/5A Alternative config NO
Step 1 A/5A
Comm object 8274 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Gen-set current transformers ratio.
Note: Generator currents and power measurement is suppressed if current level is below 1% of CT
range.

6 back to List of setpoints

CT Location
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Load / GenSet/ None [-]
Default value Gen-set Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 11625 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Adjustment of location of current measurement.
Load: Current CT´s are physically placed on Load (typically between GCB and MCB)
GenSet: Current CT´s are physically placed on GenSet (typically before GCB)
None: There are no current CT´s.
When option None is selected, following objects are hidded/changed:
Current screen is hidden
Generator Power screen is hidden
Statistics screens - values Genset kWh, Genset kVArh, Mains kWh and Mains kWArh are hidden
Mains screen - kW meter is replaced by generator voltage meter
Generator L1-N voltage is displayed for Monopahse, Splitphase L1L2, Splitphase L1L3 and High
Leg delta connection types
Generator L1-L2 voltage is displayed for 3ph3w and 3ph4w connection types
Group Load is hidden
Group Statistics - values Genset kWh, Genset kVArh, Mains kWh and Mains kWArh are hidden

Note: For more details about this function see chapter CT Location (page 27).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 174

 Subgroup: Voltage settings

Connection type
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Mono Phase / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3 / 3Ph3Wire / 3Ph4Wire / High Leg D /
Range [units]
Autodetect [-]
Default value 3Ph4Wire Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 11628 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Connection type:

Mono Phase Single phase voltage measurement L1-N

1x CT (Current Transformer)
SplitPhase Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L2 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L3 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L3 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph4Wire Grounded Star (Grounded Wye) connection – 3PY
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
3x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph3Wire Ungrounded Delta connection
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye
Corner-Grounded Delta
Split Phase Delta
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
No neutral is available 3x CT (Current Transformer)
High Leg D High Leg Delta connection
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3

InteliLite Global Guide 175

 3x CT (Current Transformer)
Autodetect High Leg Delta
L1 >=100V; L1 <=160V
L2 >=160V
or
L3 >=100V; L3 <=160V

3PH3Wire or 3Ph4Wire
L1 >= 100V
L2 >= 100V
or
L3 >= 100V

3PH Low Y L1 >=20V; L1 <=160V

L2 >=20V; L2 <=160V
or L3 >=20V; L3 <=160V
L1L2 < 300V
L2L3 < 300V
L3L1 < 300V
3PH High Y L1 > 160V
L2 > 160V
or L3 > 160V
L1L2 >= 300V
L2L3 >= 300V
L3L1 >= 300V
SplPhL1L2
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 <= 20V

SplPhL1L3
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 >=100V

Mono Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 <= 20V

Voltage Autodetect shutdown

Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Connection Type 1 (page
268), Connection type 2 (page 272) and Connection type 3 (page 276).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 176

 Nominal Voltage Ph-N
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 231 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 8277 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 175).
Description
Nominal voltage (phase to neutral).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1
(page 271), Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 (page 275) and Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 (page 279).

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 80 .. 40 000 [V]
Default value 400 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 11657 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 175).
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to phase).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1
(page 271), Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 (page 275) and Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 (page 279).

6 back to List of setpoints

PT Ratio
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0,1 .. 500,0 [V/V]
Default value 1,0 V/V Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 V/V
Comm object 9579 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Generator voltage potential transformers ratio. If no PTs are used, adjust the setpoint to 1.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 177

 Vm PT Ratio
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0,1 .. 500,0 [V/V]
Default value 1,0 V/V Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 V/V
Comm object 9580 Related applications AMF
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Operation Mode (page 181)
Description
Mains voltage potential transformers ratio. If no PTs are used, adjust the setpoint to 1.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Frequency settings

Nominal Frequency
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 45 .. 65 [Hz]
Default value 50 Hz Alternative config YES
Step 1 Hz
Comm object 8278 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal system frequency (usually 50 or 60 Hz).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Frequency 1 (page
270), Nominal Frequency 2 (page 274) and Nominal Frequency 3 (page 278).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 178

 Gear Teeth
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] FGen->RPM / 1 .. 500 [-]
Default value 120 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 8252 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Number of teeth on the engine flywheel where the pick-up is installed. Set to zero if no pick-up is used and
the Engine speed will be counted from the generator frequency.
Note: If no pickup is used, the D+ or W terminal should be used to prevent possible overcranking, which
can occur if at least 25% of nominal generator voltage is not present immediately after exceeding firing
speed.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal RPM
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 100 .. 4 000 [RPM]
Default value 1 500 RPM Alternative config YES
Step 1 RPM
Comm object 8253 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal engine speed (RPM - revolutions per minute).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal RPM 1 (page 271),
Nominal RPM 2 (page 275) and Nominal RPM 3 (page 279).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 179

 Subgroup: Controller settings

Controller mode
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST [-]
Default value OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8315 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint can be used for changing the Controller mode remotely, e.g. via MODBUS. Use the mode
selector on the main screen for changing the mode from the front panel. Use mode selector in the control
window for changing the mode from InteliConfig.

6 back to List of setpoints

Power On Mode
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Previous / OFF [-]
Default value Previous Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 13000 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts controller mode after power on of controller.

Previous When controller is power on, than is switched into last mode before power off.
OFF When controller is power on, than is switched into OFF mode.

Note: Remote modes - In case that some LBI remote mode is activated during power on of controller
than this LBI has higher priority than this setpoint - controller mode is forced into mode selected via LBI.
After deactivation of LBI, controller is switched into value selected via setpoint Power On Mode

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 180

 Operation Mode
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] AMF / MRS [-]
Default value AMF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 12157 Related applications AMF
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Based on this setpoint is defined basic controller function.

AMF Normal AMF operation

MRS When MRS mode is selected the controller will not perform AMF functions anymore. MCB
button will be inactive and also mains measurement and protections will be disabled.
The controller will keep TEST mode and the gen-set in AUTO mode will be able to start by
REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 442) binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

Controller Address
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1 .. 32 [-]
Default value 1 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 24537 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Controller identification number. It is possible to set controller address different from the default value (1) so
that more IL controllers can be interconnected (via RS485) and accessed e.g. from MODBUS terminal.
Note: When opening connection to the controller it's address has to correspond with the setting in PC
tool.

Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 181

 Reset To Manual
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 9983 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
If this function is enabled, the controller will switch automatically to MAN mode when there is a red alarm in
the alarm list and fault reset button is pressed. This is a safety function that prevents the gen-set starting
again automatically in specific cases when fault reset button is pressed.
Example: Controller is in AUTO mode and there is red inactive unconfirmed alarm and fault reset
button is pressed, controller will start automatically.

6 back to List of setpoints

Backlight Timeout
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 255 [min]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 10121 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
The display backlight is switched off when this timer exceed. When setpoint is adjusted to disabled then the
display will be backlighted all the time.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 182

 Horn Timeout
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 599 [s]
Default value 10 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8264 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Setting of horn behavior.
Disabled Disabling the Horn sounding function
Timeout for HORN (PAGE 472) binary output. The HORN (PAGE 472) output is opened when
1 .. 599 [s]
this timeout elapsed.

Note: Horn timeout starts again from the beginning if a new alarm appears before previous Horn timeout
has elapsed.

6 back to List of setpoints

Zero Power Mode

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Disabled / 1 - 360 [min]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 8548 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Operation Mode (page 181)
Description
The controller is switched to Zero Power Mode when there is no user interaction with the controller for the
preset time period. Zero Power Mode is disabled in AMF automatic mode. For the controller wake up press
button Start or activate Binary Input 1. The controller will not switch to Zero Power Mode if generator is
running. In Zero Power Mode binary outputs go to high impedance.
Note: Power consumption of controller in Zero Power Mode is 0 mA. Controller is internally
disconnected from power supply.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 183

 RunHoursSource
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] AUTO/ECU/INTERNAL [-]
Default value AUTO Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 13345 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint selects source of running hours

AUTO If there is some ECU which send valid running hours, then this value is used.
Otherwise value from internal counter is used.
ECU Running hours are taken from ECU if ECU send valid data. It is not possible to set
and reset this value in statistics.
INTERNAL Running hours are taken from internal counter. It is possible to set and reset this value
in statistics.

Note: It is not necessary to restart controller when this setpoint is changed. Change of this setpoint
should be applied immediately.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 184

 Screen Filter
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Enable/Disabled [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15889 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables/disables filter values on CU screen and PC tools.
List of values which are filtered when filter is ON.
Generator Voltage L1-L2
Generator Voltage L2-L3
Generator Voltage L3-L1
Generator Voltage L1-N
Generator Voltage L2-N
Generator Voltage L3-N
Generator Frequency
Load kVA
Load kVA L1
Load kVA L2
Load kVA L3
Load kVAr
Load kVAr L1
Load kVAr L2
Load kVAr L3
Load kW
Load kW L1
Load kW L2
Load kW L3

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 185

 Subgroup: HMI Settings

Main Screen Line 1

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] RPM/PF/Run Hours/ATT/AIN1 [-]
Default value PF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 13346 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts line 1 on Mains screen.

6 back to List of setpoints

Main Screen Line 2

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] RPM/PF/Run Hours/ATT/AIN1 [-]
Default value RPM Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 14628 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts line 2 on Mains screen.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Engine settings

Subgroup: Starting

Cranking Attempts
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1 .. 10 [-]
Default value 3 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 8255 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maximal number of cranking attempts.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 186

 Maximum Cranking Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1 .. 255 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8256 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maximum time limit of cranking time.
IMPORTANT: There is a protection against broken pinion on starter. In case that there are no
RPM after 5 seconds of starting, cranking is interrupted and cranking fail pause follows.

6 back to List of setpoints

Cranking Fail Pause

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 5 .. 60 [s]
Default value 8s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8257 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Pause between Cranking Attempts (page 186). PRESTART (PAGE 481) output is active in this pause until
Cranking Fail Pause elapses.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 187

 Prestart Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 2s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8394 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Time of closing of the PRESTART (PAGE 481) output prior to the engine start. Set to zero if you want to leave
the output PRESTART (PAGE 481) open.

Image 8.1 Prestart Time

6 back to List of setpoints

Starting RPM
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 5 .. 50 [%]
Default value 25% Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal RPM (page 179)
Comm object 8254 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines the “firing” speed level as percent value of the Nominal RPM (page 179). If this level
is exceeded the engine is considered as started.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 188

 Starting Oil Pressure
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Disabled / 0,1 .. 10,0 [bar]
Default value 4,5 bar Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 bar
Comm object 9681 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Oil pressure limit for starting. The controller will stop cranking (STARTER (PAGE 484) goes OFF) if the oil
pressure rises above this limit.
Option Disabled - when this option is selected, Oil Pressure value (value from CU analog Oil Pressure, value
from ECU analog Oil pressure and state of binary input Oil Pressure) is not used for disengagement of starter
and for engine running evaluation.
IMPORTANT: Value from analog input has higher priority than value from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

Glow Plugs Time

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. Prestart Time (page 188) [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14412 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines the time before starting when logical binary output GLOW PLUGS (PAGE 470) will be
close.

6 back to List of setpoints

Idle RPM
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 100 .. 4000 [RPM]
Default value 900 RPM Alternative config NO
Step 1 RPM
Comm object 9946 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts idle speed of engine.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 189

 Subgroup: Choke

Choke Function
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Disabled /Fixed Time / Temp Based [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15717 Related applications MRS. AMF
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only when LBO CHOKE (PAGE 460) is configured.
Description
This setpoint defines choke function behavior.
Disabled Choke function is disabled and logical binary output CHOKE (PAGE 460) is activated
under no circumstances.
Fixed Time Choke time is fixedly defined by Choke Time (page 190) setpoint.
Temp Based Choke time is calculated using actual engine (coolant) temperature. Setpoints Choke
Start Temp (page 191) and Choke Increment (page 192) are taken into
consideration.

6 back to List of setpoints

Choke Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0–3600 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 13011 Related applications MRS. AMF
Config level Advanced
Only when LBO CHOKE (PAGE 460) is configured and setpoint Choke Function (page
Setpoint visibility
190) = Fixed Time.
Description
Defines time logical binary output CHOKE (PAGE 460) is activated for when fixed time is used. When setpoint
Choke Function (page 190) is set to Temp Based value, Choke Time value have no effect.
Note: If setpoint Choke Lead (page 194) is set to nonzero value, total time the CHOKE output is
activated still matches value set by Choke Time setpoint. This mean Choke Timeshould be longer than
Choke Leadto ensure expected Choke behavior.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 190

 Choke Start Temp
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] -20,0 .. 80,0 [°C]
Default value 0,0 °C Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 °C
Comm object 15716 Related applications MRS. AMF
Config level Advanced
Only when LBO CHOKE (PAGE 460) is configured and setpoint Choke Function (page
Setpoint visibility
190) = Temp Based.
Description
This setpoint adjust the base temperature for Choke function. When temperature will be higher than this
setpoint, Choke Time will be always 0. When temperature will be lower than this setpoint, Choke Time will
be calculated by curve adjusted via setpoint Choke Increment (page 192). When setpoint Choke
Function (page 190) is set to Fixed Time value, setpoint Choke Start Temp has no effect.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 191

 Choke Increment
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0,00 .. 20,00 [s/°C]
Default value 0,00 s/°C Alternative config NO
Step 0,01 s/°C
Comm object 15715 Related applications MRS. AMF
Config level Advanced
Only when LBO CHOKE (PAGE 460) is configured and setpoint Choke Function
Setpoint visibility
(page 190) = Temp Based.
Description
This setpoint adjust the maximal time of activation of binary output CHOKE (PAGE 460). Calculated time
depends on engine (coolant) temperature. Setpoint adjust curve which is used for calculating actual Choke
Time. When setpoint Choke Function (page 190) is set to Fixed Time value, setpoint Choke Increment has
no effect.

Note: If setpoint Choke Lead (page 194) is set to nonzero value, total time the CHOKE output is
activated still matches calculated value (based on actual temperature and setpoints Choke Increment
and Choke Start Temp (page 191)) This mean that adjusted parameters should ensure that calculated
Choke Time will be longer than Choke Leadto ensure expected Choke behavior.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 192

 Choke Voltage
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Disabled / 1–100 [%]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 15718 Related applications MRS. AMF
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only when LBO CHOKE (PAGE 460) is configured.
Description
This setpoint adjust threshold level for deactivation of CHOKE (PAGE 460) binary output. When generator
voltage is higher than this level, then logical binary output CHOKE is deactivated. In multiphase system it is
sufficient to deactivate CHOKE LBO when at least one voltage crosses this threshold. In case setpoint
Choke Voltage is set to Disabled value, no voltage is taken into account and CHOKE LBO isn't deactivated
on the voltage basis.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 193

 Choke Lead
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. Prestart Time [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 15774 Related applications MRS. AMF
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only when LBO CHOKE (PAGE 460) is configured.
Description
This setpoint adjust the lead of logical binary output CHOKE. CHOKE (PAGE 460) is activated before logical
binary output STARTER (PAGE 484).
Note: In case Choke Lead is longer than 8 s (cranking fail pause), Choke Lead will be limited to 8 s
(cranking fail pause time). This limitation is applied only for cranking fail pause, Choke Lead in Prestart
stays unchanged.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 194

 Subgroup: Starting Timers

Fuel Solenoid Lead

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 25,0 [s]
Default value 0,5 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 10525 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay between FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 464) and STARTER (PAGE 484) logical binary outputs.FUEL SOLENOID
(PAGE 464) is closed before STARTER (PAGE 484). Lead time is adjusted via this setpoint.

Image 8.2 Fuel Solenoid Lead

Note: LBO PRESTART (PAGE 481) goes to logical zero when Fuel Solenoid Lead goes to logical one.

6 back to List of setpoints

Idle Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 12 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9097 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Idle Time delay starts when RPM exceeds Starting RPM (page 188). Start fail is detected when during Idle
state RPM decreases below 2 RPM.
The output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 473) remains inactive during the idle period. Binary output Idle/Nominal
opens during Cooling period again. This output can be used for switching the governor between idle and
nominal speed.

InteliLite Global Guide 195

 Image 8.3 Idle Time 1

Image 8.4 Idle Time 2

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 196

 Minimal Stabilization Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1 .. Maximal Stabilization Time (page 198) [s]
Default value 2s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8259 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
When the gen-set has been started and the idle timer has elapsed, the controller will wait for a period
adjusted by this setpoint before closing GCB, even if the generator voltage and frequency are already in
limits.

Image 8.5 Minimal Stabilization Time

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 197

 Maximal Stabilization Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Minimal Stabilization Time (page 197) .. 300 [s]
Default value 10 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8313 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
When the gen-set has been started and the idle timer has elapsed, the generator voltage and frequency must
get within limits within this period of time, otherwise an appropriate shutdown alarm (generator voltage and/or
frequency) is issued.

Image 8.6 Maximal Stabilization Time

6 back to List of setpoints

Protection Hold Off

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 300,0 [s]
Default value 5,0 s Alternative config YES
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 10023 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
During the start of the gen-set, some engine protections have to be blocked (e.g. Oil pressure). The
protections are unblocked after the Protect Hold Off. The time starts after reaching Starting RPM.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 198

 Subgroup: Stopping

Cooling Speed
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Idle / Nominal [-]
Default value Nominal Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10046 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Selects the function of the binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 473) during engine cooling state.
Idle Cooling is executed at Idle speed and generator protections are switched off.
Nominal Cooling is executed at Nominal speed and generator protections are active.

Note: When ECU is connected the predefined value 900 RPM for Idle speed is requested.

Note: Binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 473) must be configured and connected to speed governor.
Engine Idle speed must be adjusted on speed governor.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Stopping Timers

Cooling Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Default value 30 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8258 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Runtime of the unloaded gen-set to cool the engine before stop.

6 back to List of setpoints

Stop Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 60 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9815 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always

InteliLite Global Guide 199

 Description
Under normal conditions the engine must certainly stop within this period after the FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE
464) has been de-energized and the STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 485) energized. The Stop Solenoid output is
deactivated 12 s after last running engine indication went off.

Image 8.7 Stop Time 1

Image 8.8 Stop Time 2

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 200

 After Cooling Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Default value 180 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8662 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Runtime of engine after cooling pump. Binary output Cooling pump is closed when the engine starts and
opens AfterCool time delayed after gen-set stops.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: D+ Function

D+ Function
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Enabled / ChargeFail / Disabled [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 9683 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Behavior of D+ terminal.

Enabled The D+ terminal is used for both functions – “running engine” detection and
charge fail detection.
ChargeFail The D+ terminal is used for charge fail detection only
Disabled The D+ terminal is not used.

InteliLite Global Guide 201

 Image 8.9 D+ Function 1

Image 8.10 D+ Function 2

6 back to List of setpoints

D+ Treshold
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0..100 [%]
Default value 80 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 14959 Related applications MRS. AMF
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if setpoint D+ Function (page 201) is not set to Disabled value.
Description
This setpoint adjusts threshold level for D+ function.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 202

 D+ Delay
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1..255 [s]
Default value 1s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14960 Related applications MRS. AMF
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if setpoint D+ Function (page 201) is not set to Disabled value.
Description
This setpoint adjusts delay for D+ function. This delay is used for:
Alarm Charging Alternator Fail.
For engine running condition - disengagement of starter

6 back to List of setpoints

D+ Alarm Type
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] No Protec/Wrn/Sd [-]
Default value Wrn Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15751 Related applications MRS. AMF
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if setpoint D+ Function (page 201) is not set to Disabled value.
Description
This setpoint adjusts type of alarm Charging Alternator Fail.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Engine Protections

Overspeed Sd
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Underspeed Sd (page 204) .. 200 [%]
Default value 115% Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal RPM (page 179)
Comm object 8263 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for over speed protection. Relative to the nominal speed.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 203

 Underspeed Sd
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. Overspeed Sd (page 203) [%]
Default value 25% Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal RPM (page 179)
Comm object 8260 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for underspeed protection. Relative to the nominal speed.

6 back to List of setpoints

Overspeed Overshot
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 50 [%]
Default value 20% Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal RPM (page 179)
Comm object 14107 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint rise the upper limit of overspeed protection for the time which is defined in setpoint Overspeed
Overshot Period (page 204). In this time the upper limit of protection is Overspeed Sd (page 203) +
Overspeed Overshoot.

6 back to List of setpoints

Overspeed Overshot Period

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 255 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14108 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Overspeed Overshot (page 204)
Description
Time for which is Overspeed Overshot (page 204) active. The timer starts in the same time when starter
starts.
Note: The setpoint is visible only, if Overspeed Overshot (page 204) is greater than 0.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 204

 Oil Pressure Wrn
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 12895 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 514) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 514).

6 back to List of setpoints

Oil Pressure Sd
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 12779 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 514) is configured
Description
Shutdown threshold level for OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 514).

6 back to List of setpoints

Oil Pressure Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 3s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14341 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical analog input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 514) is configured or
Setpoint visibility
logical binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 439) is configured
Description
Delay for OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 514).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 205

 ECU Oil Pressure Wrn
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by ECU sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config YES
ECU sensor curve
Step the step is defined by ECU sensor curve
Comm object 14426 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Warning threshold level for Oil pressure which is send from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

ECU Oil Pressure Sd

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by ECU sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
ECU sensor curve
Step the step is defined by ECU sensor curve
Comm object 14425 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Shutdown threshold level for Oil pressure which is send from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

ECU Oil Pressure Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 3s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14427 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Delay for Oil pressure which is send from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 206

 Coolant Temperature Wrn
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 12896 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 511) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 511).

6 back to List of setpoints

Coolant Temperature Sd
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 12780 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 511) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 511).

6 back to List of setpoints

Coolant Temperature Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14342 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical analog input COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 511) is configured or
Setpoint visibility
logical binary input COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 430) is configured
Description
Delay for COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 511).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 207

 ECU Coolant Temperature Wrn
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by ECU sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
ECU sensor curve
Step the step is defined by ECU sensor curve
Comm object 14429 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Warning threshold level for Coolant temperature which is send from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

ECU Coolant Temperature Sd

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by ECU sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
ECU sensor curve
Step the step is defined by ECU sensor curve
Comm object 14428 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for Coolant temperature which is send from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

ECU Coolant Temperature Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14430 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Delay for Coolant temperature which is send from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 208

 Coolant Temperature Low Wrn
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config YES
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9684 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 511) is configured
Description
Threshold level for lower limit of COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 511).

6 back to List of setpoints

Coolant Temperature Low Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config YES
Step 1s
Comm object 10270 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 511) is configured
Description
Delay for Coolant Temperature Low Wrn (page 209).

6 back to List of setpoints

Fuel Level Wrn

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 12897 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 512) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 512).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 209

 Fuel Level Sd
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 12898 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 512) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 512).

6 back to List of setpoints

Fuel Level Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 10 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14343 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Visible only if the logical analog input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 512) is configured or logical
Setpoint visibility
binary input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 433) is configured
Description
Delay for FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 512).

6 back to List of setpoints

ECU Fuel Level Wrn

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by ECU sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
ECU sensor curve
Step the step is defined by ECU sensor curve
Comm object 14432 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Warning threshold level for Fuel level which is send from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 210

 ECU Fuel Level Sd
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by ECU sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
ECU sensor curve
Step the step is defined by ECU sensor curve
Comm object 14431 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for Fuel level which is send from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

ECU Fuel Level Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 10 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14433 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configuredd
Description
Delay for Fuel level which is send from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Maintenance

Maintenance Timer 1
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] -10 000 ... 9 999 [h] / Disabled
Default value 1 000 h Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 11616 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maintenance timer 1 counts down when engine is running. If reaches zero, an alarm appears, but the timer
still counting down into negative values. When the value 10000 is set, than the Maintenance function is
disabled and counter does not count. Counter value disappear from controllers statistics.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 211

 Maintenance Timer 2
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] -10 000 ... 9 999 [h] / Disabled
Default value 1 000 h Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 11617 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maintenance timer 2 counts down when engine is running. If reaches zero, an alarm appears, but the timer
still counting down into negative values. When the value 10000 is set, than the Maintenance function is
disabled and counter does not count. Counter value disappear from controllers statistics.

6 back to List of setpoints

Maintenance Timer 3
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] -10 000 ... 9 999 [h] / Disabled
Default value 1 000 h Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 11618 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maintenance timer 3 counts down when engine is running. If reaches zero, an alarm appears, but the timer
still counting down into negative values. When the value 10000 is set, than the Maintenance function is
disabled and counter does not count. Counter value disappear from controllers statistics.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Battery Protections

Battery Undervoltage
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 8,0 V .. Battery Overvoltage (page 213) [V]
Default value 18,0 V Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 V
Comm object 8387 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning threshold for low battery voltage.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 212

 Battery Overvoltage
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Battery Undervoltage (page 212) .. 40,0 [V]
Default value 36,0 V Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 V
Comm object 9587 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning threshold for high battery voltage.

6 back to List of setpoints

Battery <> Voltage Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8383 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Battery Undervoltage (page 212) and Battery Overvoltage (page 213) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

Battery Charger Fail Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 15 [min]
Default value 5 min Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 11374 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned with LBI BATTERY CHARGER (PAGE 405)
Description
Delay for LBI BATTERY CHARGER (PAGE 405).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 213

 Subgroup: Pulse Counters

Conversion Coefficient Pulse 1

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 ... 1 000 [-]
Default value 1 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 10994 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if LBI PULSE COUNTER 1 (PAGE 439) is configured
Description
This setpoint adjusts the rate of increasing of the Pulse Counter 1 function. The module counts pulses at the
input PULSE COUNTER 1 (PAGE 439) and if the input pulses counter reaches value given by this setpoint, the
counter value Pulse Counter 1 (page 384) is increased by 1 and input pulses counter is reset to 0. Both
counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.

6 back to List of setpoints

Conversion Coefficient Pulse 2

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 ... 1 000 [-]
Default value 1 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 10995 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if LBI PULSE COUNTER 2 (PAGE 440) is configured
Description
This setpoint adjusts the rate of increasing of the Pulse Counter 2 function. The module counts pulses at the
input PULSE COUNTER 2 (PAGE 440) and if the input pulses counter reaches value given by this setpoint, the
counter value Pulse Counter 2 (page 384) is increased by 0,1 and input pulses counter is reset to 0. Both
counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 214

 Subgroup: Ventilation

Ventilation Pulse Time

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0–3600 [s]
Default value 30 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 15767 Related applications MRS. AMF
Config level Advanced
Only when logical binary output VENTILATION ON PULSE (PAGE 488) or VENTILATION
Setpoint visibility
OFF PULSE (PAGE 487) is configured.
Description
This setpoint defines duration of pulse generated on logical binary outputs VENTILATION ON PULSE (PAGE
488) or VENTILATION OFF PULSE (PAGE 487) at the moment when logical binary output VENTILATION (PAGE
487) is activated or deactivated respectively.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: ECU Settings

ECU Speed Adjustment

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Default value 50 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 9948 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Enables to adjust engine speed in ECU via CAN bus. Nominal speed corresponds to 50%. This setpoint
should be used only for Volvo Penta and Scania engines. It has no effect on other engine brands.
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment 1
(page 281), ECU Speed Adjustment 2 (page 281) and ECU Speed Adjustment 3 (page 282).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 215

 Group: Generator settings
Subgroup: Overload Protection

Overload BOC
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Overload Wrn (page 216) .. 200 [%]
Default value 120 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Power (page 173)
Comm object 8280 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold level for generator overload (in % of Nominal power) protection. Protection is BOC (Breaker Open
and gen-set Cooldown).
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

Overload Wrn
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. Overload BOC (page 216) [%]
Default value 120 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Power (page 173)
Comm object 9685 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold level for generator overload (in % of Nominal power) protection. This is only warning.

6 back to List of setpoints

Overload Delay
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 5,0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 8281 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Overload BOC (page 216)Overload BOC (page 216) and Overload Wrn (page 216) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 216

 Subgroup: Current Protection

Short Circuit BOC

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 100 .. 500 [%]
Default value 250 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Current (page 173)
Comm object 8282 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
BOC occurs when generator current reaches this preset threshold.
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

Short Circuit BOC Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0,00 .. 10,00 [s]
Default value 0,04 s Alternative config YES
Step 0,01 s
Comm object 9991 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Short Circuit BOC (page 217) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Voltage Protection

Generator Overvoltage Sd
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 218) .. 200 [%]
Default value 110 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 177) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 177)
Comm object 8291 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator overvoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Maximum out of three is used.
Note: Phase to phase and phase to neutral voltages are used for this protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 217

 Generator Overvoltage Wrn
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.9.0
Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 219) .. Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 217)
Range [units]
[%]
Default value 110 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 177) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 177)
Comm object 9686 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator overvoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Maximum out of three is used.
Note: Phase to phase and phase to neutral voltages are used for this protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

Generator Undervoltage BOC

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 219) [%]
Default value 70 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 177) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 177)
Comm object 8293 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator undervoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Minimum out of three is used.
Note: Phase to phase and phase to neutral voltages are used for this protection.

Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 218

 Generator Undervoltage Wrn
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.9.0
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 218) .. Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page
Range [units]
218) [%]
Default value 70 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 177) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 177)
Comm object 9687 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator undervoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Minimum out of three is used.
Note: Phase to phase and phase to neutral voltages are used for this protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

Generator <> Voltage Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 3,0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 9103 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 217), Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 218), Generator
Undervoltage BOC (page 218) and Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 219) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Frequency Protection

Generator Overfrequency BOC

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 220) .. 200,0 [%]
Default value 110,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 178)
Comm object 8296 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 overfrequency.
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 219

 Generator Overfrequency Wrn
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.9.0
Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 220) .. Generator Overfrequency BOC
Range [units]
(page 219) [%]
Default value 110,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 178)
Comm object 9688 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 overfrequency.

6 back to List of setpoints

Generator Underfrequency BOC

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 220) [%]
Default value 85,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 178)
Comm object 8298 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 underfrequency.
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

Generator Underfrequency Wrn

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.9.0
Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 220) .. Generator Overfrequency Wrn
Range [units]
(page 220) [%]
Default value 85,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 178)
Comm object 9689 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 underfrequency.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 220

 Generator <> Frequency Delay
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 3,0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 8297 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Generator Overfrequency BOC (page 219), Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 220),
Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 220) and Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 220)
protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 221

 Group: AMF settings
Subgroup: AMF Timers

Emergency Start Delay

Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 6 000 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8301 Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Operation Mode (page 181)
Description
Delay after the mains failure to the start command of the gen-set.

Image 8.11 Emergency Start Delay

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains Return Delay

Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1 .. 3 600 [s]
Default value 20 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8302 Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Operation Mode (page 181)
Description
This setpoint adjust the delay, how long mains has to be returned after mains fail to start load transfer to
mains.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 222

 Transfer Delay
Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 1,0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 8303 Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Operation Mode (page 181)
Description
Delay after GCB opening to MCB closing during the return procedure. Delay after MCB opening to GCB
closing if the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 229) is set to GENRUN.
The time charts bellow show recommended setting of Transfer Delay setpoint.
If the Transfer Delay setpoint is set shorter than the time required for opening of the circuit breaker, the
controller closes GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 465) output straight away (100 ms) after the MCB FEEDBACK
(PAGE 438) input deactivates.

Image 8.12 Transfer Delay 1

If some delay between MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 438) deactivation and closing of GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE
465) output is required, then the Transfer Delay must be set to sum of “MCB opening” + “Delay” time.

InteliLite Global Guide 223

 Image 8.13 Transfer Delay 2

6 back to List of setpoints

MCB Close Delay

Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 1,0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 8389 Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Operation Mode (page 181)
Description
Delay after mains returns to MCB closing, if the gen-set is not running(e.g. is in start-up procedure)

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: AMF Voltage Conditions

Mains Overvoltage
Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Mains Undervoltage (page 225) .. 150 [%]
Default value 110 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 177)
Comm object 8305 Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Operation Mode (page 181)
Description
Threshold for mains overvoltage. All three phases are checked. Maximum out of three is used.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 224

 Mains Undervoltage
Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 50 .. Mains Overvoltage (page 224) [%]
Default value 60 % Alternative config YES
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 177)
Comm object 8307 Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Operation Mode (page 181)
Description
Threshold for mains undervoltage. All three phases are checked. Minimum voltage out of three phases is
used.

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains < > Voltage Delay

Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 2,0 s Alternative config YES
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 8306 Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Operation Mode (page 181)
Description
Delay for Mains Undervoltage (page 225) and Mains Overvoltage (page 224) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: AMF Frequency Conditions

Mains Overfrequency
Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Mains Underfrequency (page 226) .. 150 [%]
Default value 102,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 1,0 % of Nominal Frequency (page 178)
Comm object 8310 Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Operation Mode (page 181)
Description
Threshold for mains overfrequency.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 225

 Mains Underfrequency
Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 50 .. Mains Overfrequency (page 225) [%]
Default value 98,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 1,0 % of Nominal Frequency (page 178)
Comm object 8312 Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Operation Mode (page 181)
Description
Threshold for mains underfrequency.

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains < > Frequency Delay

Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 0,5 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 8311 Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Operation Mode (page 181)
Description
Delay for Mains Underfrequency (page 226) and Mains Overfrequency (page 225) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 226

 Subgroup: AMF Settings

Return From Island

Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Manual / Auto [-]
Default value Auto Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 9590 Related applications AMF
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Operation Mode (page 181)
Description
Setpoint adjust the behavior of closing MCB when the mains returns.

Controller remains in AUT mode and the manual return to Mains is done via MCB
button. Manual Restore (page 538) message is displayed in alarmlist to notify
Manual operator - it will disappear automatically after MCB close button is pushed.
Note: Select MANUAL in case you need to manually control the moment when the
load is transferred back to the mains.
Auto No automatic mode change is performed.

6 back to List of setpoints

MCB Logic
Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Close On / Close Off [-]
Default value Close Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8444 Related applications AMF
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Operation Mode (page 181)
Description
The set point influences the behavior of the output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 474).
Close On When the output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 474) is closed – MCB should be closed.
Close Off When the output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 474) is closed – MCB should be opened.

InteliLite Global Guide 227

 Image 8.14 MCB Logic 1

Image 8.15 MCB Logic 2

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 228

 MCB Opens On
Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Mains Fail / Gen Run [-]
Default value Gen Run Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 9850 Related applications AMF
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Operation Mode (page 181)
Description
Setpoint adjust the behavior of opening MCB in AUTO mode when there is mains fail.

Mains Fail The command to open the MCB is given immediately after mains fail condition is evaluated.
If the mains will return into parameters after MCB was opened and before GCB is closed, timer
MCB Close Delay (page 224) is applied before MCB closing.
Gen Run MCB will be opened when engine will be running and it will be possible to transfer load from
Mains to gen-set (after stabilisation phase).

Note: This option should be used for MCBs using 230V control and not equipped with the undervoltage
coil.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: General Analog Inputs

General Analog Input 1

Analog Protection 1 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9259 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 491) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 491).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 491) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 229

 Analog Protection 1 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9260 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 491) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 491).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 491) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 1 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9261 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 491) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 491).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 491) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 230

 General Analog Input 2

Analog Protection 2 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9262 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 02 (PAGE 492) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 02 (PAGE 492).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 02 (PAGE 492) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 2 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9263 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 02 (PAGE 492) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 02 (PAGE 492).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 02 (PAGE 492) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 231

 Analog Protection 2 Delay
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9264 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 02 (PAGE 492) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 02 (PAGE 492).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 02 (PAGE 492) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 3

Analog Protection 3 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9265 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 03 (PAGE 493) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 03 (PAGE 493).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 03 (PAGE 493) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 232

 Analog Protection 3 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9266 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 03 (PAGE 493) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 03 (PAGE 493).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 03 (PAGE 493) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 3 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9267 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 03 (PAGE 493) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 03 (PAGE 493).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 03 (PAGE 493) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 233

 General Analog Input 4

Analog Protection 4 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9268 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 04 (PAGE 494) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 04 (PAGE 494).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 04 (PAGE 494) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 4 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9269 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 04 (PAGE 494) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 04 (PAGE 494).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 04 (PAGE 494) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 234

 Analog Protection 4 Delay
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9270 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 04 (PAGE 494) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 04 (PAGE 494).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 04 (PAGE 494) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 5

Analog Protection 5 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9271 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 05 (PAGE 495) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 05 (PAGE 495).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 05 (PAGE 495) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 235

 Analog Protection 5 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9272 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 05 (PAGE 495) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 05 (PAGE 495).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 05 (PAGE 495) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 5 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9273 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 05 (PAGE 495) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 05 (PAGE 495).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 05 (PAGE 495) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 236

 General Analog Input 6

Analog Protection 6 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9274 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 06 (PAGE 496) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 06 (PAGE 496).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 06 (PAGE 496) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 6 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9275 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 06 (PAGE 496) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 06 (PAGE 496).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 06 (PAGE 496) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 237

 Analog Protection 6 Delay
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9276 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 06 (PAGE 496) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 06 (PAGE 496).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 06 (PAGE 496) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 7

Analog Protection 7 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9277 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 07 (PAGE 497) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 07 (PAGE 497).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 07 (PAGE 497) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 238

 Analog Protection 7 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9278 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 07 (PAGE 497) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 07 (PAGE 497).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 07 (PAGE 497) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 7 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9279 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 07 (PAGE 497) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 07 (PAGE 497).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 07 (PAGE 497) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 239

 General Analog Input 8

Analog Protection 8 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9280 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 08 (PAGE 498) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 08 (PAGE 498).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 08 (PAGE 498) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 8 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9281 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 08 (PAGE 498) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 08 (PAGE 498).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 08 (PAGE 498) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 240

 Analog Protection 8 Delay
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9282 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 08 (PAGE 498) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 08 (PAGE 498).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 08 (PAGE 498) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 9

Analog Protection 9 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9283 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 09 (PAGE 499) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 09 (PAGE 499).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 09 (PAGE 499) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 241

 Analog Protection 9 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9284 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 09 (PAGE 499) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 09 (PAGE 499).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 09 (PAGE 499) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 9 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9285 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 09 (PAGE 499) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 09 (PAGE 499).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 09 (PAGE 499) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 242

 General Analog Input 10

Analog Protection 10 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9286 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 10 (PAGE 500) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 10 (PAGE 500).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 10 (PAGE 500) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 10 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9287 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 10 (PAGE 500) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 10 (PAGE 500).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 10 (PAGE 500) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 243

 Analog Protection 10 Delay
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9288 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 10 (PAGE 500) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 10 (PAGE 500).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 10 (PAGE 500) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 11

Analog Protection 11 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9289 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 11 (PAGE 501) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 11 (PAGE 501).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 11 (PAGE 501) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 244

 Analog Protection 11 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9290 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 11 (PAGE 501) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 11 (PAGE 501).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 11 (PAGE 501) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 11 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9291 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 11 (PAGE 501) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 11 (PAGE 501).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 11 (PAGE 501) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 245

 General Analog Input 12

Analog Protection 12 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9292 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 12 (PAGE 502) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 12 (PAGE 502).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 12 (PAGE 502) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 12 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9293 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 12 (PAGE 502) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 12 (PAGE 502).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 12 (PAGE 502) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 246

 Analog Protection 12 Delay
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9294 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 12 (PAGE 502) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 12 (PAGE 502).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 12 (PAGE 502) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 13

Analog Protection 13 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9295 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 13 (PAGE 503) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 13 (PAGE 503).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 13 (PAGE 503) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 247

 Analog Protection 13 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9296 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 13 (PAGE 503) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 13 (PAGE 503).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 13 (PAGE 503) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 13 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9297 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 13 (PAGE 503) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 13 (PAGE 503).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 13 (PAGE 503) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 248

 General Analog Input 14

Analog Protection 14 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9298 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 14 (PAGE 504) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 14 (PAGE 504).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 14 (PAGE 504) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 14 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9299 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 14 (PAGE 504) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 14 (PAGE 504).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 14 (PAGE 504) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 249

 Analog Protection 14 Delay
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9300 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 14 (PAGE 504) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 14 (PAGE 504).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 14 (PAGE 504) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 15

Analog Protection 15 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9301 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 15 (PAGE 505) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 15 (PAGE 505).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 15 (PAGE 505) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 250

 Analog Protection 15 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9302 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 15 (PAGE 505) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 15 (PAGE 505).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 15 (PAGE 505) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 15 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9303 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 15 (PAGE 505) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 15 (PAGE 505).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 15 (PAGE 505) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 251

 General Analog Input 16

Analog Protection 16 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9304 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 16 (PAGE 506) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 16 (PAGE 506).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 16 (PAGE 506) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 16 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9305 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 16 (PAGE 506) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 16 (PAGE 506).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 16 (PAGE 506) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 252

 Analog Protection 16 Delay
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9306 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 16 (PAGE 506) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 16 (PAGE 506).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 16 (PAGE 506) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 17

Analog Protection 17 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9307 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 17 (PAGE 507) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 17 (PAGE 507).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 17 (PAGE 507) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 253

 Analog Protection 17 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9308 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 17 (PAGE 507) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 17 (PAGE 507).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 17 (PAGE 507) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 17 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9309 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 17 (PAGE 507) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 17 (PAGE 507).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 17 (PAGE 507) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 254

 General Analog Input 18

Analog Protection 18 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9310 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 18 (PAGE 508) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 18 (PAGE 508).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 18 (PAGE 508) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 18 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9311 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 18 (PAGE 508) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 18 (PAGE 508).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 18 (PAGE 508) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 255

 Analog Protection 18 Delay
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9312 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 18 (PAGE 508) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 18 (PAGE 508).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 18 (PAGE 508) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

General Analog Input 19

Analog Protection 19 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9313 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 19 (PAGE 509) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 19 (PAGE 509).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 19 (PAGE 509) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 256

 Analog Protection 19 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9314 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 19 (PAGE 509) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 19 (PAGE 509).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 19 (PAGE 509) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 19 Delay

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9315 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 19 (PAGE 509) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 19 (PAGE 509).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 19 (PAGE 509) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 257

 General Analog Input 20

Analog Protection 20 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9316 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 20 (PAGE 510) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 20 (PAGE 510).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 20 (PAGE 510) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Analog Protection 20 Sd
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Comm object 9317 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 20 (PAGE 510) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 20 (PAGE 510).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 20 (PAGE 510) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 258

 Analog Protection 20 Delay
Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 900 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9318 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 20 (PAGE 510) is configured
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 20 (PAGE 510).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 20 (PAGE 510) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Scheduler
Subgroup: Time & Date

Time
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] HH:MM:SS [-]
Default value 0:0:0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24554 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Real time clock adjustment.

6 back to List of setpoints

Date
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] DD/MM/YYYY [-]
Default value 1.1.2015 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24553 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Actual date adjustment.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 259

 Time Stamp Period
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 240 [min]
Default value 60 min Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 8979 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Time interval for periodic history records.
Note: History record is made only when engine is running.

6 back to List of setpoints

#Summer Time Mode

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Disabled / Winter / Summer / Winter - S / Summer - S [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8727 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Behavior of switching between winter and summer time.

Disable Automatic switching between summer and wintertime is disabled.

Winter Automatic switching between summer and wintertime is enabled and it is set to winter
(Summer) (summer) season.
Winter - S
Modification for southern hemisphere.
(Summer - S)

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 260

 Subgroup: Timer 1

Timer 1 Function
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Disable / No Func / TEST / Test OnLd / MFail Blk / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15358 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
It is possible to choose from following timer functions. Binary output EXERCISE TIMER 1 (PAGE 463) is
always activated when Timer is active regardless of chosen timer function. Timer functions require controller
running in AUTO mode.
Controller activates timer whenever it is powered up even in period, where timer should be already running.

Disable The Timer is disabled.

No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
TEST When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
binary input Remote TEST.
TEST OnLd When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
Remote TEST On Load binary input.
MFail Blk When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
Mains Fail Block binary input.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
Remote OFF binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 261

 Timer 1 Setup
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10969 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Related setpoints for timer 1 are:
Timer 1 Function (page 261) Timer 1 Day (page 266)
Timer 1 Repetition (page 262) Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week (page 267)
Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 263) Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 267)
Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 263) Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month (page 268)
Timer 1 Duration (page 263) Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 265)
Timer 1 Repeated (page 264) Timer 1 Weekends (page 266)
Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 267)

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 Repetition
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 261)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 1 Function (page 261).

Off Timer 1 Function (page 261) will not be activated.

Once Timer 1 Function (page 261) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 1 Function (page 261) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 262

 Timer 1 First Occur. Date
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 261)
Description
Date of first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 261).

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 261)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 261).

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 Duration
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 261)
Description
Timer 1 Function (page 261) duration time.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 263

 Timer 1 Repeated
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 261)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 1 Function (page 261).

Daily Timer 1 Function (page 261) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 1 Function (page 261) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 1 Function (page 261) is repeated in chosen day every month or in chosen
days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 1 Function (page 261) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 264

 Timer 1 Refresh Period
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 261)
Description
Refresh period of Timer 1 Function (page 261). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 1 Repeated (page 264).

Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer will
be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 261), the
Timer 1 Function (page 261) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 261),
the Timer 1 Function (page 261) will be activated in selected days adjusted
by Timer 1 Day (page 266).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 261),
Monthly
the Timer 1 Function (page 261) will be activated in selected day of month
adjusted by Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 267) or in selected days
of week of month adjusted by Timer 1 Day (page 266) and Timer 1 Repeat
Week In Month (page 268).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 2,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page
261), the Timer 1 Function (page 261) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 265

 Timer 1 Weekends
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 261)
Description
Behavior of Timer 1 Function (page 261) on weekends.

Timer 1 Function (page 261) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 1
Including
Function (page 261) can be active.
Timer 1 Function (page 261) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 1
Skip
Function (page 261) isn’t active.
Timer 1 Function (page 261) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer 1
Function (page 261) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 Day
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 261)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down buttons.
To change the value of day use Enter button.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 266

 Timer 1 Repeat Day
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 261)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 1 Function (page 261).

Repeated Day Chose one day in month when Timer 1 Function (page 261) will be activated.
Repeated Day In Week Chose days in one week when Timer 1 Function (page 261) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 261)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 List of setpoints (page 168)

Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 261)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 1 Function (page 261) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 267

 Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 261)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 1 Function (page 261) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Plug-In Modules

Slot A
Setpoint group Plug-In Modules Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] ENABLED / DISABLED [-]
Default value ENABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24280 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enable or disable module in slot A.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Alternate Config

Subgroup: Basic settings

Connection Type 1
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Mono Phase / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3 / 3Ph3Wire / 3Ph4Wire / High Leg D /
Range [units]
Autodetect [-]
Default value 3Ph4Wire Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 12058 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Connection type:

InteliLite Global Guide 268

 Mono Phase Single phase voltage measurement L1-N
1x CT (Current Transformer)
SplitPhase Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L2 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L3 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L3 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph4Wire Grounded Star (Grounded Wye) connection – 3PY
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
3x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph3Wire Ungrounded Delta connection
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye
Corner-Grounded Delta
Split Phase Delta
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
No neutral is available 3x CT (Current Transformer)
High Leg D High Leg Delta connection
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3
3x CT (Current Transformer)
Autodetect High Leg Delta
L1 >=100V; L1 <=140V
L2 >=140V
or
L3 >=100V; L3 <=140V

3PH3Wire or 3Ph4Wire
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 >=100V

SplPhL1L2
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 <= 20V

SplPhL1L3 L1 >=100V

InteliLite Global Guide 269

 L2 <= 20V
or
L3 >=100V

Mono Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 <= 20V

Voltage Autodetect shutdown

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 404) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Current 1
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Comm object 12049 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
It is current limit for generator current protections and means maximal continuous generator current. Nominal
Current can be different from generator rated current value.
Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Frequency 1
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 45 .. 65 [Hz]
Default value 50 Hz Alternative config YES
Step 1 Hz
Comm object 9913 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal system frequency (usually 50 or 60 Hz).
Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 270

 Nominal RPM 1
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 100 .. 4000 [RPM]
Default value 1 500 RPM Alternative config YES
Step 1 RPM
Comm object 9915 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal engine speed (RPM - revolutions per minute).
Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 80 .. 20000 [V]
Default value 231 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12052 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection Type 1 (page 268).
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to neutral).
Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 80 .. 40000 [V]
Default value 400 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12055 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection Type 1 (page 268).
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to phase).
Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 271

 Nominal Power 1
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config Yes
Step 1 kW
Comm object 12046 Related applications AMF, MRS,
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal power of the gen-set. Generator Overload BOC (page 216) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 175) is adjusted to Monophase or
Splitphase or 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire or when Autodetect detects connection type as
3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire.

Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Power Split Phase 1

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config Yes
Step 1 kW
Comm object 15771 Related applications AMF, MRS,
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 175)
Description
Nominal power of the gen-set for detected split-phase or mono phase connection. Generator Overload BOC
(page 216) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 175) is adjusted to Autodetect and
Autodetect detects connection type as Monophase or Splitphase.

Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Connection type 2
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Mono Phase / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3 / 3Ph3Wire / 3Ph4Wire / High Leg D /
Range [units]
Autodetect [-]
Default value 3Ph4Wire Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 12059 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard

InteliLite Global Guide 272

 Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Connection type:

Mono Phase Single phase voltage measurement L1-N

1x CT (Current Transformer)
SplitPhase Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L2 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L3 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L3 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph4Wire Grounded Star (Grounded Wye) connection – 3PY
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
3x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph3Wire Ungrounded Delta connection
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye
Corner-Grounded Delta
Split Phase Delta
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
No neutral is available 3x CT (Current Transformer)
High Leg D High Leg Delta connection
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3
3x CT (Current Transformer)
Autodetect High Leg Delta
L1 >=100V; L1 <=140V
L2 >=140V
or
L3 >=100V; L3 <=140V

3PH3Wire or 3Ph4Wire
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 >=100V

SplPhL1L2 L1 >=100V

InteliLite Global Guide 273

 L2 >=100V
or
L3 <= 20V

SplPhL1L3
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 >=100V

Mono Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 <= 20V

Voltage Autodetect shutdown

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 404) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Current 2
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1 .. 10000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Comm object 12050 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
It is current limit for generator current protections and means maximal continuous generator current. Nominal
Current can be different from generator rated current value.
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 404) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Frequency 2
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 45 .. 65 [Hz]
Default value 50 Hz Alternative config YES
Step 1 Hz
Comm object 9914 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal system frequency (usually 50 or 60 Hz).
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 404) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 274

 Nominal RPM 2
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 100 .. 4000 [RPM]
Default value 1 500 RPM Alternative config YES
Step 1 RPM
Comm object 9916 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal engine speed (RPM - revolutions per minute).
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 404) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 80 .. 20000 [V]
Default value 231 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12053 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 2 (page 272).
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to neutral).
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 404) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 80 .. 40000 [V]
Default value 400 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12056 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 2 (page 272).
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to phase).
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 404) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 275

 Nominal Power 2
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config Yes
Step 1 kW
Comm object 12047 Related applications AMF, MRS,
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal power of the gen-set. Generator Overload BOC (page 216) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 175) is adjusted to Monophase or
Splitphase or 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire or when Autodetect detects connection type as
3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire.

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 404) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Power Split Phase 2

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config Yes
Step 1 kW
Comm object 15772 Related applications AMF, MRS,
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 175)
Description
Nominal power of the gen-set for detected split-phase or mono phase connection. Generator Overload BOC
(page 216) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 175) is adjusted to Autodetect and
Autodetect detects connection type as Monophase or Splitphase.

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 404) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Connection type 3
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Mono Phase / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3 / 3Ph3Wire / 3Ph4Wire / High Leg D /
Range [units]
Autodetect [-]
Default value 3Ph4Wire Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 12060 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard

InteliLite Global Guide 276

 Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Connection type:

Mono Phase Single phase voltage measurement L1-N

1x CT (Current Transformer)
SplitPhase Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L2 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L3 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L3 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph4Wire Grounded Star (Grounded Wye) connection – 3PY
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
3x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph3Wire Ungrounded Delta connection
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye
Corner-Grounded Delta
Split Phase Delta
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
No neutral is available 3x CT (Current Transformer)
High Leg D High Leg Delta connection
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3
3x CT (Current Transformer)
Autodetect High Leg Delta
L1 >=100V; L1 <=140V
L2 >=140V
or
L3 >=100V; L3 <=140V

3PH3Wire or 3Ph4Wire
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 >=100V

SplPhL1L2 L1 >=100V

InteliLite Global Guide 277

 L2 >=100V
or
L3 <= 20V

SplPhL1L3
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 >=100V

Mono Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 <= 20V

Voltage Autodetect shutdown

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 404) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Current 3
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Comm object 12051 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
It is current limit for generator current protections and means maximal continuous generator current. Nominal
Current can be different from generator rated current value.
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 404) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Frequency 3
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 45 .. 65 [Hz]
Default value 50 Hz Alternative config YES
Step 1 Hz
Comm object 15197 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal system frequency (usually 50 or 60 Hz).
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 404) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 278

 Nominal RPM 3
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 100 .. 4 000 [RPM]
Default value 1 500 RPM Alternative config YES
Step 1 RPM
Comm object 15196 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal engine speed (RPM - revolutions per minute).
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 404) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 231 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12054 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 3 (page 276).
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to neutral).
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 404) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 80 .. 40 000 [V]
Default value 400 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12057 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 3 (page 276).
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to phase).
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 404) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 279

 Nominal Power 3
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config Yes
Step 1 kW
Comm object 12048 Related applications AMF, MRS,
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal power of the gen-set. Generator Overload BOC (page 216) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 175) is adjusted to Monophase or
Splitphase or 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire or when Autodetect detects connection type as
3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire.

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 404) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Power Split Phase 3

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config Yes
Step 1 kW
Comm object 15773 Related applications AMF, MRS,
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 175)
Description
Nominal power of the gen-set for detected split-phase or mono phase connection. Generator Overload BOC
(page 216) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 175) is adjusted to Autodetect and
Autodetect detects connection type as Monophase or Splitphase.

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 404) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 280

 Subgroup: Engine settings

ECU Speed Adjustment 1

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Default value 50 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 14337 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Enables to adjust engine speed in ECU via CAN bus. Nominal speed corresponds to 50%. This setpoint
should be used only for Volvo Penta and Scania engines. It has no effect on other engine brands.
Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

ECU Speed Adjustment 2

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Default value 50 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 14338 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Enables to adjust engine speed in ECU via CAN bus. Nominal speed corresponds to 50%. This setpoint
should be used only for Volvo Penta and Scania engines. It has no effect on other engine brands.
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 404) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 281

 ECU Speed Adjustment 3
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Default value 50 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 15199 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Enables to adjust engine speed in ECU via CAN bus. Nominal speed corresponds to 50%. This setpoint
should be used only for Volvo Penta and Scania engines. It has no effect on other engine brands.
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 404) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: CM-RS232-485
COM1 Mode
Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Direct / MODBUS / DualSlave / Dual Master [-]
Default value Direct Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24522 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Communication protocol switch for the COM1 channel.

Direct InteliConfig communication protocol via serial cable.

MODBUS MODBUS protocol.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 282

 COM1 Communication Speed
Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200[bps]
Default value 57600 bps Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24341 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM1 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
282)
Description
If the direct mode is selected on COM1 channel, the direct communication speed of controller part of line can
be adjusted here. Speed of second part of line has to be adjusted to the same value.
Note: Winscope supports only 19200, 38400, 57600 speeds.

6 List of setpoints (page 168)

COM1 MODBUS Communication Speed

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Default value 9600 bps Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24477 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM1 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
282)
Description
If the MODBUS mode is selected on COM1 channel, the MODBUS communication speed can be adjusted
here.

6 List of setpoints (page 168)

InteliLite Global Guide 283

 COM2 Mode
Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Direct / MODBUS / DualSlave / Dual Master [-]
Default value Direct Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24451 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Communication protocol switch for the COM2 channel.

Direct InteliConfig communication protocol via serial cable.

MODBUS MODBUS protocol.

6 back to List of setpoints

COM2 Communication Speed

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200[bps]
Default value 57600 bps Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24340 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM2 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
284)
Description
If the direct mode is selected on COM2 channel, the direct communication speed of controller part of line can
be adjusted here. Speed of second part of line has to be adjusted to the same value.
Note: Winscope supports only 19200, 38400, 57600 speeds.

6 List of setpoints (page 168)

InteliLite Global Guide 284

 COM2 MODBUS Communication Speed
Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Default value 9600 bps Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24420 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM2 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
284)
Description
If the MODBUS mode is selected on COM2 channel, the MODBUS communication speed can be adjusted
here.

6 List of setpoints (page 168)

Group: CM-GPRS
Message Language
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Default value English Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24299 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this setpoint to set the language of SMS and e-mail.
Note: Numbers correspond with languages in language list. See the chapter for Language selection
(page 87) more information.

This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 285

 Time Zone
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] GMT-12:00 .. GMT+13:00 [hours]
Default value GMT+1:00 hour Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24366 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information about
sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.

Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Event Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10926 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Event Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 286

 Wrn Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8482 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Wrn Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

BOC Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10566 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables BOC Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Sd Messages
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8484 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Sd Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 287

 Telephone Number 1
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24296 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint either a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call) or
the full international format beginning with a “+” character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: CM-4G-GPS
Message Language
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Default value English Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24299 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this setpoint to set the language of SMS and e-mail.
Note: Numbers correspond with languages in language list. See the chapter for Language selection
(page 87) more information.

This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 288

 Time Zone
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] GMT-12:00 .. GMT+13:00 [hours]
Default value GMT+1:00 hour Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24366 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information about
sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.

Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Event Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10926 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Event Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 289

 Wrn Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8482 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Wrn Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

BOC Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10566 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables BOC Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Sd Messages
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8484 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Sd Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 290

 Telephone Number 1
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24296 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint either a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call) or
the full international format beginning with a “+” character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: CM-Ethernet
Email Address 1
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24298 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent.
Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 291

 Message Language
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Default value English Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24299 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this setpoint to set the language of SMS and e-mail.
Note: Numbers correspond with languages in language list. See the chapter for Language selection
(page 87) more information.

This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Time Zone
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] GMT-12:00 .. GMT+13:00 [hours]
Default value GMT+1:00 hour Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24366 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information about
sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.

Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 292

 Event Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10926 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Event Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Wrn Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8482 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Wrn Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

BOC Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10566 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables BOC Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 293

 Sd Messages
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8484 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Sd Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP UserName
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24370 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the username for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP User Password

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0..15 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24369 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the password for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 294

 SMTP Server Address
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value airgate.comap.cz:9925 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24368 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name (e.g. smtp.yourprovider.com) or IP address (e.g.
74.125.39.109) or number of port (with colon like a first mark) of the SMTP server. Ask your internet provider
or IT manager for this information.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP Sender Address

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24367 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter an existing email address into this setpoint. This address will be used as sender address in active e-
mails that will be sent from the controller.
Note: It is not needed to enter an existing email address, nevertheless valid email format needs to be
followed.

IMPORTANT: This item is obligatory when emails are configured.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 295

 IP Address Mode
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] FIXED / AUTOMATIC [-]
Default value AUTOMATIC Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24259 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the ethernet connection is adjusted.

DISABLED: The Ethernet connection is fixed by means of the setpoints IP Addr, NetMask, GateIP,
DNS IP Address.
This method should be used for a classic Ethernet or internet connection. When this type
of connection opens, the controller is specified by its IP address. This means that it
would be inconvenient if the IP address were not fixed (static).
ENABLED: The Ethernet connection setting is obtained automatically from the DHCP server. The
obtained settings are then copied to the related setpoints. If the process of obtaining the
settings from the DHCP server is not successful, the value 000.000.000.000 is copied to
the setpoint IP address and the module continues to try to obtain the settings.

6 back to List of setpoints

IP Address
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value 192.168.1.254 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24376 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint IP Address Mode
Setpoint visibility
(page 296)
Description
The setpoint is used to set the address when you are in static mode.
If IP Address Mode (page 296) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the IP address of the ethernet
interface of the controller. Ask your IT specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 296) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The IP address is assigned by the
DHCP server.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 296

 Subnet Mask
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value 255.255.255.0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24375 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint IP Address Mode
Setpoint visibility
(page 296)
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the Subnet Mask is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 296) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the Subnet Mask. Ask your IT
specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 296) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The Subnet Mask is assigned by
the DHCP server.

6 back to List of setpoints

Gateway IP
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value 192.168.1.1 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24373 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint IP Address Mode
Setpoint visibility
(page 296)
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the Gateway IP is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 296) is DISABLE this setpoint is used to adjust the IP address of the gateway of
the network segment where the controller is connected.
If IP Address Mode (page 296) is ENABLED this setpoint is used to display the gateway IP address which
has been assigned by the DHCP server.
A gateway is a device which connects the respective segment with the other segments and/or Internet.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 297

 DNS IP Address 1
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value 8.8.8.8 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24362 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the DNS Address 1 is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 296) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS),
which is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
If IP Address Mode (page 296) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is
assigned by the DHCP server.

6 back to List of setpoints

DNS IP Address 2
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value 8.8.8.8 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24331 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the DNS Address 2 is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 296) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS),
which is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
If IP Address Mode (page 296) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is
assigned by the DHCP server.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 298

 MODBUS Server
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24337 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enable or disable MODBUS communication via ethernet interface.

6 back to List of setpoints

Web Interface
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24110 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint IP Address Mode
Setpoint visibility
(page 296)
Description
The setpoint is used to enable/disable WebServer function.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 299

 Group: PLC
PLC Setpoint 1
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10440 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.16 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 300

 PLC Setpoint 2
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10441 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.17 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 301

 PLC Setpoint 3
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10442 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.18 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 302

 PLC Setpoint 4
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10443 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.19 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 303

 PLC Setpoint 5
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10444 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.20 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 304

 PLC Setpoint 6
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10445 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.21 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 305

 PLC Setpoint 7
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10446 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.22 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 306

 PLC Setpoint 8
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10447 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.23 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 307

 PLC Setpoint 9
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10448 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.24 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 308

 PLC Setpoint 10
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10449 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.25 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 309

 PLC Setpoint 11
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10450 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.26 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 310

 PLC Setpoint 12
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10451 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.27 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 311

 PLC Setpoint 13
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10452 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.28 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 312

 PLC Setpoint 14
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10453 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.29 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 313

 PLC Setpoint 15
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10454 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.30 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 314

 PLC Setpoint 16
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10455 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.31 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 315

 PLC Setpoint 17
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10456 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.32 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 316

 PLC Setpoint 18
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10457 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.33 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 317

 PLC Setpoint 19
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10458 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.34 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 318

 PLC Setpoint 20
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10459 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.35 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 319

 PLC Setpoint 21
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10460 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.36 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 320

 PLC Setpoint 22
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10461 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.37 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 321

 PLC Setpoint 23
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10462 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.38 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 322

 PLC Setpoint 24
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10463 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.39 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 323

 PLC Setpoint 25
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10464 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.40 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 324

 PLC Setpoint 26
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10465 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.41 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 325

 PLC Setpoint 27
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10466 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.42 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 326

 PLC Setpoint 28
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10467 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.43 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 327

 PLC Setpoint 29
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10468 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.44 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 328

 PLC Setpoint 30
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10469 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.45 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 329

 PLC Setpoint 31
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10470 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.46 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 330

 PLC Setpoint 32
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10471 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.47 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 331

 PLC Setpoint 33
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10472 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.48 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 332

 PLC Setpoint 34
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10473 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.49 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 333

 PLC Setpoint 35
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10474 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.50 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 334

 PLC Setpoint 36
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10475 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.51 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 335

 PLC Setpoint 37
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10476 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.52 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 336

 PLC Setpoint 38
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10477 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.53 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 337

 PLC Setpoint 39
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10478 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.54 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 338

 PLC Setpoint 40
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10479 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.55 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 339

 PLC Setpoint 41
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10480 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.56 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 340

 PLC Setpoint 42
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10481 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.57 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 341

 PLC Setpoint 43
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10482 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.58 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 342

 PLC Setpoint 44
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10483 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.59 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 343

 PLC Setpoint 45
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10484 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.60 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 344

 PLC Setpoint 46
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10485 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.61 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 345

 PLC Setpoint 47
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10486 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.62 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 346

 PLC Setpoint 48
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10487 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.63 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 347

 PLC Setpoint 49
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10488 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.64 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 348

 PLC Setpoint 50
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10489 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.65 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 349

 PLC Setpoint 51
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10490 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.66 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 350

 PLC Setpoint 52
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10491 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.67 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 351

 PLC Setpoint 53
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10492 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.68 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 352

 PLC Setpoint 54
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10493 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.69 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 353

 PLC Setpoint 55
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10494 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.70 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 354

 PLC Setpoint 56
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10495 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.71 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 355

 PLC Setpoint 57
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10496 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.72 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 356

 PLC Setpoint 58
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10497 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.73 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 357

 PLC Setpoint 59
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10498 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.74 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 358

 PLC Setpoint 60
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10499 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.75 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 359

 PLC Setpoint 61
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10500 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.76 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 360

 PLC Setpoint 62
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10501 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.77 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 361

 PLC Setpoint 63
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10502 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.78 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 362

 PLC Setpoint 64
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
Default value Alternative config NO
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Comm object 10503 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig

Image 8.79 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig

PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit
by resolution of setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite Global Guide 363

8.1.2 Values
What values are:
Values (or quantities) are analog or binary data objects, measured or computed by the controller, that are
intended for reading from the controller screen, PC, MODBUS, etc. Values are organized into groups according
to their meaning.

Invalid flag
If valid data is not available for a particular value, the invalid flag is set to it. This situation may be due to the
following:
The value is not being evaluated in the scope of the current application and configuration.
Sensor fail has been detected on an analog input.
The configured ECU or extension module does not provide the particular value.
The communication with the ECU or extension module is interrupted.
A value containing the invalid flag is displayed as “####” in InteliConfig and on the controller screen. If such a
value is read out via MODBUS, it will contain the data 32768 in the case of signed values and 65535 in the case
of unsigned values.

List of values groups

Group: Engine 367
Group: Generator 371
Group: Load 374
Group: Mains 379
Group: Controler I/O 381
Group: Statistics 382
Group: IL Info 385
Group: Log Bout 388
Group: CM-GPRS 390
Group: CM-4G-GPS 393
Group: CM-Ethernet 396
Group: Date/Time 398
Group: Plug-In I/O 398
Group: PLC 399

For full list of setpoints go to the chapter List of values (page 365).

InteliLite Global Guide 364

 List of values

Engine Load Characteristic L1 375 D+ 382

DEF Level 367 Load Characteristic L2 375

Load Characteristic L3 375 Statistics
DPFAshLoad 367
Load kVA 375 Genset kVArh 382
DPFSootLoad 367
Load kVA L1 376 Genset kWh 382
ECU-BIN 1 367
Load kVA L2 376 Mains kVArh 383
ECU-BIN 2 368
Load kVA L3 376 Mains kWh 383
ECU-BIN 3 368
Load kVAr 376 Maintenance 1 383
ECU-BIN 4 368
Load kVAr L1 377 Maintenance 2 383
ECU-BIN 5 368
Load kVAr L2 377 Maintenance 3 384
ECU-BIN 6 369
Load kVAr L3 377 Num E-Stops 384
ECU-BIN 7 369
Load kW 377 Num Starts 384
ECU-BIN 8 369
Load kW L1 378 Pulse Counter 1 384
ECU-BIN 9 369
Load kW L2 378 Pulse Counter 2 384
ECU-BIN-EXT-1 370
Load kW L3 378 Running Hours 385
ECU Frequency Select 370
Load Power Factor 378 Shutdowns 385
ECU State 370
RPM 371 Load Power Factor L1 379
Load Power Factor L2 379 IL Info
Speed Request 371
Load Power Factor L3 379 Application 385
Speed Required RPM 371
Breaker State 385

Generator Mains Connection Type 386

Mains Frequency 379 Engine State 386
Generator Frequency 371
Mains Voltage L1-L2 379 FW Branch 386
Generator Voltage L1-L2 372
Mains Voltage L1-N 380 FW Version 386
Generator Voltage L1-N 372
Mains Voltage L2-L3 380 ID String 386
Generator Voltage L2-L3 372
Mains Voltage L2-N 380 Password Decode 387
Generator Voltage L2-N 372
Mains Voltage L3-L1 380 SPI Module A 387
Generator Voltage L3-L1 372
Mains Voltage L3-N 380 Timer Text 387
Generator Voltage L3-N 373
Timer Value 387
Nominal Current 373
Dual Operation
Nominal Power 373
Log Bout
Nominal Voltage 373 Controler I/O
Log Bout 1 388
Analog Input 1 381
Load Log Bout 2 388
Analog Input 2 381
Log Bout 3 388
Load A L1 374 Analog Input 3 381
Log Bout 4 388
Load A L2 374 Battery Volts 381
Log Bout 5 388
Load A L3 374 Binary Inputs 381
Log Bout 6 389
Load Characteristic 374 Binary Outputs 382

InteliLite Global Guide 365

 Log Bout 7 389 PLC
Log Bout 8 389 PLC Resource 1 399
Log Bout 9 389 PLC Resource 2 399
Log Bout 10 389 PLC Resource 3 399
Log Bout 11 390 PLC Resource 4 399
Log Bout 12 390 PLC Resource 5 399
PLC Resource 6 400
CM-GPRS ; CM-4G-
PLC Resource 7 400
GPS (4G part)
PLC Resource 8 400
Connection Type 390
PLC-BOUT 1 400
Cell Diag Code 390
PLC-BOUT 2 400
Cell ErrorRate 392
PLC-BOUT 3 401
Cell Signal Lev 392
PLC-BOUT 4 401
Cell Status 392
PLC-BOUT 5 401
Operator 393
PLC-BOUT 6 401
Connection Type 393
PLC-BOUT 7 401
Cell Diag Code 393
Cell ErrorRate 395
Cell Signal Lev 395
Cell Status 395
Operator 395

CM-4G-GPS (GPS part)

CM-Ethernet
Current DNS 396
ETH Interface Status 396
Current Gateway 396
Current IP Address 396
Last Email Result 397
MAC Address 397
Current Subnet Mask 398

Date/Time
Time 398
Date 398

Plug-In I/O
EM BIO A 398

InteliLite Global Guide 366

 Group: Engine
DEF Level
Value group Engine Related FW 1.9.0
Units %
Comm object 14522 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The level of diesel exhaust fluid tank.

6 back to List of values

DPFAshLoad
Value group Engine Related FW 1.9.0
Units %
Comm object 12483 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The rate of ash in DPF (Diesel particulate filter).

6 back to List of values

DPFSootLoad
Value group Engine Related FW 1.9.0
Units %
Comm object 12484 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The rate of soot in DPF (Diesel particulate filter).

6 back to List of values

ECU-BIN 1
Value group Engine Related FW 1.9.0
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10153 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 367

 ECU-BIN 2
Value group Engine Related FW 1.9.0
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10154 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

ECU-BIN 3
Value group Engine Related FW 1.9.0
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10155 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

ECU-BIN 4
Value group Engine Related FW 1.9.0
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10156 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

ECU-BIN 5
Value group Engine Related FW 1.9.0
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10157 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 368

 ECU-BIN 6
Value group Engine Related FW 1.9.0
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10158 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

ECU-BIN 7
Value group Engine Related FW 1.9.0
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10159 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

ECU-BIN 8
Value group Engine Related FW 1.9.0
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10160 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

ECU-BIN 9
Value group Engine Related FW 1.9.0
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10161 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 369

 ECU-BIN-EXT-1
Value group Engine Related FW 1.9.0
Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10173 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

ECU Frequency Select

Value group Engine Related FW 1.9.0
Units -
Comm object 12926 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Shows selected frequency of ECU. The value is calculated from setpoint Nominal Frequency (page 178)
If is Nominal Frequency (page 178) in range from 45 Hz to 54 Hz, is considered as 50 Hz
application. The value is set to 0.
If is Nominal Frequency (page 178) in range from 55 Hz to 65 Hz, is considered as 60 Hz
application. The value is set to 1.

6 back to List of values

ECU State
Value group Engine Related FW 1.9.0
Units -
Comm object 10034 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Shows binary status (0 or 1) of ECU:
ECU Yellow Lamp
ECU Red Lamp
Wait To Start

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 370

 RPM
Value group Engine Related FW 1.9.0
Units RPM
Comm object 10123 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This value contains the current engine speed. The value is obtained from one of the following sources:
ECU, if an ECU is configured
Pickup input
Generator frequency

6 back to List of values

Speed Request
Value group Engine Related FW 1.9.0
Units %
Comm object 10137 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Engine speed control via CAN bus.

Speed request Requested speed Accelerator pedal position

0% 1350 RPM 0%
50% 1500 RPM 50%
100% 1650 RPM 100%

6 back to List of values

Speed Required RPM

Value group Engine Related FW 1.9.0
Units RPM
Comm object 10006 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Requested engine speed.

6 back to List of values

Group: Generator
Generator Frequency
Value group Generator Related FW 1.9.0
Units Hz
Comm object 8210 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Frequency of generator.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 371

 Generator Voltage L1-L2
Value group Generator Related FW 1.9.0
Units V
Comm object 9628 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator phase to phase voltage between L1 and L2 phases.

6 back to List of values

Generator Voltage L1-N

Value group Generator Related FW 1.9.0
Units V
Comm object 8192 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator voltage on phase 1.

6 back to List of values

Generator Voltage L2-L3

Value group Generator Related FW 1.9.0
Units V
Comm object 9629 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator phase to phase voltage between L2 and L3 phases.

6 back to List of values

Generator Voltage L2-N

Value group Generator Related FW 1.9.0
Units V
Comm object 8193 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator voltage on phase 2.

6 back to List of values

Generator Voltage L3-L1

Value group Generator Related FW 1.9.0
Units V
Comm object 9630 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator phase to phase voltage between L3 and L1 phases.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 372

 Generator Voltage L3-N
Value group Generator Related FW 1.9.0
Units V
Comm object 8194 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator voltage on phase 3.

6 back to List of values

Nominal Current
Value group Generator Related FW 1.9.0
Units A
Comm object 9978 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator nominal current.

6 back to List of values

Nominal Power
Value group Generator Related FW 1.9.0
Units V
Comm object 9018 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator nominal power.

6 back to List of values

Nominal Voltage
Value group Generator Related FW 1.9.0
Units V
Comm object 9917 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator nominal voltage.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 373

 Group: Load
Load A L1
Value group Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units A
Comm object 8198 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load current phase L1.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load A L2
Value group Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units A
Comm object 8199 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load current phase L2.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load A L3
Value group Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units A
Comm object 8200 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load current phase L3.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load Characteristic
Value group Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 8395 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Character of the load. “L” means inductive load, “C” is capacitive and “R” is resistive load (power factor = 1).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 374

 Load Characteristic L1
Value group Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 8626 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Character of the generator load in the L1 phase. “L” means inductive load, “C” is capacitive and “R” is
resistive load (power factor = 1).

6 back to List of values

Load Characteristic L2
Value group Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 8627 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Character of the generator load in the L2 phase. “L” means inductive load, “C” is capacitive and “R” is
resistive load (power factor = 1).

6 back to List of values

Load Characteristic L3
Value group Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 8628 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Character of the generator load in the L3 phase. “L” means inductive load, “C” is capacitive and “R” is
resistive load (power factor = 1).

6 back to List of values

Load kVA
Value group Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units kVA
Comm object 8565 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load apparent power.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 375

 Load kVA L1
Value group Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units kVA
Comm object 8530 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load apparent power L1.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load kVA L2
Value group Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units kVA
Comm object 8531 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load apparent power L2.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load kVA L3
Value group Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units kVA
Comm object 8532 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load apparent power L3.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load kVAr
Value group Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units kVAr
Comm object 8203 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load reactive power.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 376

 Load kVAr L1
Value group Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units kVAr
Comm object 8527 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load reactive power in phase L1.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load kVAr L2
Value group Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units kVAr
Comm object 8528 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load reactive power in phase L2.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load kVAr L3
Value group Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units kVAr
Comm object 8529 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load reactive power in phase L3.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load kW
Value group Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units kW
Comm object 8202 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load active power.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 377

 Load kW L1
Value group Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units kW
Comm object 8524 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load active power in phase L1.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load kW L2
Value group Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units kW
Comm object 8525 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load active power in phase L2.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load kW L3
Value group Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units kW
Comm object 8526 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Load active power in phase L3.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Load Power Factor

Load Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 8204 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator power factor.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 378

 Load Power Factor L1
Load Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 8533 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator power factor in phase L1.

6 back to List of values

Load Power Factor L2

Load Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 8534 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator power factor in phase L2.

6 back to List of values

Load Power Factor L3

Load Load Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 8535 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator power factor in phase L3.

6 back to List of values

Group: Mains
Mains Frequency
Value group Mains Related FW 1.9.0
Units Hz
Comm object 8211 Related applications AMF
Description
Frequency of mains.

6 back to List of values

Mains Voltage L1-L2

Value group Mains Related FW 1.9.0
Units V
Comm object 9631 Related applications AMF
Description
Mains phase to phase voltage between L1 and L2 phases.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 379

 Mains Voltage L1-N
Value group Mains Related FW 1.9.0
Units V
Comm object 8195 Related applications AMF
Description
Mains voltage on phase 1.

6 back to List of values

Mains Voltage L2-L3

Value group Mains Related FW 1.9.0
Units V
Comm object 9632 Related applications AMF
Description
Mains phase to phase voltage between L2 and L3 phases.

6 back to List of values

Mains Voltage L2-N

Value group Mains Related FW 1.9.0
Units V
Comm object 8196 Related applications AMF
Description
Mains voltage on phase 2.

6 back to List of values

Mains Voltage L3-L1

Value group Mains Related FW 1.9.0
Units V
Comm object 9633 Related applications AMF
Description
Mains phase to phase voltage between L3 and L1 phases.

6 back to List of values

Mains Voltage L3-N

Value group Mains Related FW 1.9.0
Units V
Comm object 8197 Related applications AMF
Description
Mains voltage on phase 3.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 380

 Group: Controler I/O
Analog Input 1
Value group Controler I/O Related FW 1.9.0
Units Configurable
Comm object 9151 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is the value of the analog input 1 of the controller.

6 back to List of values

Analog Input 2
Value group Controler I/O Related FW 1.9.0
Units Configurable
Comm object 9152 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is the value of the analog input 2 of the controller.

6 back to List of values

Analog Input 3
Value group Controler I/O Related FW 1.9.0
Units Configurable
Comm object 9153 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is the value of the analog input 3 of the controller.

6 back to List of values

Battery Volts
Value group Controler I/O Related FW 1.9.0
Units V
Comm object 8213 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Controller supply voltage.

6 back to List of values

Binary Inputs
Value group Controler I/O Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 8235 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of the binary inputs of the controller.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 381

 Binary Outputs
Value group Controler I/O Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 8239 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of the binary outputs of the controller.

6 back to List of values

D+
Value group Controler I/O Related FW 1.9.0
Units V
Comm object 10603 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
D+ terminal voltage.

6 back to List of values

Group: Statistics
Genset kVArh
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.9.0
Units kVArh
Comm object 8539 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Counter of gen-set reactive power.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Genset kWh
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.9.0
Units kWh
Comm object 8205 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Counter of gen-set active power.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 382

 Mains kVArh
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.9.0
Units kVArh
Comm object 11026 Related applications AMF
Description
Counter of mains reactive power.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Mains kWh
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.9.0
Units kWh
Comm object 11025 Related applications AMF
Description
Counter of mains active power.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of values

Maintenance 1
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.9.0
Units hours
Comm object 11616 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Countdown until next maintenance 1. Initial value can be set in Maintenance Timer 1 (page 211).

6 back to List of values

Maintenance 2
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.9.0
Units hours
Comm object 11617 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Countdown until next maintenance 2. Initial value can be set in Maintenance Timer 2 (page 212).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 383

 Maintenance 3
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.9.0
Units hours
Comm object 11618 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Countdown until next maintenance 3. Initial value can be set in Maintenance Timer 3 (page 212).

6 back to List of values

Num E-Stops
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 11195 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Emergency stop alarms counter.

6 back to List of values

Num Starts
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 8207 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Engine start commands counter. The counter is increased by 1 even if the particular start command will take
more than one attempt.

6 back to List of values

Pulse Counter 1
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.9.0
Units -
Comm object 10986 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is the value of PULSE COUNTER 1 (PAGE 439) function.

6 back to List of values

Pulse Counter 2
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.9.0
Units -
Comm object 10987 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is the value of PULSE COUNTER 2 (PAGE 440) function.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 384

 Running Hours
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.9.0
Units hours
Comm object 8206 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Engine operation hours counter. The engine hours are incremented in the controller while the engine is
running.

6 back to List of values

Shutdowns
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 11196 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Shutdown alarms counter. This counter counts all occurrences of a shutdown alarm, not only real shutdowns
of the gen-set, i.e. the counter is increased by 2 if two shutdown alarms appear simultaneously.

6 back to List of values

Group: IL Info
Application
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 8480 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The value contains actual application in controller.

6 back to List of values

Breaker State
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 9245 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The value contains actual “breaker state” message which is shown on the main screen of the controller.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 385

 Connection Type
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 12944 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The text of this value represents the connection type which is adjusted in setpoint Connection type (page
175).

6 back to List of values

Engine State
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 9244 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The value contains actual “engine state” message which is shown on the main screen of the controller.

6 back to List of values

FW Branch
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 8707 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The value contains actual branch of firmware in controller.

6 back to List of values

FW Version
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 24339 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Major and minor firmware version number.

6 back to List of values

ID String
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 24501 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Name of controller which is used in InteliConfig in command bar.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 386

 Password Decode
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 24202 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This value contains a number which can be used for retrieving a lost password. Send this number together
with the controller serial number to your distributor if you have lost your password.

6 back to List of values

SPI Module A
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 14447 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The name of plug-in module which is inserted in slot A.

6 back to List of values

Timer Text
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 10040 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The value contains the numeric code of the “Current process timer” text which is shown on the main screen
of the controller.
The assignment of texts to the codes can be obtained using InteliConfig. Open any connection (also offline
with a previously saved archive) and go to the Tools ribbon -> Generate CFG image (all). The resulting file
will contain the assignment of texts to the codes.

6 back to List of values

Timer Value
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.9.0
Units [HH:MM:SS]
Comm object 14147 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The value contains the "Current process timer" value which is shown on the main screen of the controller.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 387

 Group: Log Bout
Log Bout 1
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 9143 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 2
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 9144 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 3
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 9145 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 4
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 9146 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 5
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 9147 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 388

 Log Bout 6
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 9148 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 7
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 9149 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 8
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 9150 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 9
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 11896 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 10
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 11897 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 389

 Log Bout 11
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 11898 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 12
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 11899 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Group: CM-GPRS
Connection Type
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24146 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The type of data connection.

6 back to List of values

Cell Diag Code

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24288 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Diagnostic code for the CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS module.

GSM Diag Code – Common list of diagnostic codes for cellular modules
Code Description
0 OK. No error.
1 Not possible to hang up.
2 Modul is switched off

InteliLite Global Guide 390

 3 Module is switched on
4 Module – error in initialization
5 Module – not possible to set the APN
6 Module – not possible to connect to GPRS network
7 Module – not possible to retrieve IP address
8 Module – not accepted DNS IP address
9 Error in modem detection
10 Error in initialization of analog modem
SIM card is locked (Possibly PIN code required, PIN needs to be deactivated) or
11
unknown status of SIM locking
12 No GSM signal
13 Not possible to read the SIM card parameters
GSM modem did not accepted particular initialization command, possibly caused by
14
locked SIM card
15 Unknown modem
16 Bad answer to complement initialization string
17 Not possible to read GSM signal strength
18 CDMA modem not detected
19 No CDMA network
20 Unsuccessful registration to CDMA network
21 SIMCom/ME909s: can´t read FW version
22 SIMCom: GSM signal not found
23 SIMCom: can´t detect module speed
24 SIMCom: HW reset issued
25 PUK is required
26 Error of SIM card detected
27 ME909s: can't set module bps
28 ME909s: can't set link configuration
29 ME909s: can't do power-off
30 ME909s: can't do power-on
31 ME909s: can't do hardware reset
32 ME909s: ME909s not started
33 ME909s: switch off issued
34 ME909s: switch on issued
35 ME909s: HW reset issued
36 ME909s: can't switch echo off
37 ME909s: can't find out state of registration
38 ME909s: GSM signal not found
39 ME909s: no SIM memory for SMS

InteliLite Global Guide 391

 40 ME909s: waiting for registration
41 Can't read operator name
42 ME909s: can't set flow control
43 APN not typed
255 Only running communication is needed to indicate

6 back to List of values

Cell ErrorRate
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS (4G part)
Units %
Comm object 24300 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This value contains information about relative quality of the cellular signal received by the CM-GPRS module
or by CM-4G-GPS module. The lower value means higher quality of signal.

6 back to List of values

Cell Signal Lev

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS (4G part)
Units %
Comm object 24302 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This value contains information about relative strength of the cellular signal received by the CM-GPRS
module or by CM-4G-GPS module. It is a relative value helping to find the best signal and for troubleshooting
cases.

6 back to List of values

Cell Status
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24290 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The text of this value represents the status of the GSM modem.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 392

 Operator
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24147 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The name of operator which to SIM card is connected.
Note: If roaming service is used then prefix "R" is added before the name of operator.

6 back to List of values

Group: CM-4G-GPS
Connection Type
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24146 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The type of data connection.

6 back to List of values

Cell Diag Code

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24288 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Diagnostic code for the CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS module.

GSM Diag Code – Common list of diagnostic codes for cellular modules
Code Description
0 OK. No error.
1 Not possible to hang up.
2 Modul is switched off
3 Module is switched on
4 Module – error in initialization
5 Module – not possible to set the APN
6 Module – not possible to connect to GPRS network
7 Module – not possible to retrieve IP address
8 Module – not accepted DNS IP address

InteliLite Global Guide 393

 9 Error in modem detection
10 Error in initialization of analog modem
SIM card is locked (Possibly PIN code required, PIN needs to be deactivated) or
11
unknown status of SIM locking
12 No GSM signal
13 Not possible to read the SIM card parameters
GSM modem did not accepted particular initialization command, possibly caused by
14
locked SIM card
15 Unknown modem
16 Bad answer to complement initialization string
17 Not possible to read GSM signal strength
18 CDMA modem not detected
19 No CDMA network
20 Unsuccessful registration to CDMA network
21 SIMCom/ME909s: can´t read FW version
22 SIMCom: GSM signal not found
23 SIMCom: can´t detect module speed
24 SIMCom: HW reset issued
25 PUK is required
26 Error of SIM card detected
27 ME909s: can't set module bps
28 ME909s: can't set link configuration
29 ME909s: can't do power-off
30 ME909s: can't do power-on
31 ME909s: can't do hardware reset
32 ME909s: ME909s not started
33 ME909s: switch off issued
34 ME909s: switch on issued
35 ME909s: HW reset issued
36 ME909s: can't switch echo off
37 ME909s: can't find out state of registration
38 ME909s: GSM signal not found
39 ME909s: no SIM memory for SMS
40 ME909s: waiting for registration
41 Can't read operator name
42 ME909s: can't set flow control
43 APN not typed
255 Only running communication is needed to indicate

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 394

 Cell ErrorRate
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS (4G part)
Units %
Comm object 24300 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This value contains information about relative quality of the cellular signal received by the CM-GPRS module
or by CM-4G-GPS module. The lower value means higher quality of signal.

6 back to List of values

Cell Signal Lev

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS (4G part)
Units %
Comm object 24302 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This value contains information about relative strength of the cellular signal received by the CM-GPRS
module or by CM-4G-GPS module. It is a relative value helping to find the best signal and for troubleshooting
cases.

6 back to List of values

Cell Status
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24290 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The text of this value represents the status of the GSM modem.

6 back to List of values

Operator
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.9.0
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24147 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The name of operator which to SIM card is connected.
Note: If roaming service is used then prefix "R" is added before the name of operator.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 395

 Group: CM-Ethernet
Current DNS
Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 24181 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Current domain name server.

6 back to List of values

ETH Interface Status

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 24180 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Current status of ethernet communication.

6 back to List of values

Current Gateway
Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 24182 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Current gateway address.

6 back to List of values

Current IP Address
Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 24184 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Current IP address of the controller.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 396

 Last Email Result
Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 24332 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Result of last email, which was sent by controller.

Code Description
0 Email was successfully sent.
2 It is not possible to establish connection with SMTP server.
3 SMTP server is not ready for communication.
8 HELO command was refused.
9 EHLO command was refused.
11 AUTH LOGIN command was refused.
12 Wrong user name.
13 Wrong password.
14 MAIL FROM command was refused.
15 RCPT TO command was refused.
16 DATA command was refused.
17 Sending of email failed.
20 QUIT command was refused.
25 It is impossible to create data for command DATA.
26 It is impossible to read data for command DATA.
27 Email address can’t be read.
30 SMTP server address translation error (from DNS server).
31 Error reading email content data (24327).

6 back to List of values

MAC Address
Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 24333 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Current MAC address of the controller ethernet interface.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 397

 Current Subnet Mask
Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 24183 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Current subnet mask.

6 back to List of values

Group: Date/Time
Time
Value group Date/Time Related FW 1.9.0
Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 24554 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Shows setup time.

6 back to List of values

Date
Value group Date/Time Related FW 1.9.0
Units DD.MM.YYYY
Comm object 24553 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Shows setup date.

6 back to List of values

Group: Plug-In I/O

EM BIO A
Value group Plug-In I/O Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 14291 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Binary inputs from extension module in slot A.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 398

 Group: PLC
PLC Resource 1
Value group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 10504 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 2
Value group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 10505 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 3
Value group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 10506 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 4
Value group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 10507 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 5
Value group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 10508 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 399

 PLC Resource 6
Value group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 10509 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 7
Value group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 10510 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 8
Value group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 10511 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 1
Value group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 10424 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 2
Value group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 10425 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 400

 PLC-BOUT 3
Value group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 10426 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 4
Value group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 10427 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 5
Value group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 10428 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 6
Value group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 10429 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 7
Value group PLC Related FW 1.9.0
Units [-]
Comm object 10430 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite Global Guide 401

8.1.3 Logical binary inputs
What Logical binary inputs are:
Logical binary inputs are inputs for binary values and functions.

Alphabetical groups of Logical binary inputs

LBI: A 404
LBI: B 405
LBI: C 429
LBI: D 431
LBI: E 431
LBI: F 432
LBI: G 433
LBI: H 434
LBI: I 435
LBI: L 435
LBI: M 437
LBI: N 439
LBI: O 439
LBI: P 439
LBI: R 440
LBI: S 443

For full list of Logical binary inputs go to the chapter Logical binary inputs alphabetically (page 403).

InteliLite Global Guide 402

 Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Alternate Config 2 404 BIN Protection 33 421 Not Used 439

Alternate Config 3 404 BIN Protection 34 422 Oil Pressure 439
AMF Function 404 BIN Protection 35 422 Pulse Counter 1 439
AMF Start Block 404 BIN Protection 36 423 Pulse Counter 2 440
Battery Charger 405 BIN Protection 37 423 Regeneration Inhib 440
BIN Protection 1 405 BIN Protection 38 424 Remote AUTO 440
BIN Protection 02 406 BIN Protection 39 424 Remote Ctrl Lock 440
BIN Protection 03 406 BIN Protection 40 425 Remote MAN 441
BIN Protection 04 407 BIN Protection 41 425 Remote OFF 441
BIN Protection 05 407 BIN Protection 42 426 Remote Start/Stop 442
BIN Protection 06 408 BIN Protection 43 426 Rem TEST On Load 442
BIN Protection 07 408 BIN Protection 44 427 Remote TEST 443
BIN Protection 08 409 BIN Protection 45 427 Sd Override 443
BIN Protection 09 409 BIN Protection 46 428 Start Button 443
BIN Protection 10 410 BIN Protection 47 428 Stop Button 443
BIN Protection 11 410 BIN Protection 48 429
BIN Protection 12 411 Choke Inhibit 429
BIN Protection 13 411 Coolant Temp 430
BIN Protection 14 412 Dark Mode 431
BIN Protection 15 412 ECU Key Switch 431
BIN Protection 16 413 ECU Speed Down 431
BIN Protection 17 413 ECU Speed Up 431
BIN Protection 18 414 Emergency MAN 432
BIN Protection 19 414 Emergency Stop 432
BIN Protection 20 415 Fault Reset Button 432
BIN Protection 21 415 Force Regeneration 433
BIN Protection 22 416 Fuel Level 433
BIN Protection 23 416 GCB Button 433
BIN Protection 24 417 GCB Feedback 434
BIN Protection 25 417 Horn Reset Button 434
BIN Protection 26 418 Idle Speed 435
BIN Protection 27 418 Lang Selection 1 435
BIN Protection 28 419 Lang Selection 2 436
BIN Protection 29 419 Lang Selection 3 436
BIN Protection 30 420 Mains Fail Block 437
BIN Protection 31 420 MCB Button 437
BIN Protection 32 421 MCB Feedback 438

InteliLite Global Guide 403

 LBI: A
Alternate Config 2
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 859
Description
This binary input can switch between configuration sets. When this binary input is active, setpoints in
Alternate Config group are switched to the second set (setpoints with number 2).
IMPORTANT: If LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 462) is used, change of alternate configuration
can be made only in prestart phase. So prestart has to be set up for enough long time.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Alternate Config 3
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 860
Description
This binary input can switch between configuration sets. When this binary input is active, setpoints in
Alternate Config group are switched to the third set (setpoints with number 3).
IMPORTANT: If LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 462) is used, change of alternate configuration
can be made only in prestart phase. So prestart has to be set up for enough long time.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

AMF Function
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 692
Description
This binary input can switch controller function between AMF and MRS.
Note: Binary input “AMF function” has higher priority than the setpoint Operation Mode (page 181) in
Basic settings.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

AMF Start Block

Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 211
Description
This binary input can allow or block the AMF start. In case of running gen-set in AUTO mode gen-set goes to
cooling procedure and stops.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 404

 LBI: B
Battery Charger
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 623
Description
When binary input is active and its delay Battery Charger Fail Delay (page 213) is out of time then alarm
Battery Charger Fail (page 526) is activated, written into history log and logical binary output AL BATTERY
CHARGER (PAGE 448) is activated.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 1
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9999
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 405

 BIN Protection 02
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9998
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 03
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9997
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 406

 BIN Protection 04
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9996
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 05
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9995
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 407

 BIN Protection 06
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9994
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 07
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9993
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 408

 BIN Protection 08
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9992
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 09
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9991
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 409

 BIN Protection 10
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9990
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 11
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9989
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 410

 BIN Protection 12
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9988
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 13
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9987
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 411

 BIN Protection 14
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9986
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 15
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9985
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 412

 BIN Protection 16
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9984
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 17
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9983
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 413

 BIN Protection 18
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9982
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 19
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9981
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 414

 BIN Protection 20
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9980
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 21
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9979
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 415

 BIN Protection 22
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9978
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 23
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9977
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 416

 BIN Protection 24
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9976
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 25
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9975
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 417

 BIN Protection 26
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9974
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 27
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9973
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 418

 BIN Protection 28
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9972
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 29
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9971
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 419

 BIN Protection 30
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9970
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 31
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9969
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 420

 BIN Protection 32
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9968
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 33
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9967
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 421

 BIN Protection 34
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9966
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 35
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9965
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 422

 BIN Protection 36
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9964
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 37
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9963
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 423

 BIN Protection 38
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9962
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 39
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9961
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 424

 BIN Protection 40
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9960
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 41
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9959
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 425

 BIN Protection 42
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9958
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 43
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9957
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 426

 BIN Protection 44
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9956
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 45
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9955
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 427

 BIN Protection 46
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9954
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BIN Protection 47
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9953
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 428

 BIN Protection 48
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9952
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: C
Choke Inhibit
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 946
Description
Logical binary input CHOKE INHIBIT prevent Choke functionality when logical binary output CHOKE (PAGE
460) is activated. If CHOKE INHIBIT is activated when CHOKE LBO is active, CHOKE LBO is deactivated
immediately and vice versa if LBI CHOKE INHIBIT is deactivated and LBO CHOKE should be active then is
activated.

InteliLite Global Guide 429

 6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Coolant Temp
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 625
Description
Binary input for COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 511) protection.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 430

 LBI: D
Dark Mode
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 930
Description
This binary input activates function of dark mode. It means that backlight of display is turn of (information on
controller screens are not affected) and LEDs (Mains, Generator, Load, Breakers, etc.) are turn off (LEDs
don’t react on normal condition of their activation and deactivation).
Note: After deactivation of dark mode, backlight of display is turned on and than behaves normally.

Note: After deactivation of dark mode, Front Face status LEDs are turned on due to current situation of
gen-set.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: E
ECU Key Switch
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 951
Description
This binary input is used to switch on ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 462), when engine start is not requested. It
is intended to enable engine values reading, when engine doesn't run.
When this binary input is active, binary output ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 462) is active too.
When this binary input is inactive, function of ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 462) is not affected.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ECU Speed Down

Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 164
Description
This binary input is used to set the setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment (page 215) by binary inputs. When the
LBI is activated the setpoint is decreased by 2%.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ECU Speed Up
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 165
Description
This binary input is used to set the setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment (page 215) by binary inputs. When the
LBI is activated the setpoint is increase by 2%.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 431

 Emergency MAN
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 45
Description
This input is designed to allow the gen-set or breakers to be controlled externally, not by the controller. This
feature can be useful in case of some failure, which disables the gen-set or breakers to be controlled by the
controller, but the gen-set itself is operational.
The controller behaves in the following way:
Shows the text EmergMan in the engine status on the main screen.
Stops all functions regarding the gen-set or breaker control, deactivates all outputs related to it.
Stop Fail alarm is not being evaluated and stop solenoid is not activated if nonzero speed is detected.
When the input is deactivated, the controller takes control according to the situation in the moment of
deactivation, i.e. the gen-set remains running loaded if it was running and GCB was closed in the
moment the input was deactivated.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Emergency Stop
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 40
Description
The shutdown procedure will start immediately when this input is activated. Input is inverted (NC = normaly
closed) in default configuration.
Note: In case of controller hardware or software fail, safe stop of the engine doesn’t have to be ensured.
To back-up the Emergency Stop function it is recommended to connect separate circuit for
disconnection of Fuel Solenoid and Starter signals.

For more detail see chapter recommended wiring.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: F
Fault Reset Button
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 191
Description

Binary input has the same function as Fault Reset button on the InteliLite front panel.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 432

 Force Regeneration
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 680
Description
When this binary input is activated, the controller send request for force regeneration of DPF (diesel
particulate filter) to ECU.
Note: ECU with Tier IV support is required for proper functionality.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Fuel Level
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 626
Description
Binary input for FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 512) protection.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: G
GCB Button
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 193
Description

Binary input has the same function as GCB button on the InteliLite front panel. It is evaluated in MAN
mode only.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 433

 GCB Feedback
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 63
Description
Use this input for indication whether the generator circuit breaker is open or closed.

Image 8.80 GCB Feedback 1

Image 8.81 GCB Feedback 2

Note: InteliLite controller can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: H
Horn Reset Button
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 192
Description

Binary input has the same function as Horn reset button on the InteliLite front panel.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 434

 LBI: I
Idle Speed
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 624
Description
This binary input changes cooling speed from nominal to idle.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: L
Lang Selection 1
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 107
Description
Use this binary input with binary input LANG SELECTION 2 (PAGE 436) and LANG SELECTION 3 (PAGE 436) to
choose required language of controller. The system is based on binary numbers.

Binary input Binary number Active language

Language Selection 1 is active 1 First language (English)
LANG SELECTION 2 (PAGE 436) is active 2 Second language
Language Selection 1 and LANG SELECTION
3 Third language
2 (PAGE 436) are active
LANG SELECTION 3 (PAGE 436) is active 4 Fourth language
Language Selection 1 and LANG SELECTION
5 Fifth language
3 (PAGE 436) are active

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 435

 Lang Selection 2
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 108
Description
Use this binary input with binary input LANG SELECTION 1 (PAGE 435) and LANG SELECTION 3 (PAGE 436) to
choose required language of controller. The system is based on binary numbers.

Binary input Binary number Active language

LANG SELECTION 1 (PAGE 435) is active 1 First language (English)
Lang Selection 2 is active 2 Second language
LANG SELECTION 1 (PAGE 435) and Lang
3 Third language
Selection 2 are active
LANG SELECTION 3 (PAGE 436) is active 4 Fourth language
LANG SELECTION 1 (PAGE 435) and LANG
5 Fifth language
SELECTION 3 (PAGE 436) are active

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Lang Selection 3
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 109
Description
Use this binary input with binary input LANG SELECTION 1 (PAGE 435) and LANG SELECTION 2 (PAGE 436) to
choose required language of controller. The system is based on binary numbers.

Binary input Binary number Active language

Language Selection 1 is active 1 First language (English)
LANG SELECTION 2 (PAGE 436) is active 2 Second language
Language Selection 1 and LANG SELECTION
3 Third language
2 (PAGE 436) are active
Lang Selection 3 (page 1) is active 4 Fourth language
LANG SELECTION 1 (PAGE 435) and Lang
5 Fifth language
Selection 3 (page 1) are active

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 436

 LBI: M
Mains Fail Block
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 622
Description
If the input is closed, the automatic start of the gen-set at Mains failure is blocked. In case of running gen-set
in AUTO mode, timer Mains Return Delay (page 222) is started and when it elapses GCB is opened, gen-
set goes to cooling procedure and stops. When GCB is opened after Transfer Delay (page 223) the MCB is
closed.
Note: This input simulates healthy Mains.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

MCB Button
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 194
Description

This binary input has the same function as MCB button on the InteliLite front panel. It is evaluated in
MAN mode only.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 437

 MCB Feedback
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 65
Description
Use this input for indication whether the mains circuit breaker is open or closed.

Image 8.82 MCB Feedback 1

Image 8.83 MCB Feedback 2

Note: InteliLite controller can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 438

 LBI: N
Not Used
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 184
Description
Binary input has no function. Use this configuration when binary input is not used.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: O
Oil Pressure
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 43
Description
Binary input for OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 514) protection.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

IMPORTANT: This binary input is also used for evaluating engine running condition.

Example: Normally close connection - when LBI is closed then oil pressure is OK and is higher than
starting oil pressure.

Note: In case that you want to use binary input of oil pressure sensor just for protection please use one
of the BIN PROTECTION 1 (PAGE 405).

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: P
Pulse Counter 1
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 87
Description
This is the input of the Pulse Counter 1 function. The module counts pulses at the input and if the input
pulses counter reaches value given by the setpoint Conversion Coefficient Pulse 1 (page 214) the
counter value Pulse Counter 1 (page 384) is increased by 1 and input pulses counter is reset to 0. Both
counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 439

 Pulse Counter 2
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 88
Description
This is the input of the Pulse Counter 2 function. The module counts pulses at the input and if the input
pulses counter reaches value given by the setpoint Conversion Coefficient Pulse 2 (page 214) the
counter value Pulse Counter 2 (page 384) is increased by 0,1 and input pulses counter is reset to 0. Both
counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: R
Regeneration Inhib
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 679
Description
When this binary input is activated, the controller sends request to inhibit regeneration of DPF (diesel
particulate filter) to ECU.
Note: ECU with Tier IV support is required for proper functionality.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Remote AUTO
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 620
Description
The controller is switched to the AUTO mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
binary input is closed. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.
This binary input has the lowest priority from Remote OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST binary inputs
Remote control priority:
Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Remote Ctrl Lock
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 4
Description
If the input is active, the controller will not accept any actions regarding the system control – e.g. writing of
commands and setpoint changes via remote communication interfaces.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 440

 Remote MAN
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 618
Description
The controller is switched to the MAN mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
binary input is closed. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.
Remote control priority:
Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Remote OFF
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 617
Description
The controller is switched to the OFF mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
binary input is closed. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.
Remote control priority:
Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 441

 Remote Start/Stop
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 38
Description
Use this input to start and stop the gen-set in AUTO mode.
Note: If the binary input Remote Start/Stop is active and engine is running and mains failure occurs, the
MCB breaker opens, after Transfer Delay (page 223) the GCB breaker is closed. Once the mains is
OK, the Mains Return Delay (page 222) elapses and the GCB breaker is opened. Then after Transfer
Delay (page 223) is MCB breaker closed. Gen-set remains running as long as binary input Rem
Start/Stop is active. For more details see timing diagram below.

Image 8.84 Remote Start/Stop

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Rem TEST On Load

Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 61
Description
When input is closed, the controller automatically transfers load from the mains to the gen-set. Load is
automatically transferred back to the mains when any gen-set shut down protection activates.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 442

 Remote TEST
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 621
Description
The controller is switched to the TEST mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
binary input is closed. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.
Remote control priority:
Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: S
Sd Override
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 44
Description
If this input is active, all alarms except Emergency Stop and Overspeed are suppressed. The suppressed
alarms will be displayed in the alarm list, but they will not take effect regarding the gen-set control.
Note: Sd Override (page 443) is indicated in the alarm list if Sd Override mode is active to inform the
operator that the engine is not protected.

IMPORTANT: MISUSE OF THIS INPUT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE GEN-SET!

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Start Button
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 189
Description

Binary input has the same function as Start Button on the InteliLite front panel. It is evaluated in MAN
mode only.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Stop Button
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 190
Description

Binary input has the same function as Stop Button on the InteliLite front panel. It is evaluated in MAN
Mode only.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 443

8.1.4 Logical binary outputs
What Logical binary outputs are:
Logical binary outputs are outputs for binary values and functions.

Alphabetical groups of Logical binary outputs

LBO: A 446
LBO: B 456
LBO: C 460
LBO: E 461
LBO: F 464
LBO: G 465
LBO: H 472
LBO: I 473
LBO: M 474
LBO: N 480
LBO: P 481
LBO: R 482
LBO: S 484
LBO: V 487

For full list of Logical binary outputs go to the chapter Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 445).

InteliLite Global Guide 444

 Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Air Valves 446 AL Overload BOC 454 Generator Healthy 470

AL AIN 1 Sd+BOC 446 AL Overload Wrn 454 Glow Plugs 470
AL AIN 1 Wrn 446 AL Overspeed 454 Heartbeat 472
AL AIN 2 Sd+BOC 447 AL Start Fail 454 Horn 472
AL AIN 2 Wrn 447 AL Stop Fail 454 Idle/Nominal 473
AL AIN 3 Sd+BOC 447 AL Underspeed 454 Ignition On 473
AL AIN 3 Wrn 447 Alarm 455 Mains Healthy 474
AL Battery Flat 447 ATT DEF Level Lamp 455 Manual Ready 474
AL Battery Charger 448 ATT Filter Lamp 455 MCB Close/Open 474
AL Battery Overvoltage 448 ATT HEST Lamp 455 MCB OFF Coil 476
AL Battery Undervoltage 448 ATT Inhibited Lamp 455 MCB ON Coil 477
AL Battery Voltage 448 ATT SCR Error Lamp 456 MCB UV Coil 478
AL Common BOC 448 BIN 1 Status 456 Mode AUTO 479
AL Common Fls 449 BIN 2 Status 457 Mode MAN 480
AL Common Sd 449 BIN 3 Status 457 Mode OFF 480
AL Common Wrn 449 BIN 4 Status 458 Mode TEST 480
AL CoolantTemp Low 449 BIN 5 Status 458 Not In AUTO 480
AL CoolantTemp Sd 450 BIN 6 Status 459 Not Used 480
AL CoolantTemp Wrn 450 BIN 7 Status 459 Prestart 481
AL Fuel Level Sd 450 Choke 460 Ready To AMF 482
AL Fuel Level Wrn 450 Cooling Pump 460 Ready To Load 482
AL Gen Freq Wrn 450 Cooling 461 Ready 483
AL Gen Frequency 451 ECU Communic Error 461 Regen Needed 483
AL Gen Overfrequency 451 ECU Communic OK 461 Running 483
AL Gen Overvoltage 451 ECU Power Relay 462 Sd Override 484
AL Gen Underfrequency 451 ECU Red Lamp 462 Starter 484
AL Gen Undervoltage 451 ECU Run Stop 463 Still Log 0 485
AL Gen Voltage Wrn 452 ECU Wait To Start 463 Still Log 1 485
AL Gen Voltage 452 ECU Yellow Lamp 463 Stop Pulse 485
AL Mains Fail 452 Exercise Timer 1 463 Stop Solenoid 485
AL Mains Frequency 452 Fault Reset 464 Supplying Load 487
AL Mains Voltage 452 Frequency Select 464 Swap Start 487
AL Maintenance 1 453 Fuel Solenoid 464 Ventilation 487
AL Maintenance 2 453 GCB Close/Open 465 Ventilation Off Pulse 487
AL Maintenance 3 453 GCB OFF Coil 467 Ventilation On Pulse 488
AL Oil Press Sd 453 GCB ON Coil 468
AL Oil Press Wrn 453 GCB UV Coil 468

InteliLite Global Guide 445

 LBO: A
Air Valves
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1247
Description
This output closes together with binary output PRESTART (PAGE 481) and opens after the engine is stopped
or in case that engine is not ready.

Image 8.85 Air Valves

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL AIN 1 Sd+BOC
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1386
Description
The output is closed when there is the shutdown or BOC alarm from the analog input 1 of the controller
present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL AIN 1 Wrn
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1382
Description
The output is closed when there is the warning alarm from the analog input 1 of the controller present in the
alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 446

 AL AIN 2 Sd+BOC
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1387
Description
The output is closed when there is the shutdown or BOC alarm from the analog input 2 of the controller
present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL AIN 2 Wrn
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1383
Description
The output is closed when there is the warning alarm from the analog input 2 of the controller present in the
alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL AIN 3 Sd+BOC
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1388
Description
The output is closed when there is the shutdown or BOC alarm from the analog input 3 of the controller
present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL AIN 3 Wrn
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1384
Description
The output is closed when there is the warning alarm from the analog input 3 of the controller present in the
alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Battery Flat
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1292
Description
This output is active when the Sd Battery Flat (page 542) or Wrn Battery < Voltage (page 527) alarm is
present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 447

 AL Battery Charger
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1272
Description
This output is active when the Battery Charger Fail (page 526) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t
confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Battery Overvoltage
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1995
Description
This output is active when the Wrn Battery > Voltage (page 527) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Battery Undervoltage
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1994
Description
This output is active when the Wrn Battery < Voltage (page 527) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Battery Voltage
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1293
Description
This output is active when the Wrn Battery > Voltage (page 527) or Wrn Battery < Voltage (page 527)
alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Common BOC
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9
Description
Output closes when any BOC alarm appears.
The output opens, if:
No BOC alarm is active and

Fault reset button is pressed

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 448

 AL Common Fls
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 6
Description
Output closes when any sensor fail alarm appears.
The output opens, if:
No sensor fail alarm is active and

Fault reset button is pressed

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Common Sd
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 4
Description
Output closes when any shutdown alarm appears.
The output opens, if:
No shutdown alarm is active and

Fault reset button is pressed

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Common Wrn
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 3
Description
Output closes when any warning alarm appears.
The output opens, if:
No warning alarm is active and

Fault reset button is pressed

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL CoolantTemp Low
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1295
Description
The output is closed when there is the Wrn Coolant Temperature Low (page 528) alarm from the
COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 511) in the alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 445)

InteliLite Global Guide 449

 AL CoolantTemp Sd
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1421
Description
The output is closed when there is the shutdown or BOC alarm from the COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 511) in the
alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 445)

AL CoolantTemp Wrn
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1420
Description
The output is closed when there is the warning alarm from the COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 511) in the alarmlist or
isn’t confirmed.
Note: Binary output is also active if protection type is set to HistRecOnl and threshold level for history
record is reach.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Fuel Level Sd
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1423
Description
The output is closed when there is the shutdown or BOC alarm from the FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 512) in the
alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Fuel Level Wrn

Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1422
Description
The output is closed when there is the warning alarm from the FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 512) in the alarmlist or isn’t
confirmed.
Note: Binary output is also active if protection type is set to HistRecOnl and threshold level for history
record is reach.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen Freq Wrn

Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1267
Description
This output is active generator frequency warning alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 450

 AL Gen Frequency
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1266
Description
This output is active when at least one generator frequency BOC or Sd alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen Overfrequency
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1264
Description
This output is active when at least one generator overfrequency alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen Overvoltage
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1261
Description
This output is active when at least one generator overvoltage alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen Underfrequency
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1265
Description
This output is active when at least one generator underfrequency alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen Undervoltage
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1262
Description
This output is active when at least one generator undervoltage alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 451

 AL Gen Voltage Wrn
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1289
Description
This output is active when at least one generator voltage warning alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen Voltage
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1263
Description
This output is active when at least one generator voltage BOC or Sd alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Mains Fail
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 197
Description
Output for signaling Mains Failure. This output is active when at least one mains frequency BOC or Sd alarm
or at least one mains voltage BOC or Sd alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Mains Frequency
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 1271
Description
This output is active when at least one mains frequency BOC or Sd alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Mains Voltage
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 1270
Description
This output is active when at least one mains voltage BOC or Sd alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 452

 AL Maintenance 1
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1254
Description
This output is active when the Alarm Maintenance 1 is present in the alarmlist. It means that counter of
maintenance is on zero or the Alarm Maintenance 1 isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Maintenance 2
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1255
Description
This output is active when the Alarm Maintenance 2 is present in the alarmlist. It means that counter of
maintenance is on zero or the Alarm Maintenance 2 isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Maintenance 3
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1256
Description
This output is active when the Alarm Maintenance 3 is present in the alarmlist. It means that counter of
maintenance is on zero or the Alarm Maintenance 3 isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Oil Press Sd
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1419
Description
The output is closed when there is the shutdown alarm from the OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 514) in the alarmlist or
isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Oil Press Wrn

Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1418
Description
The output is closed when there is the warning alarm from the OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 514) in the alarmlist or
isn’t confirmed.
Note: Binary output is also active if protection type is set to HistRecOnl and threshold level for history
record is reach.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 453

 AL Overload BOC
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1268
Description
This output is active when the Sd Overload (page 548) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Overload Wrn
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1269
Description
This output is active when the Wrn Overload (page 535) alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Overspeed
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 779
Description
This output is active when the Sd Overspeed (page 548) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Start Fail
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1291
Description
This output is active when the Sd Start Fail (page 549) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Stop Fail
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 339
Description
This output is active when the Wrn Stop Fail (page 536) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Underspeed
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1296
Description
This output is active when the Sd Underspeed (page 549) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 454

 Alarm
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2
Description
The output is designed to be used as external alarm indication such as a red bulb in the control room etc. The
output is active when at least one unconfirmed alarm is present in the alarmlist and remains active until
confirmation of alarm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ATT DEF Level Lamp

Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2154
Description
This output is active when ATT DEF Level Lamp is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ATT Filter Lamp

Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2152
Description
This output is active when ATT Filter Lamp is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ATT HEST Lamp

Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1373
Description
This output is closed if ECU send signal HEST Lamp. If ECU stop send HEST LAMP signal binary input will
be opened without no matter if alarms in alarmlist are confirmed or not.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ATT Inhibited Lamp

Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2155
Description
This output is active when ATT Inhibited Lamp is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 455

 ATT SCR Error Lamp
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2153
Description
This output is active when ATT SCR Error Lamp is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: B
BIN 1 Status
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1374
Description
This output is closed, when Binary Input 1 is active and open when Binary Input 1 is inactive. When Binary
Input 1 is used for BIN protection function then this output is closed when BIN protection alarm is in
Alarmlist.
Note: When LBI 1 is used like protection, then state of this LBO is connected with this protection e.g.
when LBI is inactive but alarm of protection is not confirm in alarmlist, LBO is still active.

Image 8.86 Binary Input 1 Status

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 456

 BIN 2 Status
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1375
Description
This output is closed, when Binary Input 2 is active and open when Binary Input 2 is inactive. When Binary
Input 2 is used for BIN protection function then this output is closed when BIN protection alarm is in
Alarmlist.
Note: When LBI 2 is used like protection, then state of this LBO is connected with this protection e.g.
when LBI is inactive but alarm of protection is not confirm in alarmlist, LBO is still active.

Image 8.87 Binary Input 2 Status

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

BIN 3 Status
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1376
Description
This output is closed, when Binary Input 3 is active and open when Binary Input 3 is inactive. When Binary
Input 3 is used for BIN protection function then this output is closed when BIN protection alarm is in
Alarmlist.
Note: When LBI 3 is used like protection, then state of this LBO is connected with this protection e.g.
when LBI is inactive but alarm of protection is not confirm in alarmlist, LBO is still active.

Image 8.88 Binary Input 3 Status

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 457

 BIN 4 Status
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1377
Description
This output is closed, when Binary Input 4 is active and open when Binary Input 4 is inactive. When Binary
Input 4 is used for BIN protection function then this output is closed when BIN protection alarm is in
Alarmlist.
Note: When LBI 4 is used like protection, then state of this LBO is connected with this protection e.g.
when LBI is inactive but alarm of protection is not confirm in alarmlist, LBO is still active.

Image 8.89 Binary Input 4 Status

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

BIN 5 Status
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1378
Description
This output is closed, when Binary Input 5 is active and open when Binary Input 5 is inactive. When Binary
Input 5 is used for BIN protection function then this output is closed when BIN protection alarm is in
Alarmlist.
Note: When LBI 5 is used like protection, then state of this LBO is connected with this protection e.g.
when LBI is inactive but alarm of protection is not confirm in alarmlist, LBO is still active.

Image 8.90 Binary Input 5 Status

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 458

 BIN 6 Status
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1379
Description
This output is closed, when Binary Input 6 is active and open when Binary Input 6 is inactive. When Binary
Input 6 is used for BIN protection function then this output is closed when BIN protection alarm is in
Alarmlist.
Note: When LBI 6 is used like protection, then state of this LBO is connected with this protection e.g.
when LBI is inactive but alarm of protection is not confirm in alarmlist, LBO is still active.

Image 8.91 Binary Input 6 Status

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

BIN 7 Status
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1380
Description
This output is closed, when Binary Input 7 is active and open when Binary Input 7 is inactive. When Binary
Input 7 is used for BIN protection function then this output is closed when BIN protection alarm is in
Alarmlist.
Note: When LBI 7 is used like protection, then state of this LBO is connected with this protection e.g.
when LBI is inactive but alarm of protection is not confirm in alarmlist, LBO is still active.

Image 8.92 Binary Input 7 Status

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 459

 LBO: C
Choke
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2091
Description
Logical binary output for choke valve control. Output CHOKE is activated every time when logical binary
output STARTER (PAGE 484) is activated. Output is deactivated when one of these conditions is fulfilled:
Choke Time is elapsed
Generator voltage is higher than Choke Voltage
Logical binary input Choke Inhibit is activated
Or when some of these situations during start occurs:
Any second level alarm
Emergency stop
Stop command
Cranking pause

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Cooling Pump
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 40
Description
This output is dedicated for coolant pump control. It is closed in the moment the gen-set is started and
remains closed until the gen-set is stopped and After Cooling Time (page 201) elapses or the cranking
pause or the Emergency Stop occurs or the controller is switched to OFF mode.

Image 8.93 Cooling Pump

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 460

 Cooling
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 74
Description
The output closes when gen-set is in Cooling state.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: E
ECU Communic Error
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 114
Description
This output is active when an ECU is configured, but the communication with the ECU is not established or
has dropped out.
Note: When ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 462) is not configured, output is evaluated all the time. If ECU
POWER RELAY (PAGE 462) is configured, output is evaluated only when engine is not stop (ECU POWER
RELAY (PAGE 462) is active).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ECU Communic OK
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 347
Description
This output is active when an ECU is configured, connected and the communication with the ECU is
established.
Note: When ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 462) is not configured, output is evaluated all the time. If ECU
POWER RELAY (PAGE 462) is configured, output is evaluated only when engine is not stop (ECU POWER
RELAY (PAGE 462) is active).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 461

 ECU Power Relay
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 116
Description
This output is to be used for control of “keyswitch” input of an ECU. If the particular ECU does not have
keyswitch or a similar input, it can be used for control of DC power for the ECU.
The output closes together with PRESTART (PAGE 481) and remains closed for the entire duration that the
engine is running. It is opened at the moment that the engine comes to a stop (i.e. together with the FUEL
SOLENOID (PAGE 464)).

Image 8.94 ECU Power Relay

IMPORTANT: This LBO also affects evaluation of Sd ECU Communication Fail (page 543) or
Wrn ECU Communication Fail (page 529) alarms. With configured LBO ECU Power Relay,
these alarms are evaluated only when this LBO is active. Without configured LBO ECU
Power Relay, these alarm are evaluated all the time.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ECU Red Lamp

Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 350
Description
This output is active when the ECU sends an active “red lamp” flag, i.e. it has detected a critical malfunction
and the engine should not be operated until a service check is performed. This flag is taken from the DM1
frame on standard J1939 ECUs. Some ECUs provide this flag in their own proprietary frames and some do
not provide the flag at all.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 462

 ECU Run Stop
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 958
Description
Signal for starting and stopping of ECU.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ECU Wait To Start

Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 959
Description
This output is active when ECU Wait To Start Lamp is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ECU Yellow Lamp

Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 349
Description
This output is active when the ECU sends an active “yellow lamp” flag, i.e. it has detected a non-critical
malfunction. This flag is taken from the DM1 frame on standard J1939 ECUs. Some ECUs provide this flag
in their own proprietary frames and some do not provide the flag at all.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Exercise Timer 1
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1250
Description
This is an output from the Exercise timer 1. This output makes it easy to make periodic tests of the gen-set
and its activation depends on the setpoints in the Subgroup: Timer 1 (page 261) subgroup. This output is
active when Timer 1 is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 463

 LBO: F
Fault Reset
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 592
Description
This output provides 1s pulse when:
Fault Reset button is pressed on the controller front facia or
Fault Reset button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
Fault Reset command is received via communication line or
the input FAULT RESET BUTTON is activated.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Frequency Select
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1815
Description
The Frequency select output is opened when Nominal Frequency (Frequency Settings) is equal to 50Hz and
closed when Nominal Frequency (Frequency Settings) is equal to 60Hz.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Fuel Solenoid
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 22
Description
This output controls the fuel solenoid valve.
The output closes before binary output STARTER (PAGE 484).The lead time is adjusted by setpoint Fuel
Solenoid Lead (page 195).

Image 8.95 Fuel Solenoid 1

InteliLite Global Guide 464

 Image 8.96 Fuel Solenoid 2

The output opens when:

Emergency Stop comes
cooled gen-set is stopped
in pause between repeated starts

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: G
GCB Close/Open
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 41
Description
The output controls the generator circuit breaker. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise an alarm is
issued.
Note: InteliLite controllers can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

Image 8.97 GCB Close command

InteliLite Global Guide 465

 Image 8.98 Repeated GCB Close command

Image 8.99 GCB Open command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 466

 GCB OFF Coil
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 43
Description
The output is intended for control of open coil of generator circuit breaker. The output gives a pulse in the
moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until the feedback deactivates, but at least for 5
seconds.

Image 8.100 GCB OFF Coil command

Image 8.101 GCB OFF Coil command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 467

 GCB ON Coil
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 42
Description
The output is intended for control of close coil of generator circuit breaker. The output gives at least 5 second
pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed.

Image 8.102 GCB ON Coil close command

Image 8.103 Repeated GCB ON coil close command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

GCB UV Coil
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 44
Description
The output is intended for control of undervoltage coil of generator circuit breaker. The output is active the

InteliLite Global Guide 468

 whole time when the generator is running. The output is deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the moment the
breaker has to be switched off.

Image 8.104 GCB UV Coil close command

Image 8.105 GCB UV Coil open command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 469

 Generator Healthy
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 77
Description
This output is active when the generator voltage, frequency and voltage unbalance is within limits. It is
deactivated:
immediately when the voltage/frequency/voltage unbalance gets out of limits (when GCB is not
closed)
or
with an appropriate delay after the voltage/frequency/voltage unbalance has got out of limits (when
GCB is closed)

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Glow Plugs
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1252
Description
This output is dedicated for diesel engine only. This output will close for exact time pre-set by setpoint Glow
Plugs Time (page 189) before every starting attempt. The output opens in same time as the STARTER
(PAGE 484) output closes (100 ms after PRESTART (PAGE 481) output opens).

Image 8.106 Glow Plugs

InteliLite Global Guide 470

 When the Glow Plugs Time (page 189) is longer than Cranking Fail Pause (page 187) then the Glow
Plugs Time (page 189) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 187) is long as Cranking Fail Pause (page 187).

Image 8.107 Glow Plugs in Cranking Fail Pause 1

When the Glow Plugs Time (page 189) is shorter than Cranking Fail Pause (page 187) then the Glow
Plugs Time (page 189) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 187) is long as normal Glow Plugs Time (page
189).

Image 8.108 Glow Plugs in Cranking Fail Pause 2

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 471

 LBO: H
Heartbeat
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 81
Description
This output toggles on/off in a period of 500 ms whenever the controller is switched on and functional.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Horn
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1
Description
The output designed to be used for acoustic indication of a newly appeared alarm. The output is activated
each time a new alarm has appeared and remains active until one of the following events occurs:

Fault reset is pressed

Horn reset is pressed

Horn Timeout (page 183) has elapsed

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 472

 LBO: I
Idle/Nominal
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 39
Description
This output is used for switching between idle speed and nominal speed of the engine during the startup
phase, if this feature (input) is available on the particular engine. In the case of some EFI engines, the
idle/nominal switching is performed over the communication bus.
The output Idle/Nominal closes after the timer Idle Time (page 195) elapses. The Idle Time (page 195)
starts to countdown when Starting RPM (page 188) reached. The underspeed protection is not evaluated
during fixed 5 seconds period after reaching Starting RPM (page 188). A Start Fail protection occurs if the
RPM drop below 2RPM during idle.

Image 8.109 Idle/Nominal

Note: Connect binary output Idle/Nominal to speed governor to switch the speed:
opened = Idle
closed = Nominal
(for normally open contact type)

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Ignition On

Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS

Comm object 1257

Description
This input is on since start button is pressed till the unit is completely stopped (or the engine doesn’t start or
Sd or E-Stop becomes active)
Note: This function is the same as ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 462) . Ignition ON stays there from
historical reasons.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 473

 LBO: M
Mains Healthy
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 78
Description
This output is active while mains failure is not detected and mains voltage and frequency is within limits.
This output is active when the mains voltage and frequency are within limits. The limits for under/overvoltage
and under/overfrequency are the same as for mains voltage/frequency and can be found in the Mains
Settings setpoint group.
It works only with Application Mode Select = SPTM, the output is always inactive with Application Mode
Select = MINT.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Manual Ready
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1258
Description
This output is active when controller is in MAN mode and the engine is stopped and it is possible to start it
i.e. no red alarm is activated or SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 443) is active (Output READY (PAGE 483) is active).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

MCB Close/Open
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 45
Description
The output controls the mains circuit breaker. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise an alarm is
issued.
Note: InteliLite controllers can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

Image 8.110 MCB Close command

InteliLite Global Guide 474

 Image 8.111 Repeated MCB Close command

Image 8.112 MCB Open command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 475

 MCB OFF Coil
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 47
Description
The output is intended for control of open coil of mains circuit breaker. The output gives a pulse in the
moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until the feedback deactivates, but at least for 5
seconds.

Image 8.113 MCB OFF Coil command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 476

 MCB ON Coil
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 46
Description
The output is intended for control of close coil of mains circuit breaker. The output gives at least 5 second
pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed.

Image 8.114 MCB ON Coil close command

Image 8.115 Repeated MCB ON coil close command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 477

 MCB UV Coil
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 48
Description
The output is intended for control of undervoltage coil of mains circuit breaker. The output is active the whole
time when the controller is switched on. The output is deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the moment the
breaker has to be switched off.

Image 8.116 MCB UV Coil close command

Image 8.117 MCb UV Coil open command

InteliLite Global Guide 478

 Image 8.118 MCB UV Coil close command

Image 8.119 MCB UV Coil close command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Mode AUTO
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 19
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in AUTO mode.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 479

 Mode MAN
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 18
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in MAN mode.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Mode OFF
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 17
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in OFF mode.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Mode TEST
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 20
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in TEST mode.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: N
Not In AUTO
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1248
Description
This output is active when controller isn’t in AUTO mode.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Not Used
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 286
Description
Output has no function.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 480

 LBO: P
Prestart
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 36
Description
This output can be used for control of any device, which has to be activated just before start. The output is
closed for time period of Prestart Time (page 188). The output opens 100 ms before the STARTER (PAGE
484) output closes.

Image 8.120 Engine start

When the Prestart Time (page 188) is longer than Cranking Fail Pause (page 187) then the Prestart
Time (page 188) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 187) is long as Cranking Fail Pause (page 187) minus
100ms.

Image 8.121 Prestart in Cranking Fail Pause 1

InteliLite Global Guide 481

 When the Prestart Time (page 188) is shorter than Cranking Fail Pause (page 187) then the Prestart
Time (page 188) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 187) is long as normal Prestart Time (page 188).

Image 8.122 Prestart in Cranking Fail Pause 2

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: R
Ready To AMF
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 324
Description
The output is closed if the gen-set is ready to start automatically and take the load if the mains fails, i.e.:
the controller is in AMF operating mode
the controller is in AUTO controller mode and
no red alarm is present in the alarmlist
when the red alarm is confirmed during Stop Valve and other requirements are fulfilled then the LBO is
still inactive until the state ready

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Ready To Load
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 58
Description
The output is closed whenever the GCB is closed or can be closed i.e. the stabilization phase is finished, the
gen-set is running and the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 197) timer has elapsed.
and the gen-set voltage and frequency are within limits.
If GCB is open then gen-set voltage and frequency must be in limits.
If GCB is close then gen-set voltage and frequency can be out of limits, but protection delay can’t be count
down. If gen-set voltage and frequency will return into limits until delay is count down then output is still
closed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 482

 Ready
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 62
Description
The binary output is closed, when the engine is stopped and it is possible to start it i.e. no red alarm is
activated or SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 443) is active.
The binary output is switch on when the Ready state occurs.
The binary output is switch off when the Prestart or the Not Ready or the Stop state occurs i.e. always
except Ready state.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Regen Needed
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1372
Description
This output is closed when DPF lamp from ECU is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Running
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 67
Description
The output is designed to be used as an indication that the gen-set is running. The output closes if FUEL
SOLENOID (PAGE 464) is closed and STARTER (PAGE 484) and PRESTART (PAGE 481) are open. The out
remains close until engine stop and cooling period elapses.

Image 8.123 Running

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 483

 LBO: S
Sd Override
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 962
Description
The output is closed if SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 443) input is active and open if SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 443) input is
inactive. This output is usually used to send information about SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 443) input into ECU.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Starter
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 24
Description
This output is dedicated for starter motor control. The number of cranking attempts is adjusted by setpoint
Cranking Attempts (page 186) in Engine Settings group. Cranking fail pause is adjusted by setpoint
Cranking Fail Pause (page 187).

Image 8.124 Starter

The starter output opens when:

the “firing” speed is reached
maximum time of cranking is exceeded
request to stop comes up
D+ value is higher than D+ Treshold (page 202)
Oil pressure value is higher than Starting Oil Pressure (page 189)
Generator voltage > 25% of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 177) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page
177) (any phase)

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 484

 Still Log 0
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 26
Description
Logical binary output which is still in logical 0.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Still Log 1
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 27
Description
Logical binary output which is still in logical 1.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Stop Pulse
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 25
Description
Output is active for 1 second after STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 485) output activation. This signal is sent to ECU
in case of engine stop request.

Image 8.125 Stop Pulse

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Stop Solenoid
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 23
Description
This output is dedicated to control the stop solenoid (valve). The output closes when an engine stop
command is received and is deactivated 12 s after last running engine indication went off, i.e. engine is
stopped.

InteliLite Global Guide 485

 Image 8.126 Stop Solenoid 1

Image 8.127 Stop Solenoid 2

Note: If Additional running engine indications (page 118) went off during 5 s pause than Stop
Solenoid is not activated again otherwise stop solenoid is activated again.

6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 445)

InteliLite Global Guide 486

 Supplying Load
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1249
Description
The binary output depends on measured generator active power. Power is compared with generator nominal
active power with use of hysteresis and with delay of switch 1 s.
When the measured active power is equal to or bigger than 5 % of Nominal Power (page 173) for 1 s then
the binary output is closed.
When the measured active power is equal to or lower than 3 % of Nominal Power (page 173) for 1 s then
the binary output is opened.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Swap Start
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1997
Description
This logical binary output is result of internal comparator which compares statistic values Running Hours
(page 385) and Pulse Counter 2 (page 384). Binary output is active when Running Hours (page 385) are
equal or higher than the Pulse Counter 2 (page 384).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: V
Ventilation
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 38
Description
This logical binary output is activated at the beginning of start procedure together with PRESTART (PAGE 481)
LBO. Ventilation output is deactivated when engine stops revolving.
Ventilation LBO is also deactivated immediately when EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 432) (or E-Stop) is
activated or when controller is switched to OFF mode.
Note: The output is intended for control of an engine room ventilation fan, engine container ventilation
fan, container louvres or similar running gen-set technology.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Ventilation Off Pulse

Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2090
Description
This logical binary output is activated on falling edge of VENTILATION (PAGE 487) LBO (when engine stops).
The pulse duration is adjusted by Ventilation Pulse Time (page 215) setpoint.
Note: The output is intended for control of an engine room ventilation fan, engine container ventilation
fan, container louvres or similar running gen-set technology.

InteliLite Global Guide 487

 6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Ventilation On Pulse
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2089
Description
This logical binary output is activated on rising edge of VENTILATION (PAGE 487) LBO (at the begining of
prestart period). The pulse duration is adjusted by Ventilation Pulse Time (page 215) setpoint.
Note: The output is intended for control of an engine room ventilation fan, engine container ventilation
fan, container louvres or similar running gen-set technology.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 488

8.1.5 Logical analog inputs
What Logical analog inputs are:
Logical analog inputs are inputs for analog values.

Alphabetical groups of Logical analog inputs

LAI: A 491
LAI: C 511
LAI: F 512
LAI: N 513
LAI: O 514

For full list of Logical analog inputs go to the chapter Logical analog inputs alphabetically (page 490).

InteliLite Global Guide 489

 Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Prot01 491

AIN Prot02 492
AIN Prot03 493
AIN Prot04 494
AIN Prot05 495
AIN Prot06 496
AIN Prot07 497
AIN Prot08 498
AIN Prot09 499
AIN Prot10 500
AIN Prot11 501
AIN Prot12 502
AIN Prot13 503
AIN Prot14 504
AIN Prot15 505
AIN Prot16 506
AIN Prot17 507
AIN Prot18 508
AIN Prot19 509
AIN Prot20 510
Coolant Temp 511
Fuel Level 512
Not Used 513
Oil Pressure 514

InteliLite Global Guide 490

 LAI: A
AIN Prot01
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9999
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 1 Wrn (page 229) and Analog Protection 1 Sd (page 230). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 1 Delay (page 230).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 491

 AIN Prot02
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9998
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 2 Wrn (page 231) and Analog Protection 2 Sd (page 231). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 2 Delay (page 232).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 492

 AIN Prot03
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9997
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 3 Wrn (page 232) and Analog Protection 3 Sd (page 233). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 3 Delay (page 233).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 493

 AIN Prot04
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9996
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 4 Wrn (page 234) and Analog Protection 4 Sd (page 234). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 4 Delay (page 235).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 494

 AIN Prot05
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9995
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 5 Wrn (page 235) and Analog Protection 5 Sd (page 236). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 5 Delay (page 236).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 495

 AIN Prot06
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9994
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 6 Wrn (page 237) and Analog Protection 6 Sd (page 237). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 6 Delay (page 238).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 496

 AIN Prot07
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9993
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 7 Wrn (page 238) and Analog Protection 7 Sd (page 239). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 7 Delay (page 239).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 497

 AIN Prot08
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9992
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 8 Wrn (page 240) and Analog Protection 8 Sd (page 240). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 8 Delay (page 241).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 498

 AIN Prot09
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9991
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 9 Wrn (page 241) and Analog Protection 9 Sd (page 242). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 9 Delay (page 242).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 499

 AIN Prot10
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9990
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 10 Wrn (page 243) and Analog Protection 10 Sd (page 243). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 10 Delay (page 244).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 500

 AIN Prot11
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9989
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 11 Wrn (page 244) and Analog Protection 11 Sd (page 245). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 11 Delay (page 245).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 501

 AIN Prot12
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9988
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 12 Wrn (page 246) and Analog Protection 12 Sd (page 246). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 12 Delay (page 247).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 502

 AIN Prot13
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9987
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 13 Wrn (page 247) and Analog Protection 13 Sd (page 248). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 13 Delay (page 248).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 503

 AIN Prot14
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9986
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 14 Wrn (page 249) and Analog Protection 14 Sd (page 249). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 14 Delay (page 250).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 504

 AIN Prot15
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9985
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 15 Wrn (page 250) and Analog Protection 15 Sd (page 251). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 15 Delay (page 251).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 505

 AIN Prot16
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9984
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 16 Wrn (page 252) and Analog Protection 16 Sd (page 252). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 16 Delay (page 253).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 506

 AIN Prot17
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9983
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 17 Wrn (page 253) and Analog Protection 17 Sd (page 254). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 17 Delay (page 254).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 507

 AIN Prot18
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9982
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 18 Wrn (page 255) and Analog Protection 18 Sd (page 255). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 18 Delay (page 256).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 508

 AIN Prot19
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9981
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 19 Wrn (page 256) and Analog Protection 19 Sd (page 257). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 19 Delay (page 257).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 509

 AIN Prot20
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9980
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 20 Wrn (page 258) and Analog Protection 20 Sd (page 258). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 20 Delay (page 259).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 510

 LAI: C
Coolant Temp
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 67
Description
Logical analog input designed for coolant temperature value received from analog sensor. For more
information about wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are
adjusted by setpoints Coolant Temperature Wrn (page 207) and Coolant Temperature Sd (page 207).
Delay is adjusted by setpoint Coolant Temperature Delay (page 207).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Note: This analog function can by also configured on binary input as binary function. In this case chose
COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 430) binary input in the list of binary inputs. Delay of this binary input is adjusted
via the same setpoint like for analog function.

IMPORTANT: Value from analog input has higher priority than value from ECU.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 511

 LAI: F
Fuel Level
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 78
Description
Logical analog input designed for fuel level value received from analog sensor. For more information about wiring
of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints Fuel Level
Wrn (page 209) and Fuel Level Sd (page 210). Delay is adjusted by setpoint Fuel Level Delay (page 210).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

IMPORTANT: For right behavior of this function, curve for analog input has to be in
percentage.

Note: This analog function can by also configured on binary input as binary function. In this case chose
FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 433) binary input in the list of binary inputs. Delay of this binary input is adjusted via
the same setpoint like for analog function.

IMPORTANT: Value from analog input has higher priority than value from ECU.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 512

 LAI: N
Not Used
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 230
Description
Input has no function.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite Global Guide 513

 LAI: O
Oil Pressure
Related FW 1.9.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9
Description
Logical analog input designed for oil pressure value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 47. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Oil Pressure Wrn (page 205) and Oil Pressure Sd (page 205). Delay is adjusted by setpoint Oil
Pressure Delay (page 205).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and Sd protection.
Sd Analog value is used for Sd protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Note: This analog function can by also configured on binary input as binary function. In this case chose
OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 439) binary input in the list of binary inputs. Delay of this binary input is adjusted
via the same setpoint like for analog function.

IMPORTANT: Value from analog input has higher priority than value from ECU.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

8.1.6 PLC
List of PLC groups
Group: Basic Logical functions 517

InteliLite Global Guide 514

 Group: Comparison of analog inputs 518
Group: Time functions 521

For full list of PLC blocks go to the chapter List of PLC blocks (page 516).

InteliLite Global Guide 515

 List of PLC blocks
Group: Basic logical
functions
OR/AND 517

Group: Comparison of
analog inputs
Comparator With
Hysteresis 518
Comparator With Delay 519

Group: Time functions

Timer 521
Delay 522

InteliLite Global Guide 516

 Group: Basic Logical functions
OR/AND
PLC group Basic logical functions

Related FW 1.9.0

Related applications AMF, MRS

Comm object 1

Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input 1..8 Binary Yes 0/1 Inputs 1..8
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary Yes 0/1 Result of the logical operation
Description
The block performs logical operation OR / AND of 2 - 8 binary operands. The inputs as well as the output can be
inverted.

Function OR
Input 1 Input 2 Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1

Function AND
Input 1 Input 2 Output
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1

There have to be at least 2 inputs every time. There may be up to 8 inputs configured.

InteliLite Global Guide 517

 Image 9.1 Configuration of OR/AND block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Group: Comparison of analog inputs

Comparator With Hysteresis
PLC group Comparison of analog
inputs
Related FW 1.9.0
Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 3
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input Analog No Any Compared value
Input ON Analog No Same as Input Comparative level for switching on
Input OFF Analog No Same as Input Comparative level for switching off
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Comparator output
Description
The block compares the input value with the comparative levels. The behavior depends on whether the ON
level is higher than OFF level or vice versa.

InteliLite Global Guide 518

 Image 9.2 Different On and Off levels

Image 9.3 Configuration of Comp Hyst block

Note: Level On and Level Off can be constants or values from controller.

IMPORTANT: In case that values on inputs have different decimal numbers than the values
are converted and the name of block is red. It is strongly recommended to use values with
the same decimal numbers.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Comparator With Delay

PLC group Comparison of analog
inputs
Related FW 1.9.0
Related applications AMF, MRS

InteliLite Global Guide 519

 Comm object 4
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input 1 Analog No Any Compared value
Input 2 Analog No Same as Input 1 Comparative level
Delay Analog No 0.0..3000,0 [s] Comparative delay
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Comparator output
Description
The block works as an analog switch. It compares the input value with the comparative level. The output will
switch on if the input is equal or higher than the comparative level for time longer than the delay.

Image 9.4 Principle of delay

Image 9.5 Configuration of Comp Time block

Note: Input 2 and Delay can be constants or values from controller.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliLite Global Guide 520

 Group: Time functions
Timer
PLC group Time functions

Related FW 1.9.0

Related applications AMF, MRS

Comm object 14

Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

The timer runs only if this input is
Run Binary No 0/1
active or not connected
This input reloads the timer to the
Reload Binary No 0/1
initial value
Reload
Analog No 0,0..3276,7 [s] Initial value of the timer
value
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Timer output
Description
The block works as a countdown timer which is decreased by 1 every PLC cycle. The timer initial value is
adjustable by the "Reload value" input. The timer is automatically reloaded with the initial value when it
reaches zero or it can be reloaded in any other moment using the "reload" input. The timer is held at reload
value until the reload input is deactivated. The timer output is inverted always when the timer is reloaded.

Image 9.6 Principle of timer

InteliLite Global Guide 521

 Image 9.7 Configuration of Timer block

Note: Input reload value can be constant or value from controller.

Note: If you want the output to start at logical 0, tick First down option. Otherwise the output will start at
logical 1.

IMPORTANT: In case that inputs are not connected and First down option isn´t tick, than
output is active.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Delay
PLC group Time functions
Related FW 1.9.0
Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 33
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input Binary No 0/1 Input signal to be delayed
Delay of the rising edge resp. pulse
Input time -3200,0..3200,0 [s,
Analog No length generated by rising edge of the
up m, h]
input
Delay of the falling edge resp. pulse
Input time -3200,0..3200,0 [s,
Analog No length generated by falling edge of the
down m, h]
input
Resets the output to logical 0. The
output remains in logical 0 until new
Input reset Binary No 0/1
rising edge appears on Input (when
Input reset is deactivated already)
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Output signal
Description
This block can work in two modes of operation:

InteliLite Global Guide 522

 Delay mode - the rising edge at the output is generated with delay of "input time up" when a rising
edge at the input is detected. The falling edge at the output is generated with delay of "input time
down" when a falling edge at the input is detected. If the delayed falling edge at the output came
earlier than the delayed rising edge, then no pulse would be generated at the output.
Pulse mode - a pulse of "input time up" length is generated at the output when a rising edge is
detected, a pulse of "input time down" length is generated at the output when a falling edge is
detected.

Image 9.8 Delay modes principles

Image 9.9 Configuration of Delay block

Note: If Input time up or Input time down value is <0, this input is internally set to zero.

InteliLite Global Guide 523

 Note: Input time up and Input time down values can be constants or values from controller.

Note: Use Pulse on edge option to choose between delay and pulse mode.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

8.2 Alarms
8.2.1 Alarms level 1 524
8.2.2 Alarms level 2 539
8.2.3 Fail sensor and other types 554

What alarms are:

The controller evaluates two levels of alarms. For more information see Alarm management on page 101.

8.2.1 Alarms level 1

Warnings 526
Other type 536

For full list of Alarms level 1 go to List of alarms level 1 (page 525).
What alarms level 1 are:
The level 1 alarm indicates that a value or parameter is out of normal limits, but has still not reached critical
level. For more information see Alarm types - Level 1 on page 103.

InteliLite Global Guide 524

 List of alarms level 1

Alarm Email 1 Fail 526 Wrn Generator L3L1 <

Alarm SMS 1 Fail 526 Voltage 532

Battery Charger Fail 526 Wrn Generator >

Frequency 532
Event Email 1 Fail 526
Wrn Generator <
Event SMS 1 Fail 527
Frequency 533
Wrn AIN Prot 527
Wrn Check DPF Status 533
Wrn Battery > Voltage 527
Wrn Mains Voltage
Wrn Battery < Voltage 527
Detected 533
Wrn BIN Protection 528
Wrn Maintenance 1 533
Wrn Charging Alternator
Wrn Maintenance 2 534
Fail 528
Wrn Maintenance 3 534
Wrn Coolant Temperature
Wrn MCB Fail 534
Low 528
Wrn Oil Pressure 535
Wrn Coolant Temp 528
Wrn Overload 535
Wrn ECU Communication
Fail 529 Wrn Override All Sd 535

Wrn Fuel Level 529 Wrn Stop Fail 536

Wrn Generator L1 > After-Treatment 536

Voltage 529 ECU Wait To Start 536
Wrn Generator L1 < ECU Yellow Lamp 537
Voltage 529 EM(A) - a message lost 537
Wrn Generator L1L2 > EM(A) - configuration
Voltage 530 mistake 537
Wrn Generator L1L2 < EM(A) - insufficient 537
Voltage 530
EM(A) - missing or
Wrn Generator L2 > damaged 538
Voltage 530
Generator CCW Rotation 538
Wrn Generator L2 <
Mains CCW Rotation 538
Voltage 530
Manual Restore 538
Wrn Generator L2L3 >
Module(slotA) - comm.
Voltage 531
outage 539
Wrn Generator L2L3 <
Module(slotA) - false
Voltage 531
module 539
Wrn Generator L3 >
Module(slotA) -
Voltage 531
unexpected 539
Wrn Generator L3 <
Module(slotA) - unknown
Voltage 531
module 539
Wrn Generator L3L1 >
Voltage 532

InteliLite Global Guide 525

 Warnings
Alarm Email 1 Fail
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Alarm Email 1 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 1 (page 291) and email
wasn’t send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Alarm SMS 1 Fail

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 1 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 291) and SMS
wasn’t send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Battery Charger Fail

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Battery Charge Fail
Alarm evaluated Mains is OK
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is activated when logical binary input BATTERY CHARGER (PAGE 405) is
Description
active.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Event Email 1 Fail

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Event Email 1 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 1 (page 291) and email
wasn’t send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 526

 Event SMS 1 Fail
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Event SMS 1 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 291) and SMS
wasn’t send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn AIN Prot

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn + Name of analog input
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that value the general analog protection is out of warning
Description
protection limit.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Battery > Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message All the time
Alarm evaluated Wrn Battery > Voltage
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm informs the operator that the controller supply voltage is too high. The
following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Battery Overvoltage (page 213)
Battery <> Voltage Delay (page 213)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Battery < Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Battery < Voltage
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm informs the operator that the controller supply voltage is too low. The
following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Battery Undervoltage (page 212)
Battery <> Voltage Delay (page 213)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 527

 Wrn BIN Protection
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn + Name of binary input
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Binary input also can be adjusted like alarm. In this case message in alarmlist
Description contains prefix - Wrn and binary input name. This alarm occurs, when appropriate
binary input is active.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Charging Alternator Fail

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Charging Alternator Fail
Alarm evaluated Engine running only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if the engine is running and the voltage on the D+ terminal is
lower than D+ Treshold (page 202) of the controller supply voltage. This alarm
Description
works similar to the red “battery” alarm indicator on a vehicle dashboard.
The setpoint has to be in Charge Fail or Enabled position to enable this alarm.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Coolant Temperature Low

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Coolant Temperature Low
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the coolant temperature is lower than the temperature set
Description
in Coolant Temperature Low Wrn (page 209) setpoint.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Coolant Temp

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Coolant Temp
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the coolant temperature is higher than the temperature set
Description
in Coolant Temperature Wrn (page 207) setpoint.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 528

 Wrn ECU Communication Fail
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn ECU Communication Fail
With configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 462) - only when this LBO is
Alarm evaluated active
Without configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 462) - all the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs when an ECU is configured, but the communication with the
Description
ECU is not established or has dropped out.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Fuel Level

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Fuel Level
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the fuel level is lower than the level set in Fuel Level
Description
Wrn (page 209) setpoint.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L1 > Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L1 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 218)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L1 < Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 219)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 529

 Wrn Generator L1L2 > Voltage
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L1L2 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1 and
2. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 218)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L1L2 < Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1 and
2. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 219)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L2 > Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L2 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 2. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 218)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L2 < Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 2. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 219)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

InteliLite Global Guide 530

 6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L2L3 > Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L2L3 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2 and
3. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 218)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L2L3 < Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L2L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2 and
3. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 219)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L3 > Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L3 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 218)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L3 < Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only

InteliLite Global Guide 531

 Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 219)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L3L1 > Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L3L1 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3 and
1. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 218)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L3L1 < Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L3L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3 and
1. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 219)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator > Frequency

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator > Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 220)
Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 221)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 532

 Wrn Generator < Frequency
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator < Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 220)
Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 221)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Check DPF Status

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Check DPF Status
Alarm evaluated When ECU is configured
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs when ECU send alarm message about Tier IV protection.
Description
Note: Tier IV protection have to be supported by ECU.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Mains Voltage Detected

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Mains Voltage Detected
Alarm evaluated Gen-set is running
Related applications AMF
This alarm occurs when setpoint Operation Mode (page 181) is adjusted to MRS
Description
and voltage is detected on mains.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Maintenance 1
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance 1
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Adjust the setpoint Maintenance Timer 1 (page 211) to the interval of the next
maintenance check. The value of the setpoint will count down while the engine is
Description running and if reaches zero, this alarm will be issued. The alarm message will
remain in the alarm list (even if the controller is switched off and on again) until the
setpoint is re-adjusted to a positive value.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 533

 Wrn Maintenance 2
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance 2
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Adjust the setpoint Maintenance Timer 2 (page 212) to the interval of the next
maintenance check. The value of the setpoint will count down while the engine is
Description running and if reaches zero, this alarm will be issued. The alarm message will
remain in the alarm list (even if the controller is switched off and on again) until the
setpoint is re-adjusted to a positive value.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Maintenance 3
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance 3
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Adjust the setpoint Maintenance Timer 3 (page 212) to the interval of the next
maintenance check. The value of the setpoint will count down while the engine is
Description running and if reaches zero, this alarm will be issued. The alarm message will
remain in the alarm list (even if the controller is switched off and on again) until the
setpoint is re-adjusted to a positive value.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn MCB Fail

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn MCB Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite Global Guide 534

 Related applications AMF
This alarm will occur when the MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 438) input does not match
the expected position given by the MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 474) output. It stays
active until the mismatch between the output and feedback disappears.
If there was no command issued by the controller and the breaker
(feedback) changes suddenly the position itself, the alarm will be issued
immediately.
Self-opening of the breaker is not considered a fault and if all mains values
are within limits, the command to reclose the breaker is issued after delay
Description
given by the setpoint Mains Return Delay (page 222) has elapsed.
The alarm will be also issued, if the breaker does not respond to the close
command within 2 seconds. After this period has elapsed the output MCB
Close/Open is deactivated again and the next attempt to close the breaker
will occur first after the alarm is reset.
The alarm will be also issued if the breaker does not respond to the open
command within 2 seconds. The output MCB Close/Open will stay
deactivated. Closing of GCB is blocked until this alarm becomes inactive.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Oil Pressure

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Oil Pressure
Alarm evaluated Gen-set is running
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the oil pressure is lower than the pressure set in Oil
Description
Pressure Wrn (page 205) setpoint.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Overload
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Overload
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm is issued when the gen-set power is over the limit for time period longer
than the delay. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Overload Wrn (page 216) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload Delay (page 216) Overload Del adjusts the delay.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Override All Sd

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Override All Sd
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite Global Guide 535

 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm occurs when binary input SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 443) is activated.
6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Stop Fail

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Stop Fail
Alarm evaluated While the engine shall be stopped
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs if the gen-set shall be stopped, but some symptom indicates that
it is not stopped. The period when the gen-set shall be stopped begins after the
FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 464) has been switched off and time delay Stop Time
(page 199) has elapsed and lasts for the entire time the FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE
464) or STARTER (PAGE 484) are off.

Description

Image 9.10 Stop Fail

Note: Gen-set cannot be started until this alarm is inactive and reset.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Other type
After-Treatment
Alarm Type Alarm indication
Alarmlist message After-Treatment
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm occurs when appropriate after-treatment lamp is active.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ECU Wait To Start

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message ECU Wait To Start
Alarm evaluated Only when ECU is connected

InteliLite Global Guide 536

 Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU Wait To Start lamp
Description is activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 455)is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,
alarm automatically disappear.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ECU Yellow Lamp

Alarm Type Alarm indication + history record
Alarmlist message ECU Yellow Lamp
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU Yellow lamp is
Description activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 455)is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,
alarm automatically disappear.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

EM(A) - a message lost

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(A) - a message lost
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication between controller
Description
and module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

EM(A) - configuration mistake

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(A) - configuration mistake
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with configuration of binary input or
Description
output of module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

EM(A) - insufficient
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(A) - insufficient
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm indicates that module does not support all required features.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 537

 EM(A) - missing or damaged
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(A) - missing or damaged
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication with module in slot
Description
(in first 5 second there was no communication and module is configured in slot).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Generator CCW Rotation

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Generator CCW Rotation
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The controller detects phase sequence on generator voltage terminals. This
protection is important after controller installation to avoid wrong voltage phase
Description connection. There is a fixed defined phase sequence in InteliLite controller: T35 =
N, T36 = L1, T37 = L2 and T38 = L3. When the phases are connected in a different
order, alarms are detected. This alarm prevent circuit breaker closing.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Mains CCW Rotation

Alarm Type Alarm indication
Alarmlist message Mains CCW Rotation
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF
The controller detects phase sequence on mains voltage terminals. This protection
is important after controller installation to avoid wrong voltage phase connection.
Description There is a fixed defined phase sequence in InteliLite controller: T39 = N, T40 = L1,
T41 = L2 and T42 = L3. When the phases are connected in a different order, alarms
are detected. This alarm prevent circuit breaker closing.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Manual Restore
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Manual Restore
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF
Alarm is activated when controller is in AUTO mode, Return From Island (page
Description
227) setpoint is set to manual, load is on gen-set a mains has returned.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite Global Guide 538

 Module(slotA) - comm. outage
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - comm. outage
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication between controller
Description
and module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Module(slotA) - false module

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - fake module
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm indicates that false module is inserted in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Module(slotA) - unexpected
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unexpected
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that in slot is inserted different module than which is
Description configured or the module is unconfigured and has to be configured for proper
function.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Module(slotA) - unknown module

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unknown module
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm indicates that unknown module is inserted in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

8.2.2 Alarms level 2

Shutdown 542
Other type 550

For full list of Alarms level 2 go to List of alarms level 2 (page 541).
What alarms level 2 are:
The level 2 level alarm indicates that a critical level of the respective value or parameter has been reached. For

InteliLite Global Guide 539

 more information see Alarm types - Level 2 on page 103.

InteliLite Global Guide 540

 List of alarms level 2

Emergency Stop 542 BOC Coolant Temp 550

Sd AIN Protec 542 BOC Fuel Level 550
Sd Battery Flat 542 BOC Generator L1 <
Sd BIN Protection 542 Voltage 551

Sd Coolant Temp 543 BOC Generator L1L2 <

Voltage 551
Sd ECU Communication
Fail 543 BOC Generator L2 <
Voltage 551
Sd Fuel Level 543
BOC Generator L2L3 <
Sd GCB Fail 543
Voltage 551
Sd Generator L1 > Voltage 544
BOC Generator L3 <
Sd Generator L1 < Voltage 544
Voltage 552
Sd Generator L1L2 >
BOC Generator L3L1 <
Voltage 544
Voltage 552
Sd Generator L1L2 <
BOC Generator >
Voltage 545
Frequency 552
Sd Generator L2 > Voltage 545
BOC Generator <
Sd Generator L2 < Voltage 545 Frequency 552
Sd Generator L2L3 > BOC Overload 553
Voltage 545
BOC Short Circuit 553
Sd Generator L2L3 <
ECU Red Lamp 553
Voltage 546
Sd Generator L3 > Voltage 546
Sd Generator L3 < Voltage 546
Sd Generator L3L1 >
Voltage 547
Sd Generator L3L1 <
Voltage 547
Sd Generator > Frequency 547
Sd Generator < Frequency 547
Sd Oil Pressure 548
Sd Overload 548
Sd Overspeed 548
Sd RPM Measurement
Fail 548
Sd Short Circuit 549
Sd Start Fail 549
Sd Underspeed 549
BOC AIN Prot 550
BOC BIN Protection 550

InteliLite Global Guide 541

 Shutdown
Emergency Stop
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Emergency Stop
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Alarm is activated when binary input EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 432) is activated.
The gen-set shuts down in the moment the input is activated and starting is
blocked until the input is deactivated and fault reset is pressed.

Description Note: Use red emergency button placed on the switchboard door and connect
it to a binary input of the controller. Then configure the function Emergency
Stop to this binary input. It is recommended to use NC contact of the button.

Note: The MCB control is not affected by this alarm.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd AIN Protec
Alarm Type Sd
Alarmlist message Sd + Name of analog input
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that value the general analog protection is out of shutdown
Description
protection limit.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Battery Flat
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Battery Flat
Alarm evaluated During cranking
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm will be issued if the controller was reset during cranking of the gen-set.
If this situation occurs, the controller supposes the starting battery is so exhausted
Description
that its voltage drops so low when starter motor is energized that it causes
controller reset.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd BIN Protection
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd + Name of binary input
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite Global Guide 542

 Related applications AMF, MRS
Binary input also can be adjusted like alarm. In this case message in alarmlist
Description contains prefix - Sd and binary input name. This alarm occurs, when appropriate
binary input is active.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Coolant Temp
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Coolant Temp
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the coolant temperature is higher than the temperature set
Description
in Coolant Temperature Sd (page 207) setpoint.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd ECU Communication Fail

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd ECU Communication Fail
With configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 462) - only when this LBO is
Alarm evaluated active
Without configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 462) - all the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs when an ECU is configured, but the communication with the
Description
ECU is not established or has dropped out.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Fuel Level
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Fuel Level
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the fuel level is lower than the level set in Fuel Level Sd
Description
(page 210) setpoint.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd GCB Fail
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd GCB Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite Global Guide 543

 Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm will occur when the GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 434) input does not match
the expected position given by the GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 465) output. It stays
active until the mismatch between the output and feedback persists.
If there was no command issued by the controller and the breaker
Description
(feedback) changes suddenly the position itself, the alarm will be issued
immediately.
The alarm will be also issued if the breaker does not respond to an open or
close command within 2 seconds.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L1 > Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 217)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L1 < Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 218)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L1L2 > Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1L2 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1 and
2. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 217)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

InteliLite Global Guide 544

 6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L1L2 < Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1 and
2. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 218)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L2 > Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L2 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 2. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 217)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L2 < Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 2. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 218)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L2L3 > Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L2L3 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only

InteliLite Global Guide 545

 Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2 and
3. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 217)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L2L3 < Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L2L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2 and
3. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 218)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L3 > Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L3 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 217)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L3 < Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 218)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite Global Guide 546

 Sd Generator L3L1 > Voltage
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L3L1 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3 and
1. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 217)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L3L1 < Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L3L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3 and
1. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 218)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator > Frequency

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator > Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overfrequency BOC (page 219)
Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 221)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator < Frequency

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator < Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 220)
Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 221)

InteliLite Global Guide 547

 6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Oil Pressure
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Oil Pressure
Alarm evaluated Gen-set is running
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the oil pressure is lover than the pressure set in Oil
Description
Pressure Sd (page 205) setpoint.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Overload
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Overload
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm is issued when the gen-set power is over the limit for time period longer
than the delay. The behavior of the overload alarm is adjusted by the following
Description setpoints:
Overload BOC (page 216) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload Delay (page 216) adjusts the delay

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Overspeed
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Overspeed
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs immediately when the engine speed has exceeded the limit. The
behavior of the overspeed alarm is adjusted by the following setpoints:
Overspeed Sd (page 203) adjust the overspeed limit
Description
Overspeed Overshot (page 204) adjust the additional overspeed limit
Overspeed Overshot Period (page 204) adjust the time period of
additional overspeed limit

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd RPM Measurement Fail

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd RPM Measurement Fail
Alarm evaluated During cranking

InteliLite Global Guide 548

 Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm is issued if the engine speed has not exceeded the Starting RPM (page
Description 188) within the Maximum Cranking Time (page 187), although some of
additional running engine indication sources indicate that the engine has started.
6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Short Circuit
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Short Circuit
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This is a fast overcurrent protection. The following setpoints are related to this
alarm:
Description
Short Circuit BOC (page 217) adjusts the short current limit
Short Circuit BOC Delay (page 217) adjusts the delay in fine steps

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Start Fail
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Start Fail
Alarm evaluated When the gen-set is being started
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm will be issued after all attempts to start the gen-set have run out but the
Description gen-set did not start. The following setpoints are related to this alarm:
Cranking Attempts (page 186) adjust the number of attempts

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Underspeed
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Underspeed
Alarm evaluated Engine running only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm will be issued when the gen-set is running and then stops by itself, i.e.
the RPM drops under the value of setpoint Underspeed Sd (page 204).
Description
The underspeed alarm starts to be evaluated after successful gen-set start and is
being evaluated for the entire time that the fuel solenoid is on.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite Global Guide 549

 Other type
BOC AIN Prot
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC + Name of analog input
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the value of general analog protection is out of BOC
Description
protection limit.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC BIN Protection

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC + Name of binary input
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Binary input also can be adjusted like alarm. In this case message in alarmlist
Description contains prefix - BOC and binary input name. This alarm occurs, when appropriate
binary input is active.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Coolant Temp

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Coolant Temperature
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the coolant temperature is higher than the temperature set
Description
in Coolant Temperature Sd (page 207) setpoint.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Fuel Level

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Fuel Level
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the fuel level is lower than the level set level in Fuel
Description
Level Sd (page 210) setpoint.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite Global Guide 550

 BOC Generator L1 < Voltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 218)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L1L2 < Voltage

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1 and
2. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 218)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L2 < Voltage

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 2. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 218)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L2L3 < Voltage

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L2L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2 and
3. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 218)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

InteliLite Global Guide 551

 6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L3 < Voltage

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 218)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L3L1 < Voltage

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L3L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3 and
1. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 218)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 219)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator > Frequency

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator > Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overfrequency BOC (page 219)
Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 221)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator < Frequency

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator < Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only

InteliLite Global Guide 552

 Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 220)
Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 221)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Overload
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Overload
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm is issued when the gen-set power is over the limit for time period longer
than the delay. The behavior of the overload alarm is adjusted by the following
Description setpoints:
Overload BOC (page 216) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload Delay (page 216) adjusts the delay

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Short Circuit

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Short Circuit
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This is a fast overcurrent protection. The following setpoints are related to this
alarm:
Description
Short Circuit BOC (page 217) adjusts the short current limit
Short Circuit BOC Delay (page 217) adjusts the delay in fine steps

6 back to List of alarms level 2

ECU Red Lamp

Alarm Type Alarm indication + history record
Alarmlist message ECU Red Lamp
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU Red lamp is
activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 455)is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,
Description alarm automatically disappear.
Note: This alarm doesn't stop the engine.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite Global Guide 553

8.2.3 Fail sensor and other types
Fls AIN Prot 1 556
Fls Coolant Temp 556
Fls Fuel Level 556
Fls Oil Pressure 556

For full list of Fails sensor and other types of alarms go to List of fail sensor alarms (page 555).
What Fail sensor and other types of alarms are
If the measured resistance on an analog input exceeds the valid range, a sensor fail will be detected and a
sensor fail message will appear in the Alarmlist. For more information see Sensor fail detection (FLS) on
page 104.

InteliLite Global Guide 554

 List of fail sensor alarms

Fls AIN Prot 1 556

Fls Coolant Temp 556
Fls Fuel Level 556
Fls Oil Pressure 556

InteliLite Global Guide 555

 Fail sensor
Fls AIN Prot 1
Alarm Type Fls
Alarmlist message Fls + name of analog input 1
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the value of general analog protection is out of range or is
Description
missing.

6 back to List of fail sensor alarms

Fls Coolant Temp

Alarm Type Fls
Alarmlist message Fls Coolant Temperature
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs when measurement value of coolant temperature is out of range
Description
or is missing.

6 back to List of fail sensor alarms

Fls Fuel Level

Alarm Type Fls
Alarmlist message Fls Fuel Level
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs when measurement value of fuel level is out of range or is
Description
missing.

6 List of fail sensor alarms (page 555)

Fls Oil Pressure

Alarm Type Fls
Alarmlist message Fls Oil Pressure
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs when measurement value of oil pressure is out of range or is
Description
missing.

6 back to List of fail sensor alarms

8.3 Modules
8.3.1 Plug-In modules 557
8.3.2 CAN modules 569

InteliLite Global Guide 556

8.3.1 Plug-In modules
Communication modules 557
Extension modules 566

IMPORTANT: 2nd generation of InteliLite controllers does not support new modules and 3rd
generation does not support all old modules.

The available communication plug-in modules are:

CM-RS232-485 - communication module for connection via RS232 or RS485 line
CM-4G-GPS - communication module for connection via 4G
CM-GPRS - communication module for connection via GPRS
CM-Ethernet - communication module for internet connection via Ethernet
The available extension plug-in modules are:
EM-BIO8-EFCP - extension module with 8 binary inputs/outputs

Note: Controller has 1 plug-in module slot.

Communication modules
CM-RS232-485 557
CM-Ethernet 559
CM-GPRS 561
CM-4G-GPS 564

CM-RS232-485
CM-RS232-485 is optional plug-in card to enable InteliLite the RS232 and RS485 communication. This is
required for computer or MODBUS connection. The CM-RS232-485 is a dual port module with RS232 and
RS485 interfaces at independent COM channels. The RS232 is connected to COM1 and RS485 to COM2.

Image 9.11 CM-RS232-485 interface

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.

InteliLite Global Guide 557

 Image 9.12 Pinout of RS-232 line

Image 9.13 Pinout of RS-485 line

Image 9.14 Jumpers description

Note: Balancing resistors shall be both closed at only one device in whole RS485 network.

Maximal distance of line is 10m for RS232 line and 1200m for RS485 line.
Terminator 120Ω
Balancing resistor +5V

InteliLite Global Guide 558

 Technical data
40 mA / 8 VDC
26 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
14 mA / 24 VDC
10 mA / 36 VDC

Isolation Galvanic separation

Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Instal package to computer or open PSI to instal it into InteliConfig
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via InteliConfig
Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate firmware
you want to program into the module (in InteliConfig).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.
The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is reestablished again automatically when the
update process is finished.

CM-Ethernet
CM-Ethernet is a plug-in card with Ethernet 10/100 Mbit interface in RJ45 connector. It provides an interface for
connecting a PC with through ethernet/internet network, for sending active e-mails and for integration of the
controller into a building management (MODBUS TCP and SNMP protocols). This card also enables to monitor
and control the gen-set over web browser from any location with internet access using appropriate security
measures.

Image 9.15 CM-Ethernet interface

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.

Use an Ethernet UTP cable with a RJ45 connector for linking the module with your Ethernet network. The
module can also be connected directly to a PC using cross-wired UTP cable.

InteliLite Global Guide 559

 Image 9.16 Cross-wired cable

Technical data
120 mA / 8 VDC
82 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
35 mA / 24 VDC
25 mA / 36 VDC

Module setup
All settings related to the module are to be adjusted via the controller setpoints. The respective setpoints are
located in the setpoint Group: CM-Ethernet (page 291).
All actual operational values like actual IP address etc. are available in controller values in a specific group as
well.

Status LED
Blinking frequency Color
Green - everything is OK
Red - some of following errors occurred:
1 Hz unplugged ethernet cable
module cannot connect to AirGate
module can not obtain IP address from DHCP
Green - firmware is currently being programmed
10 Hz
Red - no firmware present in the module

Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Instal package to computer or open PSI to instal it into InteliConfig
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via InteliConfig
Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate firmware
you want to program into the module (in InteliConfig).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.

InteliLite Global Guide 560

 The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is reestablished again automatically when the
update process is finished.

CM-GPRS

Image 9.17 CM-GPRS module

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.

IMPORTANT: CM-4G-GPS and CM-GPRS modules can't be used in one controller in the same time.

Note: GPRS and CSD services must be provided by your GSM/GPRS operator for successful operation.

Note: The GPRS and CSD connection should not be used for the firmware update process.

Technical data
32 mA / 8 VDC
18 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
10 mA / 24 VDC
12 mA / 36 VDC

SIM card settings

SIM card to be used in CM-4G-GPS or CM-GPRS modules must be adjusted as follows:
SMS service enabled
Packet data (Internet access) enabled (when required for the selected mode of operation)
PIN code security disabled

How to start using CM-GPRS module

You will need a controller, CM-GPRS module, antenna and SIM card with SMS and packet data service.
Make sure that your SIM supports the packet data network type you want to use. I.e. if you want to use the
module in GPRS (2,5G) network you have to confirm with the operator that the particular SIM card does support
2,5G network.
Make sure SIM card does not require PIN code. Use any mobile phone to switch the SIM PIN security off.
Place the SIM card into slot on CM-GPRS card
Connect the antenna to Cellular module antenna connector.

InteliLite Global Guide 561

 Switch off the controller.
Insert CM-GPRS module into controller
Power up the controller.

Image 9.18 Main screen of CM-GPRS module

GSM Diag Code – Diagnostic code for CM-GPRS modem

GSM Diag Code – Common list of diagnostic codes for cellular modules
Code Description
0 OK. No error.
1 Not possible to hang up.
2 Modul is switched off
3 Module is switched on
4 Module – error in initialization
5 Module – not possible to set the APN
6 Module – not possible to connect to GPRS network
7 Module – not possible to retrieve IP address
8 Module – not accepted DNS IP address
9 Error in modem detection
10 Error in initialization of analog modem
SIM card is locked (Possibly PIN code required, PIN needs to be deactivated) or unknown
11
status of SIM locking
12 No GSM signal
13 Not possible to read the SIM card parameters
GSM modem did not accepted particular initialization command, possibly caused by locked
14
SIM card
15 Unknown modem
16 Bad answer to complement initialization string
17 Not possible to read GSM signal strength
18 CDMA modem not detected
19 No CDMA network
20 Unsuccessful registration to CDMA network

InteliLite Global Guide 562

 21 SIMCom/ME909s: can´t read FW version
22 SIMCom: GSM signal not found
23 SIMCom: can´t detect module speed
24 SIMCom: HW reset issued
25 PUK is required
26 Error of SIM card detected
27 ME909s: can't set module bps
28 ME909s: can't set link configuration
29 ME909s: can't do power-off
30 ME909s: can't do power-on
31 ME909s: can't do hardware reset
32 ME909s: ME909s not started
33 ME909s: switch off issued
34 ME909s: switch on issued
35 ME909s: HW reset issued
36 ME909s: can't switch echo off
37 ME909s: can't find out state of registration
38 ME909s: GSM signal not found
39 ME909s: no SIM memory for SMS
40 ME909s: waiting for registration
41 Can't read operator name
42 ME909s: can't set flow control
43 APN not typed
255 Only running communication is needed to indicate

Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Instal package to computer or open PSI to instal it into InteliConfig
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via InteliConfig
Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate firmware
you want to program into the module (in InteliConfig).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.
The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is reestablished again automatically when the
update process is finished.

InteliLite Global Guide 563

 CM-4G-GPS

Image 9.19 CM-4G-GPS module

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.

IMPORTANT: CM-4G-GPS and CM-GPRS modules cant be used in one controller in the same time.

IMPORTANT: Operating temperature of module is from -30°C to +75°C.

Note: Cellular data service must be enabled in your SIM card by your mobile operator for successful operation.

Supported 4G bands are as follows:

FDD LTE: Band 1, Band 2, Band 3, Band 4, Band 5, Band 7, Band 8, Band 20, all bands with diversity
WCDMA/HSDPA/HSUPA/HSPA+: Band 1, Band 2, Band 5, Band 8, all bands with diversity
GSM/GPRS/EDGE: 850 MHz/900 MHz/1800 MHz/1900 MHz

Technical data
55 mA / 8 VDC
35 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
8 mA / 24 VDC
5 mA / 36 VDC

SIM card settings

SIM card to be used in CM-4G-GPS or CM-GPRS modules must be adjusted as follows:
SMS service enabled
Packet data (Internet access) enabled (when required for the selected mode of operation)
PIN code security disabled

How to start using CM-4G-GPS module

You will need a controller, CM-4G-GPS module, antenna and SIM card with SMS and packet data service.

Note: Make sure that your SIM supports the packet data network type you want to use. - i.e. if you want to use
the module in LTE (4G) network you have to confirm with the operator that the particular SIM card supports 4G
network.

Make sure SIM card does not require PIN code. Use any mobile phone to switch the SIM PIN security off.
Place the SIM card into slot on CM-4G-GPS card

InteliLite Global Guide 564

 Connect the antenna to Cellular module antenna connector.
Switch off the controller.
Insert CM-4G-GPS module into controller
Power up the controller.

Image 9.20 Main screen of CM-4G-GPS module

GSM Diag Code – Common list of diagnostic codes for cellular modules

GSM Diag Code – Common list of diagnostic codes for cellular modules
Code Description
0 OK. No error.
1 Not possible to hang up.
2 Modul is switched off
3 Module is switched on
4 Module – error in initialization
5 Module – not possible to set the APN
6 Module – not possible to connect to GPRS network
7 Module – not possible to retrieve IP address
8 Module – not accepted DNS IP address
9 Error in modem detection
10 Error in initialization of analog modem
SIM card is locked (Possibly PIN code required, PIN needs to be deactivated) or unknown
11
status of SIM locking
12 No GSM signal
13 Not possible to read the SIM card parameters
GSM modem did not accepted particular initialization command, possibly caused by locked
14
SIM card
15 Unknown modem
16 Bad answer to complement initialization string
17 Not possible to read GSM signal strength
18 CDMA modem not detected

InteliLite Global Guide 565

 19 No CDMA network
20 Unsuccessful registration to CDMA network
21 SIMCom/ME909s: can´t read FW version
22 SIMCom: GSM signal not found
23 SIMCom: can´t detect module speed
24 SIMCom: HW reset issued
25 PUK is required
26 Error of SIM card detected
27 ME909s: can't set module bps
28 ME909s: can't set link configuration
29 ME909s: can't do power-off
30 ME909s: can't do power-on
31 ME909s: can't do hardware reset
32 ME909s: ME909s not started
33 ME909s: switch off issued
34 ME909s: switch on issued
35 ME909s: HW reset issued
36 ME909s: can't switch echo off
37 ME909s: can't find out state of registration
38 ME909s: GSM signal not found
39 ME909s: no SIM memory for SMS
40 ME909s: waiting for registration
41 Can't read operator name
42 ME909s: can't set flow control
43 APN not typed
255 Only running communication is needed to indicate

Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Instal package to computer or open PSI to instal it into InteliConfig
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via InteliConfig
Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate firmware
you want to program into the module (in InteliConfig).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.
The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is reestablished again automatically when the
update process is finished.

Extension modules
EM-BIO8-EFCP 567

InteliLite Global Guide 566

 EM-BIO8-EFCP
EM-BIO8-EFCP is optional plug-in card. Through this card controller can accommodate up to 8 binary inputs or
outputs. In InteliConfig PC configuration tool it is possible to easily choose if particular I/O will be binary input or
output.

Image 9.21 EM-BIO8-EFCP interface

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.

Image 9.22 Overview of EM-BIO8-EFCP

Note: Current inputs are supported only in MRS16 and AMF25 controllers.

InteliLite Global Guide 567

 Image 9.23 EM-BIO8-EFCP wiring

Note: Current inputs are supported only in MRS16 and AMF25 controllers.

EM-BIO8-EFCP technical data

Power supply
Power supply range 8-36 VDC
40 mA / 8 VDC
27 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
22 mA / 24 VDC
19 mA / 36 VDC

Binary inputs
Number Up to 8, non-isolated
0-2 VDC close contact
Close/Open indication
>6 VDC open contact

Binary outputs
Number Up to 8 , non-isolated

Max. current 0,5A

Switching to positive supply terminal

Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Instal package to computer or open PSI to instal it into InteliConfig
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via InteliConfig
Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate firmware
you want to program into the module (in InteliConfig).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.

InteliLite Global Guide 568

 The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is reestablished again automatically when the
update process is finished.

8.3.2 CAN modules

Extension modules 569

The available extension CAN modules are:

Inteli AIN8 - extension CAN module with 8 analog inputs
Inteli IO8/8 - extension CAN module with 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
this CAN module can be switched to Inteli IO 16/0 - extension CAN module with 16 binary inputs and 2
analog outputs

Supported combinations of modules

Slot Inteli AIN8 Inteli AIN8TC Inteli IO8/8 Inteli IO 16/0 IGL-RA15 IGS-PTM Inteli AIO9/1

IMPORTANT: In slot 3, 4 and 5 CAN modules Inteli IO8/8 and Inteli IO 16/0 are supported without
analog outputs. Analog outputs of these CAN modules are supported only in slot 1 and 2.

It is possible to add up to 80 binary inputs or up to 68 binary outputs or up to 32 analog inputs on CAN modules.

Extension modules
Inteli AIN8 569
Inteli IO8/8 575
IGS-PTM 582
Inteli AIN8TC 588
Inteli AIO9/1 592

Inteli AIN8
Inteli AIN8 module is extension module equipped with analog inputs. Inteli AIN8 module is connected to
controller by CAN1 bus.

InteliLite Global Guide 569

 Image 9.24 Inteli AIN8

Image 9.25 Inteli AIN8 dimensions

Note: All dimensions are in mm.

InteliLite Global Guide 570

 Terminals

Analog input 8 analog Inputs

CAN CAN1 line
Power Power supply
CAN LED Tx, Rx Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position “ON” - switch both switches)

Note: Impulse input is not supported.

Analog inputs
8 channels
can be configured as:
resistor three wire input
current input
voltage input
All inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
IMPORTANT: Impulse input is not supported in controller.

Supported sensors

Sensors
User curves NI100 [°F] (fix) 0-5V
PT100 [°C] (fix) NI1000 [°F] (fix) 0-10V
PT1000 [°C] (fix) 4-20mA passive

InteliLite Global Guide 571

 Sensors
NI100 [°C] (fix) 0-2400ohm 4-20mA active
NI1000 [°C] (fix) 0-10k ohm 0-20mA passive
PT100 [°F] (fix) +-1V +-20mA active
PT1000 [°F] (fix) 0-2.4V

CAN address
DIP switch determinates CAN address for analog inputs.

Note: In case of setting the CAN address to zero, the appropriate group of signals is deactivated.

Programming firmware
Firmware upgrade process:
1. Disconnect all terminals from the unit.
2. Separate the top cover of module
3. Put the TEST jumper on a pins
4. Connect the unit with PC via RS232-null modem cable and AT-Link conv

5. Connect power supply of the module (status LED lights continuously)

6. Launch FlashPgr.exe PC software (version 4.2 or higher)
7. In FlashPrg program choose card Inteli AIN8 and load FW for the module
8. Set the proper COM port (connected with the unit) and press Start button

InteliLite Global Guide 572

 9. Wait till process is done (If the process doesn’t start – after 60 second the “Timeout” will be evaluated. In this
case please check:
You have proper connection with the unit
COM port selection is correct
Module has power supply, (no CAN bus connection, status LED lights continuously)
10. After successful programming disconnect AT-Link conv , remove TEST jumper and disconnect power
supply
11. Connect power supply again (status LED should blinking)
12. Module FW is upgraded

LED indication

LED status Description
Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address).
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8 and controller
works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN address
module doesn’t communicate with the controller).

Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of sensors.
Terminator

Resistance sensor - 3 wires

Note: Ranges: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, 0 – 2400 Ω, 0 – 10 kΩ

InteliLite Global Guide 573

 Resistance sensor - 2 wires

Note: Ranges: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, 0 – 2400 Ω, 0 – 10 kΩ

Current sensor - active

Note: Ranges: ±20 mA, 4 – 20 mA

Current sensor - passive

Note: Ranges: 0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA

InteliLite Global Guide 574

 Voltage sensor

Note: Ranges: ±1 V, 0 – 2,5 V, 0 – 5 V, 0 – 10 V

Technical data

General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 35 mA at 24 V ÷ 100 mA at 8 V
Interface to controller CAN1
Protection IP20
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 110x110x46 mm (4,3”x4,3”x1,8”)
Weight 221,5 grams

Analog inputs
Number of channels 8
Range 0-10 V
Voltage
Accuracy: ± 0,25 % of actual value + ± 25 mV
Range: ±20 mA
Current
Accuracy: ± 0,25 % of actual value + ± 50 µA
Range: 0- 10 kΩ
Resistive
Accuracy: ± 0,5 % of actual value + ± 2 Ω

Inteli IO8/8
Inteli IO8/8 module is an extension module equipped with binary inputs, binary outputs and analog outputs.
Inteli IO8/8 is the name of the module, but it is possible to configure the module (by internal switch) to two
configurations:
Inteli IO8/8 - 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
Inteli IO 16/0 - 16 binary inputs, 0 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
The detection of communication speed is indicated by fast flashing of status LED. Once the speed is detected
the module remains set for the speed even when the communication is lost. Renewal of communication speed
detection is done by reset of the module.

InteliLite Global Guide 575

 Image 9.26 Inteli IO8/8

Image 9.27 Inteli IO8/8 dimensions

Note: All dimensions are in mm.

InteliLite Global Guide 576

 Terminals

Binary inputs 8 binary inputs

Binary outputs 8 binary outputs (8 binary inputs)
Analog outputs 2 analog outputs
CAN CAN1 line
Power Power supply
Binary inputs LEDs 8 LEDs for binary input indication
Binary outputs LEDs 8 LEDs for binary output indication
CAN LED Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position “ON” - switch both switches)

Inputs and outputs

Binary inputs
8 channels
can be configured as:
pull up
pull down
All 8 inputs are configured to one type together.
All inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
Binary outputs

InteliLite Global Guide 577

 8 channels
can be configured as:
High side switch
Low side switch
Always all 8 inputs are configured to one type (HSS/LSS) together. All 8 outputs can be modified to inputs by
switch on the PCB ( Inteli IO8/8 to Inteli IO 16/0).
Analog outputs
2 channels
can be configured as:
voltage 0-10V
current 0-20mA
PWM (level 5V, with adjustable frequency from 200Hz to 2400Hz, with step 1Hz)
All inputs/outputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.

Output state check

Output state check function evaluates in real time the state of binary outputs and adjusted (required) state. In
case of failure (different state of required state and real state) history record and alarm are issued (type of the
alarm is set by “Protection upon module failure” - (No protection / Warning / Shutdown)).
This function is designed for short-circuit or other failure, which causes change of set state of binary output.

CAN address
In Inteli IO8/8 mode CAN address for binary inputs is determined by DIP switch A, CAN address for binary
output and analog outputs is determined by DIP switch B.
In Inteli IO 16/0 mode CAN address for binary inputs is determined by DIP switch A, first group of 8 input has
address A, second group of 8 inputs has address A+1. CAN address of analog outputs is set by DIP switch B.

Note: In case of setting the CAN address to zero, the appropriate group of signals is deactivated.

Programming firmware
Firmware upgrade process:
1. Disconnect all terminals from the unit.
2. Separate the top cover of module
3. Put the TEST jumper on a pins

InteliLite Global Guide 578

 4. Connect the unit with PC via RS232-null modem cable and AT-Link conv

5. Connect power supply of the module (status LED lights continuously)

6. Launch FlashPgr.exe PC software (version 4.2 or higher)
7. In FlashPrg program choose card Inteli IO8/8 and load FW for the module
8. Set the proper COM port (connected with the unit) and press Start button
9. Wait till process is done (If the process doesn’t start – after 60 second the “Timeout” will be evaluated. In this
case please check:
You have proper connection with the unit
COM port selection is correct
Module has power supply, (no CAN bus connection, status LED lights continuously)
10. After successful programming disconnect AT-Link conv , remove TEST jumper and disconnect power
supply
11. Connect power supply again (status LED should blinking)
12. Module FW is upgraded

LED indication
Binary input
Each binary input has LED which indicates input signal. LED is shining when input signal is set, and LED is
dark while input signal has other state.
Binary output
Each binary output has LED which indicates output signal. Binary output LED is shining when binary output is
set. When this LED is shining, then module is configured as 8 binary inputs and 8 binary outputs. When this
LED is dark, then the module is configured as 16 binary inputs.
LED at power connector - status LED

InteliLite Global Guide 579

 LED status Description
Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address).
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli IO8/8 and controller
works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN address
module doesn’t communicate with the controller).

Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of inputs and outputs.
Binary inputs - pull up

There are two options of wiring. On upper picture you can see case when binary input is connected between
BIN2 and COM (COM is connected internally to the GND (-) - dashed line).
On lower picture is case of wiring between BIN2 and GND (-). Both ways are correct.
Binary inputs - pull down

There are two options of wiring. On upper picture you can see case when binary input is connected between
BIN2 and COM (COM is connected internally to the Ucc (+) - dashed line).
On lower picture is case of wiring between BIN2 and Ucc (+). Both ways are correct.

InteliLite Global Guide 580

 Binary outputs - high side

When high side setting of outputs is chosen - binary output must be connected to the minus potential directly
Terminal VHS (voltage High side) has to be connected to positive potential directly. Maximal current of each
binary output is 500 mA. Size of fuse depends on load.
Binary outputs - low side

When low side setting of outputs is chosen - binary output must be connected to the plus potential of power
supply directly. Minus potential is connected internally - dashed line.
Analog outputs

Note: Limit of analog ground (AGND) is 100mA.

IMPORTANT: Terminator for analog output has special analog ground (AGND), which must not be
connected to the GND.

Technical data

General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 35 mA at 24 V ÷ 100 mA at 8 V
Interface to controller CAN1
Protection IP20
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C

InteliLite Global Guide 581

 Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 110x110x46 mm (4,3”x4,3”x1,8”)
Weight 240 grams

Analog outputs
Number of channels 2
Range 0-10 V
Voltage Accuracy: ± 20 mV + ±0,5 % of actual value
Imax 5 mA
Range: 0-20 mA
Current Accuracy: ± 100 µA + ±0,5 % of actual value
Rmax 500 Ω
Level 5 V
PWM Frequency - adjustable 200÷2400 Hz
Imax 20 mA

Binary inputs
Number of channels 8 for Inteli IO8/8, 16 for Inteli IO 16/0
Input resistance 4400 Ω
Input range 0 to 36 V DC
Switching voltage level for open contact
0 to 2 V DC
indication
Max voltage level for close contact indication 6 to 36 V DC

Binary outputs
Number of channels 8 for Inteli IO8/8, 0 for Inteli IO 16/0
Max current 500 mA
Max switching voltage 36 V DC

IGS-PTM
IGS-PTM module is extension module equipped with binary inputs, binary outputs, analog inputs and analog
output. IGS-PTM module is connected to controller by CAN1 bus.

InteliLite Global Guide 582

 Image 9.28 IGS-PTM

Image 9.29 IGS-PTM dimensions

InteliLite Global Guide 583

 Terminals

Binary inputs 8 binary inputs

Analog inputs 4 analog inputs
Analog outputs 1 analog output
Binary outputs 8 binary outputs
CAN CAN1 line
RS232-TTL Interface for programming
Power Power supply

Analog inputs
Analog inputs can be configured for:
Resistance measurement
Current measurement
Voltage measurement
The type of analog inputs is configured via jumpers RUI located on lower PCB.

RUI Analog input configuration

1-2 Resistance measuring
2-3 Current measuring
no jumper Voltage measuring

Supported sensors

Sensors
PT100 [°C] (fix) User curves
NI100 [°C] (fix) 0-100 mV
PT100 [°F] (fix) 0-2400 ohm
NI100 [°F] (fix) ±20 mA

InteliLite Global Guide 584

 CAN address
Controller type selection
The type of controller to be used with IGS-PTM must be selected via jumper labeled IGS accessible at the lower
PCB.

IGS jumper Controller type

OPEN IL-NT, IC-NT
CLOSE IG-NT, IS-NT, InteliLite

Address configuration
If InteliLite controller type is selected (by IGS jumper), address of IGS-PTM could be modified via jumpers
labeled ADR1 and ADR2.

ADR1 ADR2 ADR offset BIN module BOUT module AIN module
Open Open 0 (default) 1 1 1
Close Open 1 2 2 2
Open Close 2 3 3 3
Close Close 3 4 4 4

Programing firmware
Firmware upgrade is via AT-link (TTL). For programming is necessary to close jumper BOOT. RESET jumper is
used to reset the device. Close jumper to reset the device. For programming is used FlashProg PC tool.

LED indication
Binary input
Each binary input has LED which indicates input signal. LED is shining when input signal is set, and LED is
dark while input signal has other state.
Binary output
Each binary output has LED which indicates output signal. Binary output LED is shining when binary output is
set.
LED at power connector - status LED

LED status Description
Dark No required power connected.
Quick flashing Program check failure.
One flash and pause Compensation fail.
Three flashes and
Compensation successful.
pause
Flashes There is no communication between IGS-PTM and the controller.
Power supply is in the range and communication between IGS-PTM and controller
Lights
properly works.

InteliLite Global Guide 585

 Wiring
Binary inputs

Binary outputs

Resistance sensor

Note: Range: 0- 2400 Ω

IMPORTANT: Physical analog input range is 0-250 Ω. In sensor configuration in PC tool it is

necessary to chose 0-2400 Ω sensor HW type to ensure proper function of analog input.

Voltage sensor

Note: Range 0-100 mV

InteliLite Global Guide 586

 Current sensor - passive

Note: Range: ± 0-20 mA

IMPORTANT: Physical analog input range is 0-20mA. In sensor configuration in PC tool it is

necessary to chose +- 20mA active sensor HW type to ensure proper function of analog input.

Analog outputs

Note: Range: 0 to 20 mA ± 0,33 mA

Technical data

General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 100 mA at 24V ÷ 500 mA
Interface to controller CAN1
Protection IP20
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 95×96×43 mm (3.7’×3.8’×1.7’)

Analog inputs
Number of channels 8
Range 0-100 mV
Voltage
Accuracy: 1,5 % ± 1 mV out of measured value
Range: 0-20 mA
Current
Accuracy: 2.5 % ± 0,5 ohm out of measured value
Range: 0- 250 Ω
Resistive
Accuracy: 1 % ± 2 ohm out of measured value

InteliLite Global Guide 587

 Analog outputs
Number of channels 1
Range: 0 to 20 mA ± 0,33 mA
Current
Resolution 10 bit

Binary inputs
Number of channels 8
Input resistance 4700 Ω
Input range 0 to 36 V DC
Switching voltage level for open contact
0 to 2 V DC
indication
Max voltage level for close contact indication 8 to 36 V DC

Binary outputs
Number of channels 8
Max current 500 mA
Max switching voltage 36 V DC
Number of channels 8
Range 0-100 mV
Voltage
Accuracy: 1,5 % ± 1 mV out of measured value
Range: 0-20 mA
Current
Accuracy: 2.5 % ± 0,5 ohm out of measured value
Range: 0- 250 Ω
Resistive
Accuracy: 1 % ± 2 ohm out of measured value

Inteli AIN8TC
Inteli AIN8TC module is extension module equipped with 8 analog inputs dedicated for thermocouple sensors
only.
The detection of communication speed is indicated by fast flashing of status LED. Once the speed is detected
the module remains set for the speed even when the communication is lost. Renewal of communication speed
detection is done by reset of the module.

InteliLite Global Guide 588

 Image 9.30 Inteli AIN8TC

Image 9.31 Inteli AIN8TC dimensions

InteliLite Global Guide 589

 Terminals

ANALOG INPUT 8 analog Inputs

CAN CAN1 line
POWER Power supply
CAN LED Tx, Rx Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position “ON”)
TEST jumper Upgrade of sw
AT-LINK Connector for AT-LINK

Analog inputs
8 channels
can be configured as thermocouple sensors only

Supported sensors

Sensors
Thermocpl J [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl J [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl K [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl L [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°C] (fix)

InteliLite Global Guide 590

 Thermocpl (nc) K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) K [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) L [°F] (fix)

Note: “nc” means not cold junction compensation (by external sensor).In this case is used internal temperature
sensor on the PCB

Address and DIP switch setting

Address configuration
DIP switch determinates CAN address for analog inputs.
Programming firmware
Firmware is upgraded via AT-link (TTL). For programming it is necessary to close jumper TEST.
For programming FlashProg PC tool version 4.2 or higher must be used.

LED indication

LED status Description

Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address)
Fast flashing Detection of CAN communication speed
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8TC and
controller works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN
address module doesn’t communicate with the controller)

Wiring
Analog inputs

Terminaor

InteliLite Global Guide 591

 Technical data

Dimension (W × H × D) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3” × 4.3” × 1.8”)

Weight 237.5 grams
Interface to controller CAN1

Analog inputs (not electric separated) 8, no galvanic separated

Measuring ±100 mV
Accuracy ± 0.1 % of actual value + ± 100 µV (± 3 °C)
Internal sensor for measuring cold junction - Accuracy ±1 °C in temperature range -20 °C ÷ +70 °C
CANbus is galvanic separated from the
measurement and power supply.
All analog inputs are galvanic separated from
Galvanic separation
power supply.
Analog inputs are not galvanic separated
between channels

Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Protection IP20
Current consumption 35 mA at 24 V ÷ 100 mA at 8 V
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 70 °C
Heat radiation 2W

Thermocouples galvanically separated and galvanically non-separated are supported.

Inteli AIO9/1
Inteli AIO9/1 module is extension module equipped with analog inputs and outputs – designed for DC
measurement.
The detection of communication speed is indicated by fast flashing of status LED. Once the speed is detected
the module remains set for the speed even when the communication is lost. Renewal of communication speed
detection is done by reset of the module.

InteliLite Global Guide 592

 Image 9.32 Inteli AIO9/1

Image 9.33 Inteli AIO9/1 dimensions

InteliLite Global Guide 593

 Terminals

ANALOG INPUT 9 channels

ANALOG OUTPUTS 1 channel
CAN CAN1 line
POWER Power supply
CAN LED Tx, Rx Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position “ON”)
TEST jumper Upgrade of sw
AT-LINK Connector for AT-LINK (Upgrade of sw)

Analog inputs
4 channels AIN1 – AIN4 can be configured as:
Sensor ±65V (it is determinated for measurement of battery voltage)
4 channels AIN5 – AIN8 can be configured as:
Thermocouples – type J,K or L (in °C or °F)
Sensor ±75mV DC – (for connecting current shunts)
1 channel AIN9 can be configured as:
RTD (Pt1000, Ni1000)
Common resistance 0-2400Ω

InteliLite Global Guide 594

 Analog outputs
1 channel AOUT1. Type of output:
0-10V DC
0-20mA
PWM (5V, freq 2,4Hz ÷2,4kHz)
Analog output has 4-pins connector – GND and one pin for each type of output.
All analog inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.

Supported sensors

Sensors
User curves
PT1000 [°C] (fix)
NI1000 [°C] (fix)
0-2400Ω (fix linear)
± 65 V DC (fix linear)
+-75mV (fix linear)
Thermocpl J [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) K [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) L [°F] (fix)

Address and DIP switch setting

Address configuration
DIP switch determinates CAN address for analog inputs and outputs.
Programming Firmware
Firmware upgrade is via AT-link (TTL). For programming it is necessary to close jumper TEST and switch OFF
and switch ON the power supply.
For programming use FlashProg PC tool version 4.4 or higher.

LED indication

LED status Description

Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address)

InteliLite Global Guide 595

 Fast flashing Detection of CAN communication speed
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8TC and
controller works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN
address module doesn’t communicate with the controller)

Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of sensors.

Measuring resistance – AIN9

2 – wire measurement

Ranges: Pt1000, Ni1000, 0 – 2400 Ω.

Analog input 9 is determined for measuring resistance only.

InteliLite Global Guide 596

 Technical data

Dimension (W × H × D) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3” × 4.3” × 1.8”)

Weight 248 grams
CAN1 – galvanic separated from power supply
Interface to controller
and measurement,

Analog inputs (not electric separated) 9 channels

0-65 V ± 0.25 % of actual value + ± 120 mV
Measurement is not galvanic separated from power
Range
supply, but IN- is not interconnected with GND –
AIN1-AIN4 – Voltage inputs
there is floating measurement.
Accuracy of
± 0,1 % of actual value + ± 100 µV (± 3 °C)
measurement
Range ± 75 mV (nominal) (measurement up to ±80 mV)
AIN5-AIN8 – Voltage inputs Accuracy of ± 0.1 % of actual value + ± 75 µV
measurement Galvanic separated from power supply
Range 0- 2400 Ω
± 0.5 % of actual value + ± 4 Ω Pt1000, Ni1000 ±
AIN9 resistance input Accuracy of
2,5 °C
measurement
It is not galvanic separated from power supply.

Analog output
I 0-20mA /500Rmax. ± 1 % of actual value + ± 200 uA
U 0-10V ± 0.5 % of actual value + ± 50 mV
PWM – 5 V, 200 Hz-2.4kHz 15 mA max.
Galvanic separated from power supply

Galvanic separation CAN bus is galvanic separated from the measurement and power supply

Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Protection IP20
Current consumption 150 mA at 24 V ÷ 400 mA at 8 V
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 80 °C

The product is fully supported in fw IGS-NT 3.1.1 or higher.

Information about support this module in IGS-NT fw branches and ID-DCU – please read New Feature Lists.

InteliLite Global Guide 597